Home

efesotomasyon.com - Control Techniques,emerson,saftronics

1. rigo le tell lel jo ogh g n 9 o 9 o i P E mr uar 9 cern J g n i 4 b L er 7 A kaasa Bed fl I or ul Y dn a e j l l AN hi RN d 5 LT E ee l Es Fr RES l RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOM een Soptthn J A e Te 5 I Im E c la I L J E l g Per M idpggostn s es q LZ E Ball 4 zm dd Jes iss l ekle 9 3l ils CORRE iets Ft o elele ele ele ER X e Oe To 7 S noel efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor CONTENTS Introduction 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 1 System Configuration of UPAC 1 1 1 System Configuration 1 1 2 Requirements of PC 1 2 Preparation of Option 1 2 1 OPC VG7 UPAC Option 1 2 2 OPC VG7 SI Option 1 3 Preparation of Software 1 3 1 Installation Method 1 3 2 Changing the Program 1 3 3 Uninstalling wee enero i n 1 3 4 Starting D300win 6868 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples sessnsss
2. Table 5 2 19 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type 3 See control block diagram a for more information IW3 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation 991W3 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW3 2 3 a Torque current reference final 10000 100 INT Just before torque current L reference filter 991W3 3 4 Magnetic flux reference final 10000 100 INT IW3 4 5 2 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT IW3 5 6 E no data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W o i IW3 6 7 B Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW3 7 8 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT 9 Before multistep speed during V f a reference IW3 8 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT T IW3 9 10 5 Pulse train position reference PG 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 2 10 and 11 are used for pulse PR cycle Z train synchronized control IW3 10 11 8 Position detection built in or PG 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 11 12 and 13 are used for c PD cycle orientation control IW3 11 12 8 Position detection Z phase input 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 8
3. X1 o o M DRV Individual motor operation Detected dancer roll position tote ko U36 X1 function DANDCT os y gt Y2 X2 5 o APRIZH APR zero hold ya U37 X2 function t gt Y4 gt Y5 X3 5 o APRZH APR output zero hold U54 Dancer roll position Poems function detection assignment 7 X4 o o D HOLD Winding diameter calculation hold U39 X4 function X5 o o 1 D_SET Initial diameter setup U40 X5 function X6 5 zi WRW Winding feeding AO1 TP AO1 z1 L gt AO1 U41 X6 function Aen output U43 AO1 function AO2 DAN AO2 Dancer roll position 9 07 gt A02 Aio mo U44 AO2 function of s TP_AIG Analog taper gain cae REA Andleg intial stemetar Winding diameter rao 819 A03 Ini I Sp e 3 9 U45 AO3 function L U42 AI2 function VG7 side 1 UPAC side UPAC side 1 VG7side Fig 4 1 3 Block diagram of UPAC dancer roll control software 3 4 Winding diameter calculation D SET D HOLD Initial diameter setup Max winding Winding diameter calculation hold e ratio Line mu E n i Winding diameter ratio speed gt E gt Limit aa pr gt Limit gt gt Filter output a Dead zone li pe i 5s Filter Motor 3 ma Min wind
4. Table 5 2 18 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name d S IE Type 3 See control block diagram ata distinction D a for more information IW2 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation 991W2 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW 2 2 3 a Torque current reference final 10000 100 INT Just before torque current o reference filter IW2 3 4 Magnetic flux reference final 10000 100 INT IW2 4 5 2 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT IW2 5 6 E Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W o 16 bit IW2 6 7 B Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW2 7 8 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT 9 Before multistep speed during V f a reference IW2 8 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW2 9 10 5 Pulse train position reference PG 1 1 latched at 4ms INT S 10 and 11 are used for pulse E PR cycle Z train synchronized control IW2 10 11 8 Position detection built in or PG 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 11 12 and 13 are used for c PD cycle orientation control IW2 11 12 8 Position detection Z phase input 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 8 PG PD cycle IW2 12 13 a S05 Position reference 1 1 INT IW2 13 14 DI DIOB option 16bit of INV2 Data distinction 26 W IW2 14 15 D 7 Ai Ai1 of INV2 40
5. Table 5 2 48 Code Description Display setting Resolution Notes 0 Integer 0 1 2 3 1 1 Integer 0 2 4 6 2 Only for pole number of motor 2 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 1 3 Fixed point 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 01 4 0 001 0 002 0 003 0 001 5 Integer signed 2 1 0 1 2 1 6 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 7 Fixed point signed 0 01 0 00 0 01 0 01 8 0 001 0 000 0 001 0 001 Initial cursor position is left end Cursor does not move automatically 9 Hexadecimal 1A8E 1h When setting range is from 00 to 11 you should specify individual digits to set only 00 01 10 or 11 10 Special data 3 0 75 1 2 14 15 Carrier frequency setting 11 Operation data 1 Reset to 0 after writing The following data have special formats Type 12 Time current power PID process values 15 14 11 9 0 HE HEENENNEENENNEN 1 0 1 times 10 0 to 99 9 2 1 times 100 to 999 3 10 times 1 000 to 9 990 Polarity 0 Positive 1 Negative EM Mantissa Exponent 0 0 to 999 Exponent 1 to 3 100 to 999 Exponent 0 0 01 times 0 00 to 9 99 Type 13 Current and others 15 13 0 L Mantissa o Exponent 0 0 to 9999 Exponent 1 to 3 1 000 to 9 999 Exponent 0 0 01 times 0 00 to 99 99 1 0 1 times 100 0 to 999 9 2 1 times 1 000 to 9 999 3 10 times 10 000 to 99 990 5 51 efesotomasyon c
6. LN Y uonoajap uone noje A uognoe409 ZH LIN Buryesq uo dis LW eum uonoalo2 eeduie zd BuiAup uo dijs LW uon eouejsjoj YORE 0 40 ebau p ouenbeJj 1 L JejnBue Hewud uonoejep peedg uojpejep PI juejsuoo euin on un waung Ty D uossienuco bi jepuooes LIA 1098 i anjeA pejejnopeo g juooueoo Qndino daemones ynduy UOISJBAUOS uoneanjes oneube Jojuoui q37 jeued QvdA3M i uonparep MAD eseud ze 9 PA uogemoreo p3 p gt uone nojeo a pe AUO TM a eBeyo GEPA xny a37 jeued avd uoneines oneufe i WoA L nA cby peonpul b3 9 oneubeyy s Mare C ET uoneJnjes 9neuDej i 40d X IW Z 1ueroyjeoo uoneines eue 1ueroyjeoo uojeinjes eue Md z 4emod indui Ov 3 47 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface Oo O en O O co S eo 90d LH LN AN esueduioo soyesaueb 2Z4_ 8U0 punos 1030 doup eBeyoA e i PRES 924 Aouanbay sawed Y eouelejo1 lt m gt l 4 uonesueduoo MA uossanuoo PN xnyoneuBeu e9u81801 l lt ejep uo eseud c z xni onau amp i 7 l WMd e uolsuenuoa A uisinuo roneubew H 9 enem Jepiozede1 j 4 nA owen Lg e2uei9jo1 lt n gt
7. O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 Operate torque limiter levels 1 and 2 according to the user specification separation between driving and braking same level between driving and braking etc Refer to the VG7S User s Manual for how to use the torque limit 1 How to use To reflect the torque limit calculated at UPAC on VG7S place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset In the figure below torque limiter 1 is switched lt 1 E 5 Ej fa e Torque limit value Torque limit value level 1 selection F42 F43 level 2 selection PIDOUT 7 PID calculation output Ol o1 5 OIO PID calculation output esas 1 05 e 4 EHE Dl JET mee 4 TL REF2 PIDOUT Other torque limit elements OPC VG7 DIA DIB 3 TL REF 1 Torque limit value l level 1 F44 Torque limit value 1 of UPAC Torque limit value at mm Fon level 2 Torque limit value 2 of UPAC OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC RE UPACSW Dy UPAC SW Torque limit mode 1 F40 Torque limit mode 2 F41 VD Torque Torque reference limit after limiting Torque reference Fig 3 1 10 Place a check mark in the torque limiter level 1 check box in the I O Group setting screen of output Inverter 1 Output word ord Name 1 Speed settin
8. e L01 f e e INV116_SPDREF1 e in d Ladder La Fig 2 4 7 Continue to compile the program in the Build B and Make M method If there is no error in the program Error 0 is displayed as a result Disregard the warnings SCH D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER hs File Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras windo w Help Make 0 s a r E fy Batch Pol Compile Worksheet Shits Rebuild Project Ctrl F3 X Project E Stop compile a D Goto Nez Ena Biken E Logical POUs fio to Previous Erno She 118 SPDREF1 a ep Build Cross References F12 iR Ladder LA Collecting POUs used by RESOURCE R_UPAC Generating IEC code for RESOURCE R UPAC Building instance tree for RESOURCE R UPAC aimi mmm Generating specific Code for CONFIGURATION C VG7 6 T Generating specific Code for RESOURCE R UPAC 9 0 Error s 1 Warning s Build A Errors PC Errors Fig 2 4 8 2 23 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Double click on System Definition in the tree structure of the project H D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER a File Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help D as er x te basser r era
9. 4 Connection example using standard I O terminal Main power supply ea een ERE 3 phase power supply FRENIC5000VG7 50 60Hz o L1 R L2 s O L3 T Forward rotation command o FWD Reverse rotation command o REV Orientation command o x1 Slow speed direction command x2 Position change command x3 ASR acceleration deceleration command x4 gear change 1 RA ASR acceleration deceleration command x5 gear change 2 E Stopping position switch 1 o X6 Pping p X6 Stopping position switch 2 o x7 nmn Orientation completion signal Y1 Orientation signal o Y2 Fig 4 2 12 4 28 TU t 1 x Q Q o e gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software The control block diagram of the UPAC orientation option is shown below 1 Meaning of term ASR Speed adjuster ORT Position adjuster Adjuster that functions when the spindle is in the control zone Automatic subtraction pattern calculation Calculation of subtraction pattern of spindle that functions in the correction mode when the shaft 1s outside the control zone Control zone judgment Orientation 1s switched depending on judgment of the spindle in the control zone 11 25 The orientatio
10. D 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 2 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks awo 10 5 eon data CW Data type 32 WORD UPAC gt VG7S standard DIOA 16 bit O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 There are two methods to issue an operation command FWD REV 1 operation at other than UPAC and 2 operation at UPAC The features of the operation command concerning UPAC are operation under AND condition between external command and UPAC command and that the operation command becomes invalid if the final command of both FWD and REV are ON 1 How to use The operation command is issued basically at the terminal block keypad panel or communication system UPAC can issue or stop these external commands under the AND logic condition shown in the figure below This is the operation of UPAC On the other hand when the UPAC SW is in the OFF state in reference to the system definition control data operation can be made with external commands other than those from UPAC without relations to UPAC Terminal Selection of operation omitted Forward rotation C3 Built in RS485 l command n H Option card OFF l AND i oO OPC VG7 TL ON a Field bus E per OPC VG7 RS 77 Fonward rotation command z from UPAC OPC VG7 UPAC i 221 oe ubxcEW Fig 3 1 1 The memory for giving forw
11. E79 e79 f INT MW11 175 014Fh i 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 6 Yes AO1 bias setting E80 9 MW 11 176 0150h AO bias setting 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 96 Yes E81 MW11 177 0151h AO3 bias setting 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 Yes 5 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 E82 MW 11 178 0152h AO4 bias setting Displayed for models with AIO option Yes j 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 E83 MW 11 179 0153h AOS bias setting Displayed for models with AIO option Yes Table 5 2 40 C Control Functions of Frequenc 60 ms updating and A referencing data High speed F code Variabi updating Name Setting range name C01 fco 4 MW11 193 0201h Jump speed setting 0 to 24000 r min Jump speed 1 wr p o C03 NT MW11 195 0203h Jump speed 3 o 24000 r min NT MW11 196 0204h Jump width o 1000 r min NT e o 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min NT o 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C21 T o 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C21 o 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C21 o 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C21 Multistep speed setting C05 MW 11 197 0205h Multistep speed 1 d MW 11 198 0206h Multistep speed 2 C07 4d MW 11 199 0207h Multistep speed 3 C08 d MW 11 200 0208h ti o Q N witched according to 24000 r min 0 00 witched according o 24000 r min 0 00 witched according o 24000 r min 0 00 witched according o 24000 r min 0 00 witched according s cog d MW 11 201 0209h M
12. I amp KL ST S I amp S Memory diagnosis execute C Memory diagnosis not exect Fig 1 3 43 How to start system definition 1 41 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao Sz am 5 a 3 The UPAC system definition screen includes the following property sheet with five property pages classified by the setting item e System configration definition e CPU operation definition e Memory boundary definition e I O group setting e Communication setting 2 System configration definition The first property page of the UPAC system definition screen You define the hardware constitution such as inverter to be used and type of inter inverter link on this sheet UPAC system definition x Memory boundary definition l 1 0 group setting Communication setting System configration definition CPU operation definition r Inverter Tact cycle Number of Inverters 6 Equipment SXsta HOLD mode Inverter 1 1 Reset mode 2 HBLD mode change Normal value 2 0ms v Inverter 3 3 Reset mode iw Inverter 4 4 Reset mode Inverter 5 5 Reset mode v Inverter 6 6 Reset mode v Option 1 0 ri Reset mode a Setting 3 0ms M Tact cycle Link type between inverters C Optical link Normal value 2 0ms Simple RS485 link L r Initialization method sel
13. Note The alarm codes 1 to 32 constitute a code system specific to the VG7S different from the assignment for the general purpose inverters The communication error codes 71 to 81 are common to the different models Note that some causes of alarm are specific to models The KEYPAD panel does not display raw communication error codes but the values in the KEYPAD panel display column in the table above The KEYPAD panel displays when it receives data that does not have a corresponding KEYPAD panel display in the table above 5 55 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Type 35 X function normally open closed Type 36 Y function normally open closed 15 87 0 EDEN X function Y function 0 X1 Y1 1 X2 Y2 2 X3 Y3 3 X4 Y4 4 X5 Y5 0 Normally open 5 X6 1 Normally closed 6 X7 7 X8 8 X9 Type 40 to 99 These types are reserved for the manufacturer Users can considers these types as type 0 to use Type 125 Control output 1 15 87 0 Ss NEN 0 Inverter running RUN 1 Speed existence N EX 2 Speed agreement N AG P 3 Speed equivalence N AR 29 4 Detected speed 1 N DT1 ET 5 Detected speed 2 N DT2 F 6 Detected speed 3 N DT3 33 7 Stopping on undervoltage LU amp 8 Detected torque polarity braking driving B D 9 Torque limiting TL 10 Detected torque 1 T DT1 11 Detected torque 2 T DT2 12 KEYPAD operation mode KP
14. O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 The torque bias command is added immediately after the ASR output of VG7S control some of the standard torque control systems of VG7S observer function torque limit can be used 1 How to use To reflect the torque bias command calculated at UPAC on VG7S place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset In the figure below the torque bias command is switched from other torque bias calculation UPAC SW Speed control system T l Magnetic l flux l l l reference Torque bias from UPAC OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Fig 3 1 12 Place a check mark at the torque bias check box in the 70 Gro res x I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC Inyeter eut Wore System Definition I O group setting of the D300win me L1 8 Deceleration time Screen 8 Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 Al T Speed setting 4 frequency referencelV f 12 Torque reference 2 OOO The torque bias data is converted assuming that 10000 is the 100 torque with the rated torque being 100 Data 10000 Torque 14 Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed Address of function code 1 of INV1 17 Data of function code 1 of INV1 18 Address of function code 2 of INV1 19 Data of function code 2 of INV1 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 Dat
15. 2 Broadcasting connection The figure on the right indicates connection of n units The division between the receiving and transmitting stations is given with SWI Table 2 3 10 SW1 SI option definition 0 Transmitter V V 1 Receiver VG7 2 VG7 3 VG7 n 2to9 Er6 or Erb is caused SW1 1 SW1 1 SW1 1 FE H31 2 H31 3 H31 n 035 gives definition of the link Bernd peice plea address 036 n 1 036 n 1 036 n 1 Number of slave units n 1 2 lt n lt 12 total n units Table 2 3 11 Fig 2 3 2 035 036 Sl option definition 100 n 1 Master 101 n 1 Slave 1 102 n 1 Slave 2 99 n n 1 Slave n 2n Er6 or Erb is caused 2 18 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 4 Basic Operation Examples In this section a series of operations from concrete specification determination preparation of programs downloading to UPAC to VG7S control by UPAC are described through simple examples for giving speed commands The most basic and important description is made here Read through the description and fully understand Description assumes that you are already familiar with basic operations of D300win For details of operation of D300win refer to the D300win user s manual 2 4 1 Determination of Specification Specification e Give
16. voltage at the voltage at the Feeding loose limit to U06 loose limit to U05 Winding Fig 4 1 5 4 6 TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software Table 4 1 3 Indication on LCD screen Effective setting range Note 1 Unit Min incre ment Initial value Remarks Page Reference Initial diameter 1 If U35 is not zero this setting becomes the winding diameter at startup If U35 is zero the above change in the winding diameter is USER P35 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 mm mm 1 700 700 mm O canceled 2 If U40 is 1 and D SET is assigned to X5 the setting is written to the calculated winding diameter when X5 D SET is turned on X1 terminal function USER P36 0 No assignment X1 NOP 1 0 Note 2 1 Individual motor operation M DR Specify 25 X2 terminal function 0 No assignment X2 NOP USER Par 1 APR zero hold APRIZH 1 o Note 2 Specify 25 U DI at E02 U38 X3 terminal function 0 No assignment X3 NOP o USER P38 1 APR output zero hold APRZH 1 9 Note 2 Specify 25 U DI at E03 E z n of
17. Table 5 2 17 FS BS S Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type 3 See control block diagram a for more information 9591W1 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation IW1 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter 591W1 2 3 i Torque current reference final 10000 100 INT Just before torque current o reference filter 991W1 3 4 3 Magnetic flux reference final 10000 100 INT 991W1 4 5 2 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT IW1 5 6 E Fn data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W o i IW1 6 7 z Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W 9591W1 7 8 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT g Before multistep speed during V f a reference IW1 8 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT T IW1 9 10 5 Pulse train position reference PG 1 1 latched at4ms INT 10 and 11 are used for pulse E PR period Z train synchronized control IW1 10 11 g Position detection built in or PG 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 11 12 and 13 are used for PD period orientation control IW1 11 12 8 Position detection Z phase input 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 8 PG PD period IW1 12 13 E S05 Position reference 1 1 INT IW1 13 14 DI DIOB option 16bit of INV1 Data distinction 26 W IW1 14 15 D 3 Ai Ai1 of INV1 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW1 15 16 9 Ai Ai2 of INV1 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai
18. When you use Ao4 and Ao5 you need an AIO option OPC VG7 AIO 4 53 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 5 Table Setting Relevant Paramete 1 U Code Parameters Subject to setting adjusting for UPAC tension control a Change KoD gena Ve eei eE Min unit Initial value during English Note 1 operation U01 Stalltension setting TIN UsERP1 0 980 0 980 N N 1 POD PLC Yes 449 U02 Operation tension setting EN USER P2 0 980 0 980 N N 1 POD PLC Yes 4 49 U03 Material thickness MEM UsERP3 1 30000 0001 30 mm mm 001 POD PLC Yes 449 UO4 Material width USERP4 100 2000 100 mm 1 Poppic Yes 449 2000 mm uos Tension upper limit error level H UseRP5 0 1980 0 1960N N 1 POD PLC Yes 449 U06 Lowerlimit error level RII UscRPe 0 980 0 980 N N 1 POD PLC Yes 449 U07 Wound diameter Initial value Wy USERP7 100 2000 100 mm 1 Poppic Yes 449 2000 mm UOB Material mass vos USERP8 500 2000 200 kg m 1 POD PLC Yes 449 2000 kg m i U09 Linear taper setting EJ userPo 0 150 0 150 96 1 POD PLC Yes 4 49 U10 Two point taper setting USERP10 0 150 0 150 1 POD PLC Yes 449 Ut1 Two point taper diameter
19. ua2 APR output limit Setting 0 to 200 0 to 200 Correction method PID Setting 0 1 Integration APR I or differentiation APR D is made for the deviation in the input of the dancer roll position The functions of U18 and U19 are canceled if the setting is zero Use the U46 setting to change the integration and differentiation inputs 4 11 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor U46 0 Suppose that the APR I and APR D inputs are dancer roll input positions Dancer roll EN APR output position input EX P U46 1 Suppose APR I and APR D inputs are APR P outputs Dancer roll position input Ez APR output When U46 is zero Dancer roll position input APR output Limitation in ASR output U31 sets a limit in the APR I output and U32 sets a limit in the APR output with additional P I D value The percent value of the limit indicates the level of the dancer roll position input If U32 APR output limit U31 APR I output limit the APR I output is limited to the U32 APR output limit value TU I o x Q Qa ao e 9 E D When U46 is 1 Dancer roll position input APR output APR P DL Dancer roll level for application of APR P I DL Setting 10 to 100 10 to 100 ASR P DS Setting 1 to 2 000 0 1 to 200 0 Multiplication u21 APR P DM Setting 1 to 2 000 0 1 to 200 0 Mul
20. 5 Burwwei6oig 9VdN Fig 5 2 4 Note Cold operation is initiated when Initial start from D300win or cold operation request VG7S function code 038 2 from VGZ7S is issued Warm operation is initiated when Start from D300win or warm operation request VG7S function code 038 1 is issued 5 6 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 2 1 4 Instance memory area for user FB This area is a unique instance memory for individual user FBs of different types used in UPAC Key point 1 An application program and D300win loader should not read write this area Otherwise the action of user FB will not be guaranteed 2 The size of the instance memory can be changed in cooperation with individual memory areas Use CPU Memory size definition in Resource setting dialog box to change the size IEC expression MW 5 0 Instance memory for user FB default value Fig 5 2 5 5 7 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 2 1 5 Instance memory area for system FB This area is a unique instance memory for individual system FBs of different types such as timer counter differentiation instruction used in UPAC Key point 1 An application program and D300win loader should not read write this area Otherwise the action of timer or counter will not be guaranteed 2 Prescribed initializati
21. Transmission rate 38400bps 19200bps 9600bps 4800bps Transmission Max 10m distance Isolation None Memory backup specification Backup area Retention area Back up period 5 years storage temperature 25 C Battery replacement is not available under hot line conditions 1 5 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 2 1 3 External dimensions and accessories 60 5 v A oO E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 37 aed ote Lithium battery Table 1 2 2 Backup battery accessory Item Specification Model NT8P BT Classification of battery Lithium primary battery Do not charge Nominal voltage DC3 6V Guaranteed life of 5 years ambient temperature 25 C battery Note Dimensions 614 5 x 24 5 cable length 50 mm Mass About 10g Battery connection connector Main body of battery DO v Fig 1 2 2 Note This guarantee period is that of the discrete battery The guaranteed period of the battery is five years at 25 C even if it is stored as a spare part The memory backup time varies according to the ambient temperature and the device to which the battery is installed The backup time decreases to a half as the ambient temperature rises by 10 C 1 Receiving i
22. the motor keeps operating Make sure that both FWD and REV are short circuited at the terminal block Simultaneous inputs result in output shutdown OPC VG7 SI UPAC ON OPC VG7 UPAC manon A command of UPAC Im UPAC SW ON 170 Group setting x m Inverter 1 Output word Name 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f Torque reference 1 Torque current reference Magnetic flux reference Control data Cw Universal DO1 standard DIO4 option 13bit Acceleration time Deceleration time 9 Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f 12 Torque reference 2 DIDI DIDODOUUI Torque bias 14 Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed sz Care Fig 3 1 3 3 2 lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 1 2 Setting the speed NCAUTION e When an operation command is given and the speed is written to speed setting 4 first the motor does not stop even if the operation command is turned off Be sure to set the speed setting 4 data at 0 before turning off the operation command Otherwise injuries may be caused 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 3 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Speed setting 1 frequency Before multi step 0
23. uonisogd eae Olzaois es SY EE vee Lewd dBISOSP HONEISISOOW uonesedo Bul660 nouo 92U9J9J94 101 u09 uonisod uonejep uonisod Bunmes Aog 0 ejeoipui seuoyMs lle Jo sejeis je ejeJejeoeq Pu SD unie asd i aeuo on ME Le MN e Joju09 did P SGH le Dunes peeds zl Lnoaial Z44u N z LSN i puewuoo O O 1indino uonenojes did MM i Burziuougou S z Buss 30 GY 101109 SZO ZN pueuiuoo peeds paeds uonisod Jeeur Z 1843 onuo2 A9 J0 U09 uonoejes szo uonejnopeo L04 iN puewwos peeds Coan de l UOpelejeoep JuoneJejeooe uwo 210 94 LL 8umes eiuxne E O o o ok 0 c 9 i 9 O en 9 ur qu ic 2 O o i A C oO en 9 9 O 0 Q i re 5 en je O en p ie oO Oth NO NO v z Bumjes peeds B O uone nojeo Jeu lt I oto leioto UoneJo ooop seddn uere se uonelajso0e J40 440 Mica l IA gt lt uoneyoi uoneio we6eip yooq lt b 99U91991 asianey pjew04 puewwoo uoneJedo D peeds o Riecpetestene b eMe d ZEE Quee jeujeju P lod P 5 Q o Oo o m Y eu Duipjou C oc o D c o 5 2 E _ i 1 S o 2 a peeds ures D S m RE 32 zur 25 DB 259 E Bon oc 325 amp 9 E gen ae vga SEN Ro og 2 0 ot SES b 9 9
24. 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o 1 Winding diameter m 100 m min x min j 9S EDDY Seq 0 0217 m 2 For reverse rotation of PG encoder The PG pulse data decreases during A phase rotation reverse rotation The difference between the sampling data of the previous and current cycles sampled at a t ms interval is added at every t ms time to obtain the pulse count Because the pulse count is obtained from four times the encoder value 4 multiplied by the number of encoder pulses divided by the revolution is the pulse count Task t Period ms 4 500 is replaced wit Te 5000 30536 30000 60536 d h 60536 65536 Y 5000 30000 25000 Y 25000 J Fig 3 1 39 3 26 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 5 3 Data acquisition method 2 NCAUTION e With the ROM version of the main body being in the range described below the task of UPAC for referencing data must be fixed at 4 ms The data of the second and later units cannot be acquired via the optical link To configure the optical link with models of the following version contact us Applicable ROM version Earlier than H10060 H20060 The 4ms sampling data 5000 pulses in the figure below is calculated on the main body side and transferred to UPAC as the PG pulse To calculate cumu
25. 3 phase power NOs ES supply T2 0 2g CT OLVR SD o L2 S Di gt a capsule C j o T1 0 4 I o T2 0 Hn 8 o SD F b da Cl m 2 DO oa capsule y 2 o P ID gt Ti o i o T2 o 5 Do P a Yom Ti n P zy o T2 ti s ax Terminal resistance e e o o I L 60 Main power supply FRENIC5000VG7 MOTOR MACHINE 3 phase power supply i 50 60 Hz ind I l OLS H Gear C L3 T I TH o2 C i FWD C r 3 THC r4 B 1 o REV p i PGP e Orientation command 2 Sonion change command Sh En 2 26 25 g 24 1 S 23 22 M 5 po 20 S 19 KR A 25 uo 5 e gh 9 gt oO 27 8 5 amp a RE Sg w O o D 5 gt i E 4 O 5 3 ao 21 O i ul 11 pPz0 gt G i OPC VG7 UPAC l E ne Fig 4 2 10 4 27 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 Connection example using RS485 communication POD me a JAAD XFACHINE Main power supply FRENIC5000VG7 MOTOR MACHI phase power supply 50 60Hz LR o OL2 S o L3 T POD UG series e TX Rs485 OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 PG PD
26. 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN 5 2 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 2 Memory 5 2 1 Memory Map IEC expression Input Output Zl Q Input output memory Q 302 words MW 1 0 Standard memory M MW 1 2047 2K words Program memory 32K steps MW 3 0 Retain memory RM MW 3 1023 1K words For user FB MW 5 0 Instance memory MW 5 1023 FM Note 1 1K words MW 9 0 For system FB Temporary area Instance memory 8K words SFM MW 9 4095 4K words MEE j MW 10 0 System memory SM MW 10 511 512 words AMW 11 0 Function code area 696 words MW 11 695 Fig 5 2 1 Note 1 2K words at the beginning of the standard memory are for high speed access high speed memory area You can increase the size of the standard memory by reducing the size of other areas such as the size of retain memory and instance memory However you cannot increase the high speed memory area 5 3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 2 1 1 Input output memory area This area is for exchange data between UPAC and VG7S and is used for providing data from VG7S to UPAC and supplying arithmatic operation result of a program for VG7S See the list in 5 3 3 Assigning address for data Key point 1 Input and output are represented 1 and Q prefix respectively When you assign address you add size and a
27. 5 36 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification F code E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 L1 60 ms updating and referencing data name MW 11 111 O10Fh e16f UINT MWw11 112 0110 High speed updating address NT MW 11 114 0112 N MW11 115 0113h JUINT v Mw11 116 0114h JUINT MW11 117 0115h JUINT Mw11 118 0116h JUINT Mw11 119 0117h NT MW11 120 0118 NT h NT NT m h N U U U U U N N ocjojojojojoj oc Vu us ts tu tu LL N wo h MW 11 121 0119 9 WORD MW11 124 011Ch UINT 011Dh MW11 126 011Eh ac 127 011Fh MW 11 125 ul N 0j 9 NT MW11 129 0121h Name Y terminal function Y1 terminal function Y2 terminal function 0 to 2 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function MW11 113 0111h Y3 terminal function 0 to 3 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function Y4 terminal function Y5 terminal function Y11 terminal function to 26 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function Y12 terminal function o 26 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function Y13 terminal function o 26 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function Y14 terminal function Y16 terminal function to 26 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function
28. Ados ejyep onewoyny v9 Lon SLT LOTOF L0O 0G LOV 4 LOH O LOd EZ L09 Y8 103 08 003 Sepoo uonoun4j Ava Aloweui e HnejoA Ss 9 Lon GLT 1010 L00 0G LOV 4 LOH O LOd EZ L09 Y8 L03 08 003 Sepoo uonoun4j Av jouJeui e HnejoA v9 Lon SV T L0TOF L0O 0G LOV 4 LOH O LOd EZ L09 Y8 103 08 003 Sepoo uonoun4j NV jouJeui e HnejoA o peuunj SI Jamod uauw pesesy Jo Bunuwej Uuonoejes ZOd epoo uonounj eu eBueuo o uil WOD eui esn jouueo noA 29U81991 peeds pue spueuiuioo uoneJedo 10 sueJBeip xoo q 94 ees Ajayesedas ease s uonouny y oj Jull INOO 34 WO sseooe y eugep 31 pue OCH eui eunpeooJd anes e y ejnoexe uieuy dee oj JUEM nof JI Jewod y yo UN no ueu pejelep sue pue JA v 94 0 UYUM Be OVdN eui JO ull WOD SU Woy ejeq OVdN ey Wo ejep SJUM 0 9 qesip 10 ejqeue JOUUeD noA NO S peuunsse aie Aou suonounj x 01 WT HM 24 10 4 31 eui peu amp isse jou e eu no u yM poued siu ul ejep eBueuo jouueo noA Sz j1noqe aye seinpeooud uonezi eniui pue ares e eu Bunum uo pejejep si ejep snoi eJd pue peulejuIeuu si jse uyum ejeq Ajuoud semje seu Buum 18727 Buas 10 9eJ ejeoIpul SOUOJIMS Ile jo sejels Hes 0 pueuuo uonejedo LOH OVdN IS ZDA OdO OVdN ZDA 0dO 3 48 SH 9 0dO snq pier XS 19A 0dO 11 79 09dO pejejold pejoejoud S8vSH n PSP Cou woo uonoejoJ
29. Download Verify E Program control Calendar watch Resource information Failure diagnosis Password Close Help Program cor Start PC 3 N Passworc bes m __w Close Help Resource infor Fig 2 4 17 2 4 4 Simulating and Monitoring 1 Preparation Click on the Close button to exit from the control screen Next select Online N Debug D Check that 00000 is displayed below the variables u01 f INV118 SPDREFI on the worksheet In this state the state of the UPAC is monitored at the real time IH File Edi View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help osu nRa she Eoo E Resource Control m 3593 Qik E335 wt R Control CtrlF10 PE 4 14 Rawerlay sif Layout E E Project Z3 Libraries Data Types a Logical POUs 5 8 LADDER i LADDERT LADDERV Fi LADDER ga Physical Hardware 3 A C VG7 5 VG7 6 BA Svstem Definition ce R UPAC UPAC H E Tasks e Global Variables Control Variables Function List Logic Analyzer UO1 f INV 118_SPDREF 1 a Ladder LA Switch to Debug mode 10 31 C gt 2GB 74 Fig 2 4 18 2 28 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 Entering data from the keypad panel Change function code UN0
30. Eagan contol Batna v atch HESGUTGETHTGITTTRHOG Fentre diagnosis Password Fig 2 4 15 5 Resetting Click on Reset R of the control The Reset dialog box appears Select Yes Y The resetting process takes about five seconds after Yes is clicked on Wait for a while fE FR UPAC CPUD ICI x State Stop Nonfatal failure Key state TERM Batch operation Individual operation Stop Initial start Start Download Verify Program control Calenda Resource information Failure d Password Close Help Reset PC There is a case that PC is started by CPU running definition Fig 2 4 16 2 27 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 Starting UPAC Click on the Start A button of the control The Start dialog box appears Select Yes Y Check that the state of the control changes to Run R_UPAC CPUO zd F7 Gif RLUPAC CPUO ile xj State Stop Nonfatal failure State Run Nonfatal failure Key state TERM Batch operation Individual operation Stop Initial start f Reset Upiged Key state TERM Batch operation Individual operation Stop Initial start 1 Reset Download Upload Verify Clear 0 T 2 3 m x tv 3 o aiseg pue uoleiedaid
31. MX 10 22 12 to Not used MX 10 22 15 CPU I O group definition MX 10 23 0 abnormality For default task CPU I O group definition MX 10 23 1 abnormality Major fault For 0 level task CPU I O group definition 1 when input module is set to output selection MX 10 23 2 abnormality For 1 level task MX 10 23 3 Not used MX 10 23 4 Not used MX 10 23 5 Not used MX 10 23 6 Not used MX 10 23 7 Not used MX 10 23 8 Not used MX 10 23 9 Not used MX 10 23 10 Not used MX 10 23 11 Not used MX 10 23 12 Not used MX 10 23 13 Not used MX 10 23 14 Not used MX 10 23 15 MX 10 24 0 Not used MX 10 24 1 Not used MX 10 25 0 Not used MX 10 25 1 Not used MX 10 25 2 Not used MX 10 25 3 Not used MX 10 25 4 Not used MX 10 25 5 Not used MX 10 25 6 Not used MX 10 25 7 Not used MX 10 25 8 to Not used MX 10 25 15 MX 10 26 0 Not used MX 10 26 1 Not used MX 10 26 2 to Not used MX 10 29 15 Note The system definition abnormality factors include errors that are blocked by D300win to rarely occur in standard operation 5 13 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 12 Application program abnormality factors MW 10 38 MW 10 39 Table 5 2 11 Address Name Description ru Application 1 when
32. Program memory capacity 32768 steps Maximum program capacity in one POU 4096 steps Input output memory VQ 302 words Standard memory M 2048 words default value Retain memory M 1024 words default value Instance memory for user FB M 1024 words default value Zu ER 4096 words default value Memory Timer 128 points default value 8 words point Instance memory for Accumulation timer 32 points default value 8 words point system FB M Counter 64 points default value 4 words point Edge detection 256 points default value 2 words point Others 2048 words default value System memory M 512 words Temporary area 8192 words Available data type Note BOOL INT DINT UINT UDINT REAL TIME DATE TOD DT STRING WORD DWORD Data type nesting One stage array of arrays structure of arrays array of structures Number of members in structure data type 200 Number of elements in array data type 16 bit data type 4096 32 bit data type 2048 Task number Default task cyclic scan 1 Fixed cycle task 2 Event task 2 Up to two in total Program instance POU number resource 256 Note that maximum registration number for one task is 128 Number of POUs on one project 1000 including POUS in library Note Depends on instruction to be used 5 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson sa
33. jndino asind VG7 Interface yse ep o suig uni ISNW 2vdn euL ovdn eu 0 swp fue e ui pejejnuunooe pue Jno Aq peyiuDeui ejep esind pe1oejep Jo e2u9JeJ8J spues JOLIOAU SUL TT lt gt 06 40 a Bumes A092 unaur nd no asjnd eu ui g 4 pue v4 pe1eJ6ejui ay yno enjeA asind pejo9jep y 10 e2u8J9joJ Bode peeds euJejur y 10 3ndjno asjnd peyeAuoo ay onjeA e2u98J9Ja1 es nd y jo Jeuyie 1ndjno ueo noA uognej noj eo es nd 104 ures esind Buroejep Aq uonisod sjonuo9 Qd 94 a uonoejes Uone nojeo jndino esind 9d es nd 10 ules asind e2u819JeJ e BulAlaoes Aq uoneziuoJuou s pue uonisod sjoguo Hd Dd 8 uBu uonoejep esind eoua19Je1 esjnd Jo sed ow ueeM9q UOJIMS 0 pJe9 9gd 9A 2dO 24 UO YMS E joe es ULI noA n9119 jndino l ad esind 492949 O I eseud z peioejep uonoejep uonisod IS OWdN b z0d uoneznuoud uone nojeo adl esind Me O vr uones6e u yoegpee one oe ule Hd S00 RSS UE Leo uonooejes WO clo uonoejes esjnd indui urea esind xyoeqpeeJ i uone nojeo 101 U09 Jejunoo yoo I Tz esind O uonisog uonei eq JONG20H o2u8J8JoM L3 uone nojeo eoueJejo1 ynouo IL uoneloso 4 4 GLO uonisod uieB 4 4 VES uonooeJJoo esind uonosj es esind xX9euo O I eoualejoH eouelojoes peeds jeuijeju JN9119 jndino esind uonosjes yndjno asind 9d efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson
34. 0 15 1 0 453 Torque corresponding to dynamic Yes U46 mechanical loss while staling USER P46 0 1500 0 15 1 15 453 U47 Unused USER P47 U48 __ Tension feedback filter setting EZE USER P48 0 5000 0 5 sec sec 0 001 5 Yes 4 53 U49 Line speed monitor To POD a USER P49 0 20000 0 2000 m min m min Monitor Yes Monitor only Output as m minx10 U50 Loadcell output To POD U50 USER P50 0 1960 0 1960 N N Monitor Yes Monitor only Output as N U51 Ao 1 Monitor output selection WEB UsERP5 0 6 0 Yes 454 U52 Ao2 Monitor output selection LEA usERPz2 0 6 3 Yes 454 U53 Ao3 Monitor output selection LEA USER P53 0 6 2 Yes 4 54 U54 Ao4 Monitor output selection EEJ usERPA 0 6 5 Yes 4 54 U55 Ao5 Monitor output selection LEA USERPS 0 6 1 Yes 454 U56 ATR Pi OFF delay timer EEJ USER P56 0 5 000 ms ms 1 200 Yes 4 52 U57 md timer for detecting speed for out of USER P57 0 5 000 ms ms 1 0 Yes 452 U58 ATRPi enabling delay timer USER P58 0 5 000 ms ms 1 0 Yes 4 52 Speed limiter AN P Yes U59 Detecting speed of out of materal USER P59 0 200 r min rimin 1 100 452 U60 torque command limit AUX USER P60 0 15000 0 150 96 1 15000 Yes 452 U61 ATR dead zone width RUE USERP61 O20N N 1 Yes 452 F 0 100 Yes u62 dv dt during acceleration ue USER P62 mminisec m min sec 1 1 453 Oto 100 Yes U63 dv dt during deceleration USER P63 Lies m min sec 4 1 453 nega
35. 0 1 1 0 No i selection P3 Set to accelerate over the second slow speed for orientation operation or not USER 0 Internal terminal valid X1 to X3 Control input selection P4 0 1 2 1 0 No 1 DIOB card input valid 2 S05 communication system such as T link RS485 valid 0 to 511 pulses 2 USER Provides ORT completion signal ON when enters a range ORT completion range P5 0 511 Pulse 1 0 Yes specified by pulses set by parameter to the position for ORT stopping i 0 to 511 pulses U06 Completion range after USER 0 511 Pulse 1 0 Yes After stop in ORT completion range switch ORT completion ORT stopping P6 i range to this value 5 0 to 1000 0 00 to 10 00 s U07 ORT completion signal USER 0 1000 S 1 0 Yes Setting for timer after ORT completion to turning on ORT ON timer P7 A completion signal R 0 to 1000 0 00 to 10 00 s U08 ORT completion signal USER 0 1000 S 1 0 Yes Setting for timer after ORT completion release to turning off ORT OFF timer P8 i i completion signal 3 128P R encoder 2 256P R encoder Puls ricod r s l ction USER 3 3 1 0 No 1 512P R encoder 0 1024P R encoder P9 1 2048P R encoder 2 4096P R encoder 3 8192P R encoder ow speed 1 1 USER ow speed 1 2 P11 Set value for first slow speed N1 during ORT 0 1000 r min 1 0 No Four steps are available for setting Use RT1 and RT2 for switching these four steps ORT gain 1 ORT gain 2 E ORT gain 3 eri ORT gain
36. 5 Standard for Three phase 5 USA 575V 6 S S Type 31 Speed 15 87 0 Data 0 to 20 000 0 to 12 000 x r min Data x Nmax 20 000 conversion Example When the maximum speed is Nmax 1 500r min e If you want to direct a speed reference of 1 000r min 1 000 Specify a data of 7 x 20 000 13 333 1 500 e If the read out data is 3 500 1 500 You can determine the speed is 22 x 3 500 262 5r min 20 000 Type 32 Operation commands 33 Y1 to Y18 This type is the same as S06 and S07 15 87 0 32 93 0 FWD forward operation command Y1 1 REV reverse operation command Y2 2 X1 Y3 3 X2 Y4 4 X3 RY 5 X4 Not used 6 X5 Not used 2 7T X6 Not used ON 8 X7 Y11 9 X8 Y12 10 X9 Y13 11 X11 Y14 12 X12 Y15 13 X13 Y16 14 X14 Y17 15 RST RESET command Y18 5 54 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification Type 34 Communication error codes 15 87 0 Description of alarms in the communication through the link RS485 T Link field bus The following data is set to the monitor data M26 according to the communication status The codes listed in the column KEYPAD panel display is displayed on the KEYPAD panel as a communication error Table 5 2 52 Code KEYPAD panel display Communication error name Description 0
37. B card Use the built in RS485 RS485 communication capability is necessary for the PLC No Source of control Selection of control command X command d Y Inside Use standard External device Use RS485 Use the sequence function of UPAC Arrange the development environment Use contacts X1 X2 and X3 Install the OPC VG7 TL card Install the OPC VG7 DIO B card Use the built in RS485 RS485 communication capability is necessary for the PLC Similar setting can be made with the Field Bus option You can use PLC PC POD Programmable Operation Display or other host devices with RS485 4 24 TU t 1 x Q Q o e gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 1 4 Encoder feedback Various feedback form can be employed according to the system Select one of the following four methods 1 Standard special motor Use this method to detect the speed with the PG built in G a the standard VG motor and detect the position with the vars segs z AB PE installed to the spindle Relevant function code igs Spoed Gear i Position detection belt settings are as follows detection A 22 A Table 4 2 3 m vc Funct
38. DIOA Data distinction 32 W a 5 16 bit IW10 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W T IW10 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT gt IW10 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV10 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW10 7 16 S S Ai Ai2 of INV10 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal QW10 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multstep speed during V f reference Qw10 9 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW10 10 5 z 3 Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW10 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 3 13bit required QW10 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW10 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT 2 Overwrite on F08 QW10 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW10 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT o QW10 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW10 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV10 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV10 5g AO used by INV10 are defined QW10 18 27 Z amp AO AO2 of INV10 INT as universal QW10 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV10 INT QD10 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV10 dynamically 11 INV11 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV11 In addition to UPAC
39. IW1 16 17 5 Ai AIO option Ai3 of INV1 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as IW1 17 18 Ai AIO option Ai4 of INV1 4000h 10V INT universal QW1 18 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW1 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW1 20 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT Just before torque current reference filter QW1 21 4 5 Magnetic flux reference 10000 100 INT QW1 22 5 Z Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW1 23 6 i Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 13bit required QW1 24 7 y Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW1 25 8 5 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW1 26 9 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW1 27 10 a Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW1 28 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW1 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter QW1 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 INT_ X Before torque limiter QW1 31 14 Speed auxiliary reference 20000 Nmax INT Z QW1 32 15 Detected speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT T Speed output from motor model QW1 33 16 5 INV1 function code 1 address Use after you Ww B Function data code QW1 34 17 3 Q INV1 function code 1 data check data INT transmission from UPAC to QW1 35 18 S INV1 function code 2
40. MW 11 122 011Ah Y17 terminal function 0 to 26 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal function 70MW 11 123 011Bh Y18 terminal function 0 to 26 to 47 Re Y terminal function normally open closed PG pulse output selection Protective function setting Motor overheat protection temp Motor overheat early warning temp Inverter overload early warning You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions Setting range Oto 1to47 0 Inverter running Speed existence Speed agreement Speed arrival Speed detection 1 Speed detection 2 Speed detection 3 Stopped upon under voltage Qo o0 amp oN Torque limiting Torque detection 1 Torque detection 2 Keypad operation mode Inverter stopping Operation ready Magnetic flux detection signal Motor M2 selection status Motor M3 selection status Brake release signal Alarm indication Alarm indication Alarm indication Alarm indication Cooling fan operation Auto resetting Universal DO Heat sink overheat early warning INV OH Synchroniza Life alarm Accelerating Decelerating Inverter overload early warning Motor overheat early warning Motor overload early warning DB overload early warning Link transmission error ion completion Load adaptive control being limited ANL Load adaptive control being calc
41. No is specified for write protected function codes that cannot be changed from UPAC Table 5 2 38 F Fundamental Functions 60ms updating nd High speed Written referencing data F code Variable Updating Setting range Type by name Oto 1 0 Data change enable 1 Data protection F00 100 f UINT MW 11 0 0000h Data protection in is a function to protect data against writing from the Yes eypad panel The data is protected against writing from the link TLINK RS485 etc using H29 Data protection via 0to7 Keypad panel and v keys Cc Analog input 0 to 10V Analog input 0 to 10V oo F01 fo1 f UINT MW 11 1 0001h Speed setting N1 UP DOWN control initial value 0 41 Yes E v UP DOWN control initial value previous value o 3 UP DOWN control initial value creep speed 1 2 EI os DIA card input D D DIB card input S 3 0 33 The operation method is set EJ 0 Key operation FWS REV STOP Local mode ae F02 02 1 UINT MW11 2 0002h Operation method 1 External signal FWD REV terminal Remote mode 42 Yes You can use the RST STOP keys to switch between REMOTE and LOCAL This keypad panel operation changes the F02 data Poa foar unr fumana footon manmumapecd 0101800 to 24000 riein ves maximum speed Fos o4 f JUINT mwina foooan Miratedspeed 50 0 24000 min 90 Yes Fos esr fonr wwwris ooon Miretedvotage __ eowo
42. PG PD cycle IW3 12 13 a S05 Position reference 1 1 INT IN3 13 14 DI DIOB option 16bit of INV3 Data distinction 26 W IW3 14 15 D 7 Ai Ai1 of INV3 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW3 15 16 9 Ai Ai2 of INV3 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai IW3 16 17 5 Ai AIO option Ai3 of INV3 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as IW3 17 18 Ai AIO option Ai4 of INV3 4000h 10V INT universal QW3 18 1 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW3 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW3 20 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT Just before torque current reference filter QW3 21 4 Magnetic flux reference 10000 100 INT QW3 22 5 Z Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW3 23 6 i Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition G 13bit required gt QW3 24 7 y Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW3 25 8 5 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW3 26 9 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW3 27 10 a Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW3 28 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW3 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter QW3 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 INT Q Before torque limiter QW3 31 14 Speed auxiliary reference 20000 Nmax INT Z
43. QWO 18 1 command during V f 20000 Nmax INT UPAC gt VG7S speed setting Speed setting 4 frequency 0 JoQWLI 28 11 command during V f 20000 Nmax INT UPAC gt VG7S Before ASR input O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 4 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWE 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency 20000 Nmax INT UPAC gt VG7S Before multi step command during V f speed setting Speed setting 4 frequency 1 0 JoQWLI 16 11 command during V f 20000 Nmax INT UPAC gt VG7S Before ASR input D 1 to 12 INVI to INV12 There are two methods for setting the speed operation of speed setting 1 and operation of speed setting 4 Because speed setting is inserted at the front stage of the control of VG7S some of standard speed control systems of VG7S acceleration deceleration calculator speed limit ASR input filter can be used Because speed setting 4 is inserted immediately before ASR it is useful for quick responses where speed outputs of position control are reflected on the VG7S side 1 How to use To reflect the speed setting calculated at UPAC to VG7S check the system definition then download the system definition and reset to change the switches In the figure below speed setting 1 is changed Keypad panel speed c setting 12 fe 1 ise a F Speed setting of other than UPAC OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Sp
44. The following data is not displayed according to the mode and option Commanded PID value 96 Displayed in PID mode PID feedback value Displayed in PID mode Output PID value Displayed in PID mode Option monitor 1 HEX Displayed when option is used Option monitor 2 HEX Displayed when option is used Option monitor 3 DEC Displayed when option is used Option monitor 4 DEC Displayed when option is used Option monitor 5 DEC Displayed when option is used Option monitor 6 DEC Displayed when option is used F code F55 Cc gt 7 E 2 9 3 5 ES 2 3 58 3 vo Oto 1 Indication during motor stoppage is switched The T LED monitor corresponding data items are speed 0 load shaft Bee MW11 56 0038h Display at stop mode rotation speed 13 and line speed 14 Yes 0 Command value 1 Actual value 0to 1 The operation mode screen of the keypad panel is switched F57 t57 f UINT 9MW11 57 o039h LOD monitor 0 Operation guide screen Yes Display selection Operation state direction of rotation 1 Bar graph of operation data Speed detection 1 current and commanded torque o 7 Japanese English 3 Germany F58 t8 f UINT mw11 58 oo3an LCD monitor French Yes Language selection Spanish Italian Chinese Korean LCD monitor 0 to 5 to 10 H59 59 1 MW 11 59 003Bh Contrast
45. W a 5 16 bit IW12 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW12 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT gt IW12 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV12 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW12 7 16 S S Ai Ai2 of INV12 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal QW12 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference Qwi2 9 2 X Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW12 10 5 z 3 Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW12 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 3 13bit required QW12 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT e Overwrite on F07 QW12 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT 2 Overwrite on F08 QW12 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW12 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT o QW12 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW12 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV12 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV12 5g AO used by INV12 are defined QW12 18 27 Z amp AO AO2 of INV12 INT as universal QW12 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV12 INT QD12 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV12 dynamically 3 Dynamic software switch DWS This function switches the reflection of control variables when UPAC is on and the inverter is in operation
46. Z soueieje Bueoues L apow Jaw enbio Opd 99 ES IS Ovdn anbio OjO indyno ysy MS Ovdn 440 LS 9van uono9jes Z 1970 O rue 1l se 1 440 aS jana Jay onbo A E rotolot Pao LO 1 oo le CA I I enbio I l z eoueJojo1 z epoui Je enbJo SOUS IURE iol uonoejep Aem auo 97 enbjo Fra ud jueuno enbJo Ts l N i x A 4 NO Jeyew enbJuo Ov o IS Ovdn Ord epouu sey enbJo l 332 1 16 O DRE H e H ued md eee eoueiejes l z438 1 8 i Joum msovdn 110 MSovdn jueuno enbjo j uonoegep em om V 209 991 enbioL 15 bi d o x 9van s 29A 940 O IS 9vdn eu enbio Ov eouelejel enbJo z 9nje JOVI e ON S fe LR enieA Jeu OVdf 29 9dO m enbioy van NO 410 NO anbio 2vdn 7 g ZON a Eos 1 iena l E l Teds m pe spa 104 9 o e 3104 vj enea sapun SOf HSV veo Ho 2 E e nbioj I nb oj wee aa LS Ops Hsu eR aar O 104 6 12 6 10104 1434 11 o INE NS EN m I S coe lol T i E vid O O 8 z 9 rO a cdsv SVO 0 E I a o NE T Z ald O O c e Lo 0 easy sso Ho 5 Zis I1 a l 5 Nu l LLS O O1 9 v 0 O4 OLS rasy seo Hoi 2 T E r 4 jndino E jndino j Jouyindino 5 uonenoeo gig TO OT s O10 p VOHEMOIE did usv 3 LLnodld ES IL noaidl l X ZYH uonoejes eouei9jo1 uonoejes Z Je el er zv uonoejes je el Suomi O O O O E T T N S o Desk ES 9 azgtiair
47. bA juonoerep 1 99U919 91 26240A TOd 10 uon jueuno enbio uongeJedo pejejnuuis esueduioo X ojno eouenbe 9sESISSp ue H S Ga abeyon via 1ueiojooo sso UOJ z abeyon man nut od I 1209 ssoj uoJ eun BuiploH 6 4 eee l i Sw i poujoui 937 jeued qQvdA3M X LN 40d 4Zd uejsuoo uore1Baju I H2V LIA 3ueronjjeoo sso uo Pcr uonoejeq 983 Lu LW 90d Zd ute9 d HOV LWN Alarm relay output 30X Coast to stop command 7 BX peeds dog zea AO DC link circuit voltmeter 13 V DC efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor ion Codes Fun 3 3 9 Enabling to Write Savin v9 Lon SLT LOTOF L0O OS LOV EZ LOH O LOd EZ L09 Y8 103 08 003 Sepoo uonoun4j INO ueJ60Jgd Ajowaw wue160o14 VG7 Interface Burzijeniur ejeq L 0 0 O1 BuiuojMs Aq Adoo ejep Buas Asoyoe4 v9 Lon SLT L0TOF L00 0G LOV 4 LOH 0 LOd 4 100 Y8 103 08 004 Sepoo uonoun4 WOH 433 Aioweu 9 nejoA uo v9 Lon SLT L0TOF L00 OS LOV 4 LOH 0 L0d 2 109 4 QO v8 L02 08 004 Sepoo uonounJ WOH 433 Aioweuu e nejoA uo v9 Lon SV T L0TOt L00 OS LOV 4 LOH 0 LOd 4 L00 v8 103 08 004 Sepoo uonoun4 WOH 433 Aloweuu e nejoA uo YO peuun si Jamod UBM peseJe JON Ados ejep onewoyny OAES IV L 0 0 O1 Bulyo ims Aq Ados geq
48. e To operate control outputs Y1 to YSA and Y11 to Y 18 DIOA from UPAC set function codes E15 to E27 at 25 to assign each output to the universal DO U DO so that the control state of VG7S running speed agreement etc do not give effects on the output signals 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 19 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Universal DO1 y Jo QWLI 23 6 standard DIOA option 13 bit Data type 33 WORD UPAC gt VG7S Define U DO S Universal DO2 3 Extension I O exclusively QWO 42 25 DIOB option 10 bit Data type 37 WORD UPAC gt VG7S for UPAC O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 20 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Universal DO1 j QWO 11 6 standard DIOA option 13 bit Data type 33 WORD UPAC gt VG7S Define U DO O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 The digital outputs that can be controlled by UPAC are the standard DO Y1 to YSA DIOA option Y11 to Y18 and DIOB option Y21 to Y30 not for 12 unit system 1 How to use To operate the data place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset Place a check mark at the check box of the corresponding data items in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen To operate
49. i display coefficients A and B Yes display coefficient B Di A k isplay coefficient A Maximum value Display coefficient B Minimum value Displayed value command value or feedback value x display coefficient A B B 0 0 to 0 2 to 5 0 s LED monitor Filter for suppressing flickers caused by variation of the Gog a UINT MW11 54 0036h display filter displayed data The filter effect applies to all pieces of uc data selected with F55 0 to 28 Speed detection 1 setting 4 r min F56 switches the display during motor stoppage Speed setting 4 ASR input r min Commanded output frequency including slip Hz Commanded torque current Torque command value Calculated torque Input power F60 switches the unit kW HP Detected output current A Detected output voltage V Detected DC link circuit voltage V Commanded magnetic flux Calculated magnetic flux Motor temperature deg C is displayed when NTC thermistor is not used Detected or commanded value r min of load shaft rotation speed F56 switches the display during motor stoppage Detected or commanded line speed m min LED monitor F56 switches the display during motor stoppage f55 f UINT MW11 55 0037h display selection Ai adjustment value 12 96 Yes Ai adjustment value Ai 1 96 Ai adjustment value Ai 2 96 Ai adjustment value Ai 3 96 Ai adjustment value Ai 4 96
50. 10 bit type 27 15 8 7 0 i eap Lo 0 to 9 Y21 to Y30 Compose the bits into word data before reflecting An example of composition in the IL language is shown below lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o Acquire output information Refer to global variable LD Y1_OUTPUT VAR EXTERNAL AUTOINSERT BOOL TO WORD INV123 UNIDO1 WORD INV1 S07 DO1 of INV1 SHL WORD UINT 0 standard DIOA 13 bit ST DO OUTPUT END VAR LD Y2 OUTPUT Definition of local variables BOOL TO WORD VAR SHL WORD UINT 1 DO OUTPUT WORD OR DO OUTPUT Y1 OUTPUT BOOL ST INV123 UNIDO1 Y1 OUTPUT BOOL lgixi D H amp x amp e amp amp immuiammusS e se A ae lane 63 38 o 9 ge m E i em to Tao pe H zx BOOL 1 Y1 OUTPUT INV123 UNIDO1 UINT 0 BOOL 1 Y2 OUTPUT INV123 UNIDO1 UINT 1 60 20 C gt 2GB 7 Fig 3 1 24 3 16 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 3 4 Operation of analog output NCAUTION e To control analog outputs A01 to A03 A04 and A05 AIO option from UPAC assign function codes E69 to E73 at 30 to set the analog outputs to the universal AO U AO so that the control function of the main body does not give effects 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 21 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 96QWLI 43 26 AO of INV1 AO1 4000h
51. A program example in the FBD language is shown below al D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER JR Fie Edt View Project Build Objects Layout Onine Estas Window Help JO sa RS s gt Bloc ea nek lt eres le 3 Be Aly 69 3h m ess eene tu Line speed conversion Dancer position INV 114_UNIAI1 001 936MX11 624 3 M1004 a L Operation 0 hold Offset 002 Line speed Integration Speed reference to VG7S For Help press F1 105 100 C 2GB 74 Fig 3 2 5 Description of program Variable definition Analog input scale conversion e Analog input at 4000h 10V Convert this into 20000d 10V of the speed unit Integrator INT OFF during operation therefore 1 upon RUN input 0 upon R1 input INT ON during stoppage therefore 0 upon RUN input 1 upon R1 input and zero output at integrator e Pass the output of the integrator via TEMP to the limiter LIMIT DINT Fixed limit at 500 Addition e Add the line speed LINE SP integrator output and P gain output DEV OUT to compose a speed command INV128 SPDREFA for VG7S VAR EXTERNAL AUTOINSERT INV128 SPDREF4 INV114 UNIAM INV115 UNIAI2 UO1 f U02 f U03 f LINE SP DAN POS DEV OUT INTEG M1004 END VAR VAR AUTOINSERT INT DINT 3 TEMP END VAR 3 39 INT INV1 frequency speed reference 4 WORD INV1 universal AI1 WORD INV
52. Before torque limiter QW4 31 14 Speed auxiliary reference 20000 Nmax INT 3 QWA4 32 15 Detected speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT Speed output from motor model QW4 33 16 5 INV4 function code 1 address Use after you W Data transmission at the WQW4 34 17 53 amp _INV4 function code 1 data check data INT minimum of 2ms is possible by QW4 35 18 S INVA function code 2 address distinction of W defining this 4W area for QW4 36 19 gt 5 INV4 function code 2 data individual function INT individual function code when QW4 37 20 2 _INV4 function code 3 address code W SI UPAC option is used QW4 38 21 v 9 INVA function code 3 data INT QW4 39 22 5 8 INVA function code 4 address Ww QW4 40 23 r INV4 function code 4 data INT QW4 41 24 Reserved AQW4 42 25 g DO2 DIOB option 10bit of INV4 Data distinction 27 W UPAC controls AO DO of INV4 QW4 43 26 amp AO AO1 of INV4 4000h 10V INT AO DO used by INV4 are QW4 44 27 z AO AO2 of INV4 INT defined as universal QW4 45 28 g AO AO3 of INV4 INT Note that universal definition is QW4 46 29 Z AO AIO option AO4 of INV4 INT not required for DIOB QW4 47 30 2 AO AIO option AO5 of INV4 INT QD4 48 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV4 dynamically 5 20 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive serv
53. Cut eem Click the left mouse button Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Fig 1 3 33 1 36 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startu 6 The D300 win 2 shortcut icon is created in the D300win program folder CET Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help S alle A Back Forward Up Cut Copy Paste Undo Address za C AWINDOWS Start Menu Programs D300win Backup Utility D300win Help D300win D300win Easy operation menu S458 8 B File Divide amp Notesonuse SX Control SX simulator UPAC setup Merge of D300win Utility Sample D300win Epona 2 Ink Modified 9 14 01 4 25 PM Shortcut icon of Size 281 bytes D300win 2 Fig 1 3 34 7 Drag the D300 win 2 shortcut icon to the desktop of Windows Click the left mouse button on the shotcut icon moved to the desktop to start D300win 1 3 4 2 Screen immediately after D300win is started After D300win is started the screen shown below is displayed 1 D300win E le Edt View Project Buld Onine Extias Help Dok 6 55 E CONS ES S a ES E E a Ra Qk aetna eae CAGE SES B gal we Inl xl The project tree called last time or nothing is displayed Fig 1 3 35 1 37 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E on as ao Sz am
54. Deceleration end side 1 0 to 50 Yes Magnetic flux level setting F73 MW11 73 0049h Magnetic flux level at light 10 to 100 Yes load F74 E MW11 74 004Ah Pre exciting time 0 0 to 10 0 s Yes F75 fsf Uit Mw1175 oo48n Pre excitation initial level Tr to 400 Yes m ni level 1 for forward rotation and limit level 2 for reverse rotation Speed limit setting 1 Limit level 1 for both forward and reverse rotation F76 MW11 76 004Ch Speed limit Mode selection 2 Limit level 1 for upper limit and limit level 2 for lower Yes limit 3 Limit level 1 for forward rotation and limit level 2 for reverse rotation Add the 12 input as a bias rz ju wr Mw1177 004Dh Speed limit level 1 110 0 to 100 0 to 110 0 Yes F78 78 f INT Mw11 78 004Eh Speed limit level 2 110 0 to 100 0 to 110 0 Yes 0t02 The effective motor M1 2 or 3 is selected with the function code or contact 0 M1 selection However the contact switching is given priority F79 f79 f UINT MW11 79 004Fh Motor selection M1 M2 M3 M1 selection MCH2 MCH3 OFF OFF ON ON Yes without assignment M2 selection MCH2 MCH3 ON OFF MG selection MCH2 MCH3 OFF ON 1 M2 selection X function invalid 2 M3 selection X function invalid 0t02 SETS 0 CT Overload current 15096 F80 f80_f UINT MW11 80 0050h Current rating switching 1 VT Overload current 110 Yes 2 HT Overload torque 200 170 LJ You can chang
55. E C P H A o L U and M includes two variations those that can be referred to or updated at 60 ms intervals and those updated or referred to at minimum 1 ms intervals For actual use and limitations refer to section 3 1 2 Referencing and Updating Function Codes and use the better one for each application 5 2 3 1 Addresses updated or referenced at 60 ms intervals All function codes F E C P H A o L U and M of master VG7S where UPAC is installed can be referred to Some codes are write protected Refer to Written by UPAC in the list on the following pages The function code variable address and the type of the variable are registered in the Function List in the project tree of D300win preliminarily as shown in the figure below al D300win SPEED CONTROL Function ListC VG 6 R UPAC E Eie Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help lal x Dn u amp 5 amp e 5c amp amp a memxsaemm sgm l m la n 2 2 lle lg 6A Sr xno Y 4 l HK er HHO aen GT LL pe 44 es E m z BF Ey Project VAR GLOBAL AUTOINSERT Libraries Data Types Function code F B c3 Logical POUs foo_f AT MU11 0 UINT FOO Data prot Physical Hardware f01 f AT MW11 1 UINT F01 Speed sett Eg C V87 5 VG7 E f 02 f AT MW11 2 UINT FO2 Operation BB System Definition f03 f AT MW11 3 UINT FO3 M1 motor Eg R UPAC
56. F Save Project As Zip Project As A to give a file name and save Let the file name be SPEED CONTROL Do not exceed 24 characters when entering the file name al D300win Untitled rm 8 HKH rere eo ae D Dus ae 2e Ge 42 Save Zip project as ane OI Ae be OSK20001 mwt a PID_PRA mutt a PULSE 1 mwt a PULSE 2 mwt PULSE 3 mwit OSKGERTE mwt si PULSE_4 mwt a PID DEMO mwt SPEED CONTROL Project Files mwt Zap prs M zp IJ SET NOTRITES jur ZA sgue T zi Ravelibrenes J zip Backend Cade F Ap eee ayGUtS Fig 2 4 2 2 20 e D S x O 5 m x D 3 D D o aiseg pue uonejedaJjg efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples Define the setting for referring to function code UNO 01 1 Double click on LADDER the worksheet of LADDER which is a default POU A blank worksheet opens on the right side 2 Click the right mouse button on the worksheet Select Variable V from the pull down menu al D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER Iof x E 4 Logical POUs S E LADDER B Physical Hardware Er C V3 6 VG7_6 BB System Definition e i UPAC UPAC Variable Se TW EU OT ry Global_Variables ry Control Variables Function List LJALI Fig 2 4 3 3 Select function code UNO 01 u01_f from the variable list Select global range and Func
57. IW8 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W o IW8 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW8 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV8 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai 991W8 7 16 o Ai Ai2 of INV8 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal QWB8 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW8 9 2 eo Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW8 10 5 Z m Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW8 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 2 13bit required o QW8 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW8 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW8 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT 4 QW8 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT 2 QW8 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT g Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW8 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV8 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV8 5g AO used by INV8 are defined QW8 18 27 amp AO AO2 of INV8 INT as universal QW8 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV8 INT QD8 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV8 dynamically 9 INV9 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV9 you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV9 does not have a way to exchang
58. If the version is uncertain contact us Before installing the option check the ROM version of the main body If the option is already installed check the ROM version of the main body in that state MAIN H1xxxx MTR H2xxxx See the information displayed on the right of MAIN and MTR in the KP K xxx maintenance information of the keypad panel The screen shown on the right is page 5 in the maintenance information Press the key at the keypad panel to go to page 5 Table 2 2 1 Model of option ROM version MAIN MTR OPC VG7 UPAC H1003D or later H2003D or later 2 5 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 2 2 Settings on VG7S Side CAUTION e When 0 is set at 038 UPAC start stop or a stop S command is issued form the control of D300win data exchange does not occur between UPAC and VG7S e 038 cannot be controlled from the UPAC program e If the break point is set in the monitor screen of D300win and in a broken state 0 stop is set at 038 UPAC alarm ErA is caused Do not operate 038 during break operation Do not select zero clear at 039 UPAC memory mode for the FM and SFM areas 0 T oO to E m x E 3 oO 2 aiseg pue uoleiedaid 2 2 2 1 Starting or stopping UPAC Though the CPU of UPAC is always active without relations to the setting of the 038 function code UPA
59. MW11 161 0141h MSAN EM 0 00 to 60 00 s 3 Yes limiter Ai1 E66 UINT Mw11 162 0142h Increment decrement 0 00 to 60 00 s 3 Yes limiter Ai2 Increment decrement 0 00 to 60 00 s o 0 00 Bev Re eM 11 163 0143h limiter Ai3 Displayed for models with AIO option Yes Increment decrement 0 00 to 60 00 s o 0 00 ES SES AMW 11 164 0144h limiter Ai4 Displayed for models with AIO option Yes You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 38 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written F code Variabl updating Name Setting range Type by 0 to 1 to 31 0 Detected speed 1 speedometer swing on single side N FB1 Nmax 10V Detected speed 1 speedometer swing on both sides N FB1 Nmax 10V Speed setting 2 before acceleration deceleration calculation N REF2 Nmax 10V Speed setting 4 ASR input N REF4 Nmax 10V Detected speed 2 ASR input N FB2 Nmax 10V Detected line speed LINE N Nmax 10V AO terminal function setting Torque current command e69 f UINT MW 11 165 0145h AO1 terminal function torque ammeter swing on both sides Yes IT REF4 150 10V Torque current command torque ammeter sw
60. NCAUTION Download programs and system definition from D300win during stoppage of the inverter The data is not downloaded during operation of the inverter e Be sure to issue a reset command to allow data referencing and updating between VG7S and UPAC after downloading system definition from D300win As well wait for about five seconds after resetting before starting UPAC Refer to the MICREX SX reference manual for details of downloading of programs and system definition In this section conditions characteristic to UPAC are described 1 Downloading and resetting conditions The program and system definition can be downloaded or reset during stoppage of both the inverter and UPAC Mere deactivation of operation commands is not judged to be stoppage of the inverter Operation commands must be deactivated and the speed must be zero and the inverter output must be shut off with voltage output tuned off before stoppage is judged To stop the UPAC function code 038 may be set to 0 at the keypad panel however when considering operability do not operate the keypad panel but give a stop S command from the control of D300win to stop Stop the UPAC system after arranging the downloading and resetting conditions described in the table below Table 2 2 7 UPAC downloading and resetting condition Function D300win control UPAC system VG7S Downloading and resetting code
61. Operation direction switching Setting 0 1 Use the setting to reverse the motor with an FWD command U50 0 FWD command for forward motor rotation REV command for reverse motor rotation U50 1 FWD command for reverse motor rotation REV command for forward motor rotation Change the parameter during stoppage Speed limit Setting 0 to 110 0 to 110 u52 Minimum winding diameter ratio Setting 10 to 100 10 to 100 Speed limit The limit applies to the motor speed command added with the dancer roll speed offset Minimum winding diameter ratio The minimum winding diameter which is specified at the minimum winding diameter U02 during regular operation can be specified in of the U02 setting with 1 being the minimum winding diameter ratio The value specified in this parameter is the lowest limit of the minimum calculated winding diameter 4 19 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Dancer roll position detection signal assignment Setting 0 to 5 uss Dancer roll position detection level Setting 0 to 100 0 to 100 E15 The dancer roll position is detected and output in an on off DO output signal DANDCT DAN_DCT on off off Dancer roll position U55 Hysteresis 1 Dancer roll position detection level Fig 4 1 22 Specify the parameter E15 to E19 settings of the assigned DO output at 25 U DO and set U54 as shown below
62. Operation status Sw Speed setting 1 frequency reference W f 3 Line speed input 3 4 5 Real speed detected speed value 6 7 8 The torque reference 2 data and torque current reference data are converted into a value where 10000 indicates the L 10 pulse train position reference PG PR 10095 torque with the rated torque 11 Position detection build in or PG PD bein 100 m 12 Position detection Z phase input PG PD g 0 go 13 Position reference Data 10000 Torque o 14 DI of INV1 DIOB option 16bit 15 Ai of INV1 Ai sz Example If 6000 is read 60 is judged Cancel Fig 3 1 31 3 20 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 4 4 Status monitor high speed 1 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 29 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks WIWH 5 6 a ON Data type 32 WORD VG7S UPAC 9oIWLI 6 7 Operation status SW Data type 21 WORD VG7S UPAC O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 30 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks XIWH 3 6 oo 15808 Data type 32 WORD VG7S UPAC WT 4 7 Operation status SW Data type 21 WORD VG7S UPAC O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 The high speed status monitor consists of control data FWD REV
63. P15 MW 11 303 030Fh coefficient 0 0 to 100 0 96 Yes P16 pt6 f UINT Mw11 304 0310h M1 magnetic saturation 0 0 to 100 0 96 2 Yes coefficient 2 M1 magnetic saturation P17 p17 MW 11 305 0311h coeden 0 0 to 100 0 Yes M1 magnetic saturation P148 p18f UINT MW11 306 0312h ont 0 0 to 100 0 2 Yes P19 UINT MW11 307 0313h R M1 magnetic saturation 0 0 to 100 0 96 2 Yes coefficient 5 P20 90MW11 308 0314h M1 secondary time constant 0 001 to 9 999 s 4 Yes P21 Mw11 309 0315n M1 induction voltage 0 to 999 V Lol Yes coefficient LJ You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 41 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor F code 60 ms updating and High speed Written referencing data 2 Vana updating Name Setting range Type by EN Type Address address UPAC P22 E MW11 310 0316h M1 R2 correction 0 500 to 5 000 Yes coefficient 1 M1 R2 correction P23 p23f UINT MW11 311 0317h rs 0 500 to 5 000 Yes P24 p24 MW11 312 0318h Mi Rescorrection 0 010 to 5 000 Yes coefficient 3 P25 p25 f UINT MW11 313 0319h M1 exciting current 0 000 to 5 000 Yes correction coefficient P26 maua MW11 314 031Ah M1 ACR P gain 0 1 to 20 0 Yes P27 MW11 315 031Bh M1 ACR I integration time 0 5 to
64. PLC PC etc connected with built in RS485 via the optical option Table 2 3 7 RS485 address rule No Name of parameter Name Keypad panel indication Setting range Description of setting Station number for identification in a system connected to host device POD PC etc via H31 Station address RS485 address 0 to 255 the built in RS485 0 RTU 99 FGI Broadcasting 1 to 255 Address 2 17 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 3 3 Connection Description is made for the rule of connection setting in master slave connection or broadcasting connection or accesses of a PC or the like to each inverter via the built in RS485 OF FE 2 1 Master slave connection E The figure on the right indicates connection of n units 3 The division between the master and slave 1s given with SWI Sz Table 2 3 8 EE Sw1 SI option definition a S 0 Master 1 Slave VG7 1 VG7 2 VG7 3 VG7 n 2to9 Er6 or Erb is caused SW1 0 SW1 1 SW1 1 SW1 1 035 gives definition of the link H31 1 H31 2 H31z3 poe H31 n ddr 035 0 035 1 035 2 035 n 1 ee 036 n 1 036 n 1 036 n 1 036 n 1 Number of slave units n 1 2 lt n lt 12 total n units Table 2 3 9 Fig 2 3 1 035 036 Sl option definition 0 n 1 Master 1 n 1 Slave 1 2 n 1 Slave 2 n 1 n 1 Slaven gt n Er6 or Erb is caused
65. QW3 32 15 Detected speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT v Speed output from motor model QW3 33 16 5 INV3 function code 1 address Use after you Ww a Data transmission at the QW3 34 17 5 Q INV3 function code 1 data check data INT minimum of 2ms is possible by QW3 35 18 S LINV3 function code 2 address distinction of W defining this 4W area for QW3 36 19 gt 5 INV3 function code 2 data individual function INT individual function code when QW3 37 20 2 INV3 function code 3 address code W SI UPAC option is used QW3 38 21 9 9 INV3 function code 3 data INT QW3 39 22 5 8 INV3 function code 4 address W QW3 40 23 r INV3 function code 4 data INT QW3 41 24 Reserved QW3 42 25 g DO2 DIOB option 10bit of INV3 Data distinction 27 W UPAC controls AO DO of INV3 QW3 43 26 amp AO AO1 of INV3 4000h 10V INT AO DO used by INV3 are QW3 44 27 w AO AO2 of INV3 INT defined as universal 9 QW3 45 28 g AO AO3 of INV3 INT Note that universal definition is QW3 46 29 Z AO AIO option AO4 of INV3 INT not required for DIOB QW3 47 30 2 AO AIO option AO5 of INV3 INT QD3 48 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV3 dynamically efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 INV4 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV4 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter
66. Settings in steps 11 through 14 cannot be given in this case UPAC support for D300win Setup 11 A dialog box for choosing Destination Choose Destination Location Location appears Select folder where Setup will install files The Destination Folder contains the directory where D300win is installed if D300win is not found C D300win is displayed Confirm the destination directory and left click the Next N gt IrstatletitEld 1 27 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v E T a TE 2S sf Choose Folder dialog box appears E Piece chasse the rctal ation idden If you want to change this folder click the Brouse 3 Path R button in the Choose Destination Location dialog CAD300win box and specify another folder where D300win is Directories installed and click OK Desktop E g My Computer H e 3 Floppy 4 Ee C CJ ati EA My Documents Hl Program Files temp H Windows zl H H H Fig 1 3 11 Error The left message box appears when D300win was not found in the folder you specified Left click the OK button to close the message and e D300win is not found by a specified folder specify the tulder again Fig 1 3 12 UPAC support for D300win Setup ml 12 The Select Components dialog box is Select Components displayed Choose the components Setup will install D Select the desired components to be
67. WORD INV1 S06 control data CW INV128 SPDREF4 INV1 speed setting 4 frequency reference INT during V f INV148_DSW DWORD INV1 dynamic switch e10 f UINT E10 X11 function selection u01_f INT U01 USER P1 User definition variable SYC BOOL SYC FLG BOOL PR CNT DINT PG CNT DINT DEV_CNT DINT PR_DATA INT PG_DATA INT APR_REAL REAL APR_OUT_REAL REAL APR_OUT_SPEED INT END VAR 3 37 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 2 3 Example of Dancer Control 3 2 3 1 Specification The specification is determined as shown in the control block diagram below idu Winding side de p ancer Limiting control Position command Line speed Control input Function code Ai2 Dancer position detection Standard i ow Ai V0 UNO 01 P gain T UNO 02 Constant lt 7 EC 5 Ej O eo UNO 03 Position E M command MW11 624 3 Winding side Speed limit filter M ee Oner speed gt am O O settingsa deceleration UPAC sw FRENIC5000VG7S Fig 3 2 4 1 Description of specification e The analog line speed of the sender is input to A12 of the driving VG7S of the sender and transferred to UPAC At this time the function selection of AI2 is set at universal Ai e The anal
68. Y1 to YSA and Y11 to Y18 from UPAC assign each control output to the universal DO so that the control state of the main body of VG7S is not reflected on the output running speed agreement etc For example Y1 is assigned to speed existence N EX in the factory shipment value When the motor rotates actually Y1 is turned on or off according to the speed To operate Y1 from 1 0 Group setting x m Inverter 1 Output word Use Word Name Ja 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f Torque reference 1 Torque current reference 2 3 o 4 Magnetic flux reference All 5 Control data Cw 5 7 8 ISI Universal DO1 standard DID4 option 1 3bit Acceleration time Deceleration time oO 3 Torque limiter level 1 L1 10 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f 12 Torque reference 2 13 Torque bias 14 Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed ez IOC I UPAC only assign the U DO function to stop reflection of the state inside the control 3 15 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Composition into word data The control output data is composed in a word data before it is reflected The data format is as shown below 1 DOI of INVO standard DIOA 13 bit type 33 15 8 7 0 nn NENNEN eu 7 Q to4 Y1 to Y5A 8 to 15 Y11 to Y18 2 DO2 of INVO DIOB option
69. You can individually set for 30W six unit system data or 12W twelve unit system data The following section describes the bit assignment of the DSW software switch In this section No refers to No in control variable I O area data list If a UPAC application does not set these data data will be 0 and enabled as defined below If you want to switch data to be disabled set 1 to corresponding bit Setting bit data 0 Enabled on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN 1 Disabled 1 For six unit system Table 5 2 35 MSB LSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 No 16 No 15 No 14 No 13 No 12 No 11 No 10 No 9 No 8 No 7 No 6 No 5 No 4 No 3 No 2 No 1 MSB LSB 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 _ No 30 No 29 No 28 No 27 No 26 No 25 No 24 No 23 No 22 No 21 No 20 No 19 No 18 No 17 2 For twelve unit system Table 5 2 36 MSB LSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 No 11 No 10 No 9 No 8 No 7 No 6 No 5 No 2 No 1 MSB LSB 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 No 28 No 27 No 26 7 z E E 5 30 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 2 3 Function Code Area Address Assignment The accessing method for function codes F
70. ae Terre mE installed and click the left mouse button elect the components you want to install and clear components you not want to install on the Next N gt button r Description E fs g Function definition files Six VG systems M Template ER Twelve VG systems g Function definition files m Template Space Required on C 5376 K Space Available on C 9356584 K installshield Fig 1 3 13 UPAC support for D300win Setup xi 13 The Select Program Folder dialog box Select Program Folder Pl lect fold appears lease select a program tolder v If you change the default D300win Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder folder enter the program folder name in name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue the text b ox Program Folders i 5 in Note Though you can specify a folder other than the Existing Folders folder where D300win is installed the same folder Accessories is convenient for uninstalling FRENICSOQVG 7 nline Services StartUp lnstellstreld lt Back Cancel Fig 1 3 14 1 28 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup UPAC support for D300win Setup f x 14 Click the Next N gt button The Start Copying Files Start Copying Files dialog box Review settings before c
71. difference is found Z phase detection is i i Z phase of encoder judged ab __ PG_CNT Z phase detection is judged upon difference between er PGCNTZ pG CNTandPG CNT Z Fig 3 1 41 Example of Z phase detection program in IL language LD INV110 POSDET No 11 position detection data SUB POS DATA ST PG CNT Acquisition of count at execution task period through differentiation LD INV111 POS Z Position detection data with No 12 Z phase detection function SUB POS ZDATA ST PG CNT Z Acquisition of count at execution task period through differentiation ADD ORT DATA Absolute reference position data in 0000 to OFFF range INT TO WORD AND WORD 16 0FFF With 1024 P R encoder multiplication by four that is 4096 OFFF counts WORD TO INT AND OFFF for automatic Z phase detection in software ST ORT DATA Absolute reference position data in 0000 to OFFF range LD INV110 POSDET Store the previous value ST PG CNT LD INV111 POS Z Store the previous value ST PG CONT Z LD PG CNT EQ PG CNT Z Judge Z phase detection JMPC NOT ZPHASE Z phase detection is judged because PG CNT is not equal to PG CNT Z LD PG CNT Z ST ORT DATA LD BOOL 1 ST ZPHASE_DETECT 1 upon detection of Z phase Remains 1 until the power is turned off NOT ZPHASE Ei cies p od obe pgs p RE E 3 DEA ION LE PE ne DR TAP FO E E des pb Ene pp pod s E E315 E E Pt LED SEES ESSE E SE TE 4 I
72. i gt judgment H ORT completion 1 signal H ORT completion judgment 4 9 A ORT signal P anis i UNO 05 ORT completion i 1 Z phase detection OR I UNO 06 wath increment zero clear Orientation ON ae osition detection i detection Z phase 4ms i oto Slow speed 1 1 UNO 10 i I oH son spea ra UNO m ow speer OPC VG7 PG PD l i Ld OHH Slow speed 1 3 UNO 12 i Pulse string j input form 013 l 10 Slow speed 1 4 UNO 13 selection bem on o nescnonenoneo Q Qr Gear selection 1 2 Fig 4 2 13 4 29 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 2 4 Function Code Table 4 2 7 Function code LCD display Nane Japanese Valid setting range Unit Res oluti on Initial value Change during operation Remark Read only data Shows version of UPAC package software ORT rotation direction 0 Direction for shorter to target position 1 Direction for following external slow speed direction U12 Slow speed 1 3 U13 Slow speed 1 4 U02 from stopping P2 0 1 7 L 0 No Set to stop after shorter rotation or to follow slow speed direction to conduct orientation when stopping 0 Stop in shortest time may accelerate ORT stop mode USER 1 Stop without accelerating from current speed U03
73. msec Sets a time for a filter through which the last output of the torque command passes Standard 5 msec 4 51 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor GD corresponding to reel kgem Set value 1 32767 0 01 327 67 kgem Calculates GD corresponding to a reel converted into the motor shaft Speed setting correction Set value 0 200 0 200 Sets this correction value slightly smaller than 100 when a material is slightly slipping with respect to the line speed set value Active time of dynamic mechanical loss while operating Set value 0 5000 0 5 sec Use this setting when you cannot adjust by using the acceleration deceleration torque compensation Sets the time when the toque compensation corresponding to the dynamic mechanical loss is applied when starting the operation Sets 0 to disable Adjust this time when the tension decreases when starting the operation Active time of dynamic mechanical loss while stalling Set value 0 5000 0 5 sec Use this setting when you cannot adjust to a set tension by using the stall operation Adjust this time when the tension decreases during the stall operation Sets 0 to disable Use this setting after the wound diameter is reset to an initial value Deceleration dv dt on emergency stop Set value 0 to 100 0 to 100 m min sec Used for calculating the deceleration compensation torque on an emergency stop Example dv d
74. noe f JuINT vMw11 326 o406h Coolingfan ON OFF control aways rotates if inactive is selected Yes Active The cooling fan operation signal can be output in interlock with this function codes excluding the motor parameters P and A Oto 1 H08 h08 f UINT MW 11 328 0408h Reverse phase sequence lock 0 Ineffective Yes 1 Effective 5 42 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written updating Name Setting range Type by F code Start after momentary power H13 j MW 11 333 040Dh failure 0 1 to 0 5 to 5 0 s Yes Delay H14 n14 f UINT Mw11 334 040Eh Speed fall rate 1 to 500 to 3600 r m s Yes Holding voltage on 3 phase 200 V 200 to 235 to 300V kis ns UINT 4MW11 335 040Fh continuous operation 3 phase 400 V 400 to 470 to 600V 0 Yes 0to1 0 Designation at H17 H16 h16 UINT 90MW11 336 0410h Operation command self de Maximum time The inverter judges momentary Yes hold setting power failure and holds the operation command while the control power is established in the inverter or rie the main circuit DC voltage becomes almost zero H17 hi7_f UINT MWw11 337 0411h Operation command self 6 0 to 30 0 s Yes holding time 2 to 1 H19 h19 UINT MW11 339 0413h Active drive Ineffective Yes Effective 0to3 PID control setting Jensen H20 h20
75. o on i9 9 prar e O 0 O o en O pus O O add Imi 3 3 7 Torque L VG7 Interface a0ualajas Bueoues 29u 194 1 xnjj ojeuDe W EVH J O 109 erHl jueuno enbJo enje 4ejuui enbao enje jeg enbJo L xny onauBbeyy TOWN I vlh O O uonoeyep Aem 2u0 TT eouoJejel su tea DU Be ur n Pa so MEME mL 332 17 O am EE l 8 3 de IS 9van a Faawulo l l uonosjep uonoejep Aem om I8A8I eru i au l NETS ee N p ds Jejeuuue enbio oy OTO e ee e lt r gt wu SEA oOo alor A x uasna anbio D 18 I pexiJ l l O P xniponsubeny 71 olo 434 41 01 ONW NO L Aejdsip e2u81ejo1 H jueuno anbio J 9u 1 4 1 o o ppu 208 eouexojoi aa Ed arene XDI ONUS a xny onoubew PT E Lo JAJA IS OYaN i Joyuoul m O Ots vo ou woo S 39U919 1 44 6 peol uonoejes l S enbio JOIE I9 9 gouasajal J wonoaes cu olo XNY OHEUBEW yny onauBey PH Auelod m eouelejeoJ i 199 0r4l ve jueuno enbio MS 9van
76. o FEZ Zac g 2 5 gsl gt 89 Ye Bee post mW 59 20 o gt 02 Pz r DCI 5 OE gras 2 oO 5 3 41 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor VG7 Interface wb UoHesajeoep uoHesajeo0V ejqeue 0 z L4 pue LX Juonesjooov Le 18S ulj au esn NOK ueuM 804 pue 7 04 ayumueno s emje ou 17 pue oeH uo puadap 90r ggd Ed euin uoneJojooop v uoneJejooep i t c jou seop BOS pue gos oiui BunuM Gun woo se pe eldsip si Weiss Ul INOO SU juoycumesey uoneislesep juoneiejeoov uoneiojesop L _ feum uonessjsooy qv i uoneJojeooy uoneJeje2ov 193 IZ mu uone nojeo OVdN IS ZDA OdO D 699 699 6vo 024 l f 3 M UOneJo ooep uoreJo oooe BU 210 9q euo EU SI ojjuo9 paads y 10 enjeA peKeldsip eu E L OvdN ZDA OdO c i 890 sso sro 694 Bun Woo epou zi Z BuiBBof y 0 uoyms 0 xoq jeurwua eu uo D Of eui pue jeued AYdAIY eui uioq esn ueo noA 499 159 vo 804 60S NS J04 U09 Burjoo peeds o1ez jonuos uonisod peyiduuis q 404 80S xui uBnoJuj UuoneJej o ep JuoneJe ooov 9d 29A 940O 10 jeuondo jo3uoo peziuoiyouA s ules esind joguoo uonisod seaun e senuonud BuiwojJjoj eu seu uonounj jojuoo uonisog Olza G uonoejes euin O LL 934 99v HSY Dool ez puewwoo Buryoo peeds oJez O porlo dOlS uonejedo PIOH uonoejep l Pere CNE
77. settings and turn the power off then on again e If there is a broken wire in the communication link remove the cause of the broken wire An early ROM version of the main body of VG7 is probable Contact us 1 Blink at 500 ms intervals Correct operation 3 Always ON OFF Option CPU error 2 UPAC application check NCAUTION e If the communication link is broken due to a broken wire or the like after the link is established when the power is turned on the inverter to inverter link error Erb is caused at all units If the communication link is broken before the power is turned on the protective function is not effective during stoppage When the operation command FWD or REV is issued the inverter to inverter link error Erb is issued to activate the protective function but design the UPAC application to monitor the communication link to assure safety The communication state can be checked on the UPAC application side Use this function for confirmation upon system startup or for assurance of reliability of the application during system stoppage Digital output A digital output is issued in a UPAC SI system when the communication link between optical options is established Select one out of digital output terminals Y1 to Y5 and Y11 to Y18 DIOA option of the master inverter where UPAC is installed and assign 45 0 D07 45 0 D07 1 Communication link established Correct ope
78. the spacers correctly as described in the following procedure The product may be broken if they are used incorrectly o e2 Lj LI Spacer attached to option Spacer attached to OPC VG7 UPAC Unit mm Installation to CN2 on left side Installation to CN3 on right side 1 Install OPC VG7 UPAC to the connector 1 Install OPC VG7 UPAC to the connector CN10 on the control PCB CN10 on the control PCB 2 Install the five spacers h and one screw 1 2 Install the five spacers h and one screw 1 attached to OPC VG7 UPAC to the attached to OPC VG7 UPAC to the installation holes a b c d e and f of installation holes a b c d e and f of OPC VG7 UPAC as shown in Fig 1 2 OPC VG7 UPAC and install the one spacer 11 and fix them j attached to the option to the option 3 Install the option so that the connector installation fitting g on the control PCB as CN1 on the back of the option fits the shown in Fig 1 2 12 connector CN2 on the control PCB 3 Install the option so that the connector 4 Tighten the three accessory screws k to the CN1 of the option fits the connector CN3 installation holes of the option to fix the of the control PCB option 4 Tighten the accessory three screws k to the 5 While referring to How to remove the installation holes of the option to fix the front cover reverse the removal option procedure to reinstall the front cover 5 While referring to How to remove the
79. to 10 Inactive H04 hO4 f UINT MW 11 324 0404h Retry times to 10 times Yes he retry operation signal can be output to the output terminal o 0to02 0 Inactive H09 h09 f UINT 9 MW11 329 0409h Starting characteristic AE Active only when restarting after momentary power Yes rotating motor pick up failure 2 Active Fixed at inactive during V f control ac ce aparaton So SaS m H10 h10 f UINT MW 11 330 040Ah 0 Ineffective Yes operation d i 1 Effective 0to2 Operation is automatically stopped at a speed lower than the stopping speed setting 0 Operation OFF upon disconnection across FWD CM Automatic operation OFF REV CM Du bf JUINT MW 11 331 040Bh function 1 Operation OFF at speeds lower than F37 stopping Yes speed even if connection across FWD CM and REV CM is ON 2 Coast to stop upon disconnection across FWD CM or REV CM LE You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting efault factory setting H05 h05 f UINT MwW11 325 0405h Retry interval 01 to 5 00 to 20 00 s 3 Yes Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions JO 3 a No amp 11C on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN dolo o 92e silo he initialized code includes all the F E C H o L and to 1 he cooling fan inside the inverter is detected for utomatic ON OFF control of the cooling fan The fan Hoe
80. while accelerating decelerating line Set value 0 10000 0 100 00 sec without limiter B TU I o x Q Qa ao e 9 E D Sets I time while accelerating decelerating the line D time for ATR while accelerating decelerating line Set value 0 10000 0 10 000 sec without limiter Sets D time while accelerating decelerating the line Upper limit value for ATR while accelerating decelerating line Set value 300 to 300 300 to 300 without limiter B It will be the upper limit value for correction value ofthe ATR while accelerating decelerating the line Lower limit value for ATR while accelerating decelerating line Set value 300 to 300 300 to 300 without limiter It will be the lower limit value for correction value ofthe ATR while accelerating decelerating the line Maximum value setting for line speed U27 Set value 0 20000 0 2000 m min without limiter Enter the maximum speed for scale conversion for the line speed Maximum diameter setting Set value 100 2000 100 2000 mm without limiter Enter the maximum diameter for scale conversion for the wound diameter Limit upper limit for ATR while stalling Set value 300 to 300 300 to 300 without limiter Sets the upper limit value for the correction value by the ATR while stalling Increase this setting when you want to increase the correction value by the ATR while stalling 4 50
81. 000 0 to 1 000 m min Used for indication of the line speed in option monitor 4 and for calculation of estimated winding diameter ratio at startup Min winding diameter DS Setting 0 to 2 000 0 to 2 000 mm Used for calculation of the calculated winding diameter in option monitor 3 Specify the minimum winding diameter that can be installed to the winding shaft The relationship among M1 max speed F03 max line speed U01 and min winding diameter U02 is as shown below F03 M1 max speed U01 max line speed x speed reduction ratio lt 1 UO2 min winding diameter Max winding diameter DL Setting 0 to 2 000 0 to 2 000 mm Setting point for the upper limit of the calculated winding diameter and the taper variable of taper output Material length Setting 0 to 1 000 0 to 1 000 mm Used for calculation of the estimated winding ratio The winding diameter ratio is estimated from this setting variation in the dancer roll position input to the Ail terminal and the number of pulses of the motor PG 1f this setting is 0 calculation of the estimated winding diameter ratio during startup is not made Dancer roll position voltage Setting 10 000 to 10 000 Winding loose limit feeding tight limit 10 000 to 10 000 mV Dancer roll position voltage Setting 10 000 to 10 000 Winding tight limit feeding loose limit 10 000 to 10 000 mV Specif
82. 01 from 0 to 1000 at the keypad panel Check that 00000 changes to 01000 on the D300win monitor screen From this it is known that UPAC refers to the UNO 01 data on the VG7S side and writes the data in the speed interface of the IQ memory of UPAC al D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER C_VG7_6 R_UPAC Default PROG_1 LADDER RE Eie Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Estas Window Help lal x Os RS s melon BEX B86 ext Iri fie tA Ee la lo ES Sn oo E ICE 1H O ap nonae Se H e E did Project Libraries Data Types 3 6 Logical POUs 3 8 LADDER f LADDERT LADDERV LADDER Physical Hardware 3 6 C_VG7 5 VG7 6 BB System Definition m R UPAC UPAC Tasks Global Variables G Control Variables B Function_List INV118 SPDREF1 01000 ia 283252 Fig 2 4 19 Next change settings as follows F01 Speed setting N1 0 F02 Operation 0 F03 Max speed 1500 P01 M1 control method 2 Simulation mode H30 Link operation 0 Turn off all contact signals related to the speed change such as multi step operation Explanation of setting Turn off the relevant contacts such as F01 F02 and H30 to validate operation commands and speed commands entered at the
83. 1 PG PD 4 Motor with 5V line driver PG Use this method for a servomotor or a motor with a 5V line driver PG made by other than Fuji Use the PG SD card to detect the speed and use the PG PD card to detect the position The relevant function code settings are as follows Position Speed detection detection A PG Pe Installed PD A B Z 5V line driver Fig 4 2 5 VG7S General AB purpose M Gear Position Speed belt detection detection A PG PD y A B Z 5V line driver Fig 4 2 6 M made b VG7S other than Fuji A B Gear Position Speed belt detection detection Table 4 2 6 Function Name Setting code PNO 28 M1 PG pulse count selection Motor PG count PNO 29 M1 external PG correction Not used coefficient UNO 09 Pulse encoder selection Spindle PE count UNO 24 Speed detections selection 0 PG SD 4 25 3 A A L t Pe PG PG PD SD A A A B 5V line driver A B Z 5V line driver Fig 4 2 7 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Notes e If 0 is specified for UNO 24 Speed detection selection the built in PG and PG SD become valid When PG SD is installed PG SD is given priority When PG SD is not installed the built in PG is valid e To d
84. 1 1 INT VG7S UPAC IWO 12 13 S05 Position reference 1 1 INT VG7S UPAC O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 lt 2 N 3 1 5 1 Acquiring pulses 8 3 Internal speed Command pulse 2 command SUE Min Duel Oscillating circuit OPC VG7 PG PR Pulse train position reference Receiving circuit Feedback ulse selection ulse train inpu OPC VG7 PMPG type selection PMPG priority Standard built in i i OPC VG7 PG PD O 1 1 LLLI Receiving circuit UPAC position detection built in or PG PD UPAC position detection Z phase input PG PD Fig 3 1 36 Place a check mark at the pulse train position 1 0 Group setting x reference PG PR check box in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at M Inverter 1 Input word rs i Use Word Name UPAC System Definition i I O group setting 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference monitor of the D300win screen Next download the 2 Torque reference 2 Torque current reference final Magnetic flux reference final All Real speed detected speed value Control data Cw J standard DIDA 16bit Operation status S w Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f 9 Line speed input system definition and reset pulse train position reference PG PR 11 Position detection build in or PG PD 12 Position detection Z phase inputJ PG PD 13 Position reference 14 DI of INV1 DIOB optio
85. 1 2 P limit Power limi 3 Torque and current limit 0to3 0 Same limiting level level 1 for 4 quadrants 1 Drive torque level 1 braking level 2 Fat if fuit sMW1141 oo2oh Torque limit mode 2 2 Upper limit level 1 lower limit level 2 Yes 3 Same limiting level for four quadrants with changeover between level 1 and level 2 Level 1 and Level 2 indicate the data of destination of settings 42 and 43 0to5 0 Function code F44 Torque limit level 1 TAITE REETI F42 f42_f UINT MW11 42 002Ah 2 DIA card Yes selection 3 DIB card 4 Link valid 5 PID output 0to5 0 Function code F45 isk 1 Ai TL REF2 F43 f43f UINT Mw11 43 002Bh Torque limit level 2 2 DIA card 47 Yes selection 3 DIB card 4 Link valid 5 PID output Faa raat NT mwi144 oo2Ch Torquelimit level 300 t0 180 to 300 Ses Fs Yes Mechanical loss 300 00 to 0 00 to 300 00 96 HE ae f fiur wwe Joozen ha Used to compensate for mechanical loss of the load Yes 300 00 to 0 00 to 300 00 F47 47 INT MW11 47 002Fh Torque bias T1 This setting can be added to the torque reference 7 Yes Use DI to switch among torque bias T1 T2 and T3 300 00 to 0 00 to 300 00 96 F48 INT MW11 48 0030h Torque bias T2 This setting can be added to the torque reference T Yes Use DI to switch among torque bias T1 T2 and T3 300 00 to 0 00 to 300 00 96 F49 INT MW11 49 0031h Torque bias T3 This setting can be added to the tor
86. 1 Definition Use the dynamic switch to change the reflection method of control variables UPAC VG7S during inverter operation after UPAC has started The function can be set individually for the control variables of each of the broadcasting 6 unit and 12 unit systems As shown in the table below the system definition is downloaded to load the definition statically when both UPAC and VG7S are stopped On the other hand dynamic switching reflects data dynamically when UPAC is in operation lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o Table 3 1 37 UPAC VG7S System definition downloading Dynamic switching Stopped Output shutdown stopped Possible Impossible data exchange Output running Starting Output shutdown stopped Impossible Possible data exchange Output running Place a check mark at the dynamic switching both DSW1 and DSW2 32 bits in total check boxes in the I O Group Inverter 1 Qutput word setting screen of output definition at Name UPAC System Definition I O group LJ 18 Address of function code 2 of INV1 x R LI 19 Data of function code 2 of INV1 setting of the D300win screen Next L 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 download the system definition and reset o 21 Data of function code 3 of INV1 Al g 22 Address of function code 4 of INV1 LI 23 Data of function code 4 of INV1 O 24 Re
87. 10 8 0 to 3 can be caused by a hardware failure and a major fault due to memory error will possibly happen again after you turn on 5 11 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 7 SX bus abnormality factors MW 10 10 MW 10 11 Table 5 2 6 Address Name Description Fault level MX 10 10 0 Not used MX 10 10 1 Not used MX 10 10 2 Not used MX 10 10 3 to Not used MX 10 10 12 MX 10 10 13 Not used MX 10 10 14 Not used MX 10 10 15 1 O refresh congestion when VG7S does not Update input output data Major fault for 128ms or more MX 10 11 0 to Not used MX 10 11 13 MX 10 11 14 Not used MX 10 11 15 Not used 8 Application abnormality sources MW 10 12 MW 10 13 Read only Table 5 2 7 Address Name Description Fault level MX 10 12 0 Toi 1 for abnormality in system definition Major fault MX 10 12 1 sem 1 for abnormality in application program Major fault MX 10 12 2 to Not used MX 10 12 15 MX 10 13 0 Not used MX 10 13 1 a m 1 for abnormality in application program Minor fault 96MX 10 13 2 to Not used MX 10 13 15 9 User major faults MW 10 14 to MW 10 16 Table 5 2 8 Address Name Description MX 10 14 0 User major fault factor 0 to to UPAC will stop due to a major fault when an application MX 10 14 15 User major fault factor 15 MX 10 15 0 User ma
88. 10V INT UPAC gt VG7S Define U AO to allow 96QWLI 44 27 AO of INV1 AO2 4000h 10V INT UPAC gt VG7S UPAC to control the 96QWLI 45 28 AO of INV1 AO3 4000h 10V INT UPACSVGZS AO terminal 96QWLI 46 29 AO of INV1 AIO option AO4 4000h 10V INT UPAC gt VG7S 96QWLI 47 30 AO of INV1 AIO option AO5 4000h 10V INT UPAC gt VG7S O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 22 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWLO 17 26 AO of INV1 AO1 4000h 10V INT UPAC VG7S Define U AO to allow 96QWLI 18 27 AO of INV1 AO2 4000h 10V_ INT UPACAVG7S UPAC to control the 96QWLI 19 28 AO of INV1 AO3 4000h 10V INT UPAC5vG7S AQ terminal O 1 to 12 INVI to INV12 The analog outputs controlled by UPAC are the standard AO AO1 AO2 and AO3 and AIO option AO4 and AO5 not for 12 unit system 1 How to use To refer to the data place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset Place a check mark at the check box of the corresponding data items in the I O Group setting screen vers Output word of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O Bse Word Name 18 Address of function code 2 of INV1 group setting of the D300win screen 19 Data offun
89. 13 Inverter stoppage STOP 14 Operation ready output RDY 15 Magnetic flux detection signal MF DT 5 56 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification Type 126 Control output 2 15 87 0 0 Motor M2 selection status SW M2 1 Motor M3 selection status SW M3 2 Brake release signal BRK 3 Alarm indication AL1 4 Alarm indication AL2 5 Alarm indication AL4 6 Alarm indication AL8 7 Fan operation signal FAN 8 Auto resetting TRY 9 Universal DO U DO 10 Heat sink overheat early warning INV OH 11 Synchronization completion signal SY C 12 Lifetime alarm LIFE i Under accelerating U ACC 14 Under decelerating U DEC 15 Inverter overload early warning INV OL Type 127 Control output 3 15 87 0 0 Motor temperature early warning M OH 1 Motor overload early warning M OL 2 DB overload early warning DB OL 3 Link transmission error LK ERR 4 Load adaptive control under limiting ANL 5 Load adaptive control under calculation ANC 6 Analog torque bias hold TBH 7 Optional Do 1 O DI1 8 Optional Do 2 O DI2 9 Optional Do 3 O DI3 10 Optional Do 4 O DI4 11 Optional Do 5 O DI5 12 Optional Do 6 O DI6 i Optional Do 7 O DI7 14 Optional Do 8 O DI8 15 Optional Do 9 O DI9 5 57 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 2 4 Option Monitor Area
90. 14 Battery abnormality 1 when voltage of data backup battery drops or no battery is present MX 10 4 15 User minor fault 1 when any bit of user minor fault flag MX 10 18 0 to MX 10 20 15 is set to ON in application program 5 CPU error factors MW 10 6 Read only Table 5 2 4 Address Name Description MX 10 6 0 Operation processor Hardware abnormality of operation LSI in UPAC abnormality MX 10 6 1 OS processor Hardware abnormality of OS control LSI in UPAC abnormality MX 10 6 2 to Not used MX 10 6 15 6 Memory error factors MW 10 8 MW 10 9 Read only Table 5 2 5 Address Name Description Sesh MX 10 8 0 System ROM error 1 for error in system ROM in UPAC Major fault MX 10 8 1 System RAM error 1 for error in system RAM in UPAC Major fault MX 10 8 2 Application ROM error AENEA for application program Major fault MX 10 8 3 Application RAM error ELM ria for application program Major fault MX 10 8 4 to Not used MX 10 8 14 MX 10 8 15 Memory backup error E c SeA during power Major fault MX 10 9 0 to Not used MX 10 9 14 MX 10 9 15 Memory backup error son E alas during power Major fault Operation after memory error When a major fault happens due to the memory error listed above the following start power OFF to ON will be an initial start and the retained memory will be cleared to 0 The failure from MX
91. 18W can be set in a 12 unit system up to 8W can be set Selected number The number of signals being used is displayed for the selected device Details D button Or double click on Use and no use of each word can be set for the selected device the item All devices can be set without relations to installation of each device Output selection All OFF 2 10 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples Detail operation method of selection check box The check box is displayed or operated as described below e A check mark is placed if the service state of all devices is ON e A check mark is placed in the gray check box if the service state of some devices is ON e No check mark is placed if the service state of all devices is OFF e When clicked on the state of the check box changes as shown below L 5v LvIBLL vL VILI vL 4 141141 Detail setting method of each word Press the Details D button or double click on the item to display the detail setting screen shown in the figure below 1 0 Group setting X r Inverter 1 Output word Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f Torque reference 1 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference All 5 Control data Cw 6 7 8 Universal DO1 standard DIO4 option 1 3bit Accelera
92. 1s INT Ed Overwrite on F08 QW7 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW7 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT O QW7 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW7 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV7 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV7 Eg AO used by INV7 are defined QW7 18 27 e amp AO AO2 of INV7 INT as universal QW7 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV7 INT QD7 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV7 dynamically 5 27 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 8 INVS data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV8 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV8 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 30 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name d EPRE Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A more information IW8 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f Sg monitor calculation IW8 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW8 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o IW8 3 7 E Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 9 16 bit 2
93. 5 Multiplication Yes 018 n MW11 482 0612h F Excessive deviation 0 to 65535 Pulses 0 Yes tolerance NT MW11 483 0613h Deviation zero width 0 to 20 to 1000 Pulses o 0to3 Field option setting as operation time then stop 030 d MW 11 494 061Eh Action upon transmission Yes Operation for operation time and stop of continuation of communication error is judged Continuation of operation Operation time upon 031 x U 90MW 11 495 061Fh t mu 0 01 to 0 10 to 20 00 s Yes ransmission error 0to 1 032 d UINT MW11 496 0620h Transmission format 0 4W AW Yes 1 8W 8W Oto 1 033 UINT Mw 11 497 0621h SI MWS option setting 0 Ineffective Yes Multi winding motor system 1 Effective Multi winding motor system 1105 MW 11 498 0622 i Set the number of slave units without master for multi Yes slave stations bux as winding motor system h 0 to 255 Define the link station address for SI option used in I RS option setting UFAC link 035 MW 11 499 0623h A 2 0 Master address No Link station address gt 1 to 11 Slave address 100 Master address broadcasting 101 to 255 Slave address broadcasting H 1to 155 Number of slave stations linked with SI option in a 9 036 036 f UINT 70MW 11 500 0624h Link system slave stations system of multiple inverters with UPAC inverter being No the master WORD 00 to 10 to 24 Initial setting of communication of RS option Units digit transmission spee
94. 9van x loo m L 29u 194 1 RWA ndui ysy o l S i No ENDO zZ uonodjep peeds Ov i v3JH N 5 musel NO E 10 IS van uoruodi 5 Y indu ysy Bujes peeds Ov v yt l 4 oto ok OTO A o ca 4 x l da A JSV Y pua 5 pa 1410 0 eoueJgjol I l Joyyindurysy peeds o Jeu uoneAnov l l anjea l MS OVdN DES NN MS 9vdn OVdNIS LOA 9dO uonesueduioo y Dunes peeds cm SSO B9lUEU98N 8cH luonpo9os S dOO Q 6 9v4 l l uoneJedo dooig dooug ure 4 3 eouslejel i E 3 E i enbio D a 0107 1 Ol438 119 Sls IV G EL kl d olo VIG LOA OdO seq enbgo 6v i RN c zL lo 9 0 ald 29A 040 seq enblol srd 7 i E Dar i l pioy seiq l 440 z o f Lug mo cu c LL 7 l o anbioy ry l 010 b l rolol o Su ZDA 0dO i 9 serq enbjo v3 I jndino nal E E 1 Lnoaid i N E XS ZDA 0dO D L 2 LH uonoejes l 11 29 9dO 00050 0 Q0 ss Cr D P E E TETEE sect SNIL s b OEH Auoud poxiJ spied uondo g Q ao e cT xui jeues S8vSH An arr sh BE 89 g 2 payes6o u aSCE sper 213 059 SZcx Or o co 595 Jo gress 539 eo 2E gt P95r eee o sien 5 Es 58 z 3995 ap re 5 te z 3 45 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor and Magnetic flux o o en o pum O ue oO ad o O
95. Address Assignment Data in UPAC can be displayed on the LED monitor of the KEYPAD panel of the inverter where the UPAC is installed whether VG7S six unit system or VG7S twelve unit system is selected Data are reflected at about 60ms fixed cycle When you use this feature select a code from the Function List or specify the address YoMW area in the table to register a variable This area is used for writing from UPAC to INVI See the section for the KEYPAD panel operation for the option monitor indication on the KEYPAD panel 1 OP1 OP6 Table 5 2 53 Code Address Type OP1 MW11 681 W OP2 MW11 682 W OP3 MW11 683 UINT OP4 MW11 684 UINT OP5 MW11 685 INT OP6 MW11 686 INT 5 2 5 User Application RAS Area Address Assignment An application designed by user can monitor the state and activate the inverter protective action alarm state whether VG7S six unit system or VG7S twelve unit system is selected Sixteen bits 16 types are provided corresponding to cause of alarms When any bit is set to ON the inverter generates an ErA alarm and enters into the protective function activation state You cannot cancel reset the ErA alarm unless you set all bits to OFF 2 User RAS Table 5 2 54 Address Type MW 11 690 W on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN 5 58 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor
96. Control state output function Orientation signal and orientation completion signal are output To use this function assign the U DO function to Y1 and Y2 Y1 Orientation completion signal output Y2 Orientation signal output Off delay and on delay operations of the above output signals are possible The orientation completion width can be set Monitor function The following data items can be referred to at real time on the LED monitor at the keypad panel Option monitor 3 Stopping position command Option monitor 4 Z phase reference shaft position Option monitor 5 Position deviation stopping position command current position 4 22 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 1 2 Definition of operation N1 lt Correction mode E ORT command D Control zone n 5 Target stopping o point N2 360 00 11 25 0 11 25 Machine shaft Fig 4 2 1 Table 4 2 2 Item Description N1 Slow speed 1 Motor speed set at slow speed 1 UNO 10 to 13 N2 Slow speed 2 Speed of two times the ORT gain UNO 14 to 17 Cotracaon made After the ORT command is input the speed command is corrected from N1 according to the position feedback signal issued from the shaft encoder Control zone Range of 11 25 to target stopping point There are two patterns in the operation stopping at the target
97. FlInverter 6 Output 10 Torque limiter level 2 P 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f 12 Torque reference 2 13 Torque bias 14 Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed gt Print Fig 2 4 10 2 24 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 4 3 Downloading 1 Connecting Download the program and system definition created in section 2 3 2 to UPAC To download connect the PC with the control PCB of VG7S with the NPAH CNV connection cable Use the connector to connect simply as shown in the figure on the right Open the front cover of VG7S to expose and connect the control PCB as shown in the figure on the right Refer to the section describing the installation method of the option for how to open the front cover Fig 2 4 11 Y Checking the state of UPAC After physically connecting the PC with VG7S via the NPAH CNV cable select Online N Resource Control R to display the control screen on the screen When the communication link is established the Run Nonfatal failure state is displayed in the control screen on the right side of the figure shown below If Stop Nonfatal failure is displayed the 038 UPAC start stop setting is 0 Change to 1 at the keypad panel When the communication link is not established PC is not
98. MEMO 5 59 efesotomasyon com Control Techniq emerson saftronics ac PFI PI lr Pi J VI Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 General Inspection Items 6 2 Battery Change efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 General Inspection Points The UPAC must be regularly inspected to enable it to operate to its maximum performance NCAUTION e Confirm that the unit is used at the rated voltage specified in the VG7S INSTRUCTION MANUAL and USER S MANUAL A fire or malfunction may occur e Confirm that the unit is used under the environmental conditions specified in the VG7S INSTRUCTION MANUAL and USER S MANUAL e Do not use the unit in a hot or humid environment or an environment where it is subjected to dew dust corrosive gas oil organic solvent or serious vibration or impact A fire electric shock or malfunction may occur e Confirm the unit to see if there are foreign substances inside such as dirt wire scraps and iron chips and proper measures are taken to prevent them A fire or malfunction may occur Regularly confirm that the terminal screws and the setscrews are securely tightened A fire or malfunction may occur 6 1 1 Inspection Intervals The UPAC consists mainly of semiconductor elements and is a highly reliable product However the elements may deteriorate depending on the ambient
99. MW 10 52 to Configuration constitution information M W 10 67 M W 10 68 to Configuration error information MW 10 83 M W 10 84 to Not used AMW 10 511 Fig 5 2 7 Values in unused area and unused bit are uncertain and you should not use them 5 9 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Resource operation status MW 10 0 Read only Displays the operation status and the operation mode of the resource UPAC Table 5 2 1 Address Name Description MX 10 0 0 Operating 1 when CPU is operating MX 10 0 1 Stopping 1 when CPU is stopping MX 10 0 2 Major fault 1 when major fault is present in resource MX 10 0 3 Minor fault 1 when minor fault is present in resource MX 10 0 4 Not used MX 10 0 5 Not used MX 10 0 6 Not used MX 10 0 7 Not used MX 10 0 8 Not used MX 10 0 9 Not used MX 10 0 10 Not used MX 10 0 11 Battery less operation mode 1 when battery less operation MX 10 0 12 Not used MX 10 0 13 Not used MX 10 0 14 Not used MX 10 0 15 Not used Battery less operation mode The entire memory is initialized set to initial values or cleared to 0 when the system is turned on Connection to the battery and the voltage are not checked Setting is conducted with the system definition 3 Resource major fault factors MW 10 2 Read only Fault factors
100. No communication error 1 Normal communication 2 A data is written to an unused address of the function code writing to address out of the specified range is defined separately 3 A data is read from an unused address The data will be 0000 4 Writing to the S area while link operation is disabled The data will not be reflected and cause no error 5 A data out of range is written to the S area The data is written after adjusted to the upper or the lower limit 6 Access from another link or the KEYPAD panel occurs during data writing EEPROM other than the S area is accessed 7 Writing to operation data such as tuning or initialization during multiple function codes are being written once through the link The inverter decides that the procedure is canceled and continues the writing 8 Writing to reading from option function codes that are not displayed on the KEYPAD panel 1 to 32 Alarm codes specific to the VG7S Alarm codes specific to models other than communication errors 33 to 70 Not used 71 Checksum error CRC error Checksum value or CRC value does not match Software error 72 Parity error Hardware error Parity does not match 73 Others such as overrun framing Physical reception errors other than above 74 01 Format error Incorrect format Characters requesting transmission are incorrect Characters terminating transmission are not in the specified
101. OFF for stop command E04 X4 function selection EUX x4ruNc 0 63 1 3 No ON on tension ON command E05 X5 function selection BEH X5 FUNC 0 63 1 4 No OFF on emergency stop E06 X6 function selection Qa x6 FUNC 0 63 1 5 No Alarm reset ON on reset E07 X7 function selection X7 FUNC 0 63 1 7 No Mechanical loss automatic measuring E08 X8funclion selection EU xs FUNC 0 63 1 8 No Reset wound diameter E09 X9 function selection BEE x9 FUNC 0 63 1 9 No Coastio stop command E14 Xfunction normally open normally closed EA X NORMAL 0000 01FF 1 0 No E15 __ Y1 function selection EXE v FuNc 0 47 1 1 No _ Abnormal tension E16 _ Y2 function selection BA v2 Func 0 47 1 2 No Completion of mechanical loss measuring E17 Y3 function selection Y3 FUNC 0 47 1 3 No Speedis present E18 Y4 function selection EH Y4 FUNC 0 47 1 4 No Speed detection 1 unused E19 Y5 function selection Y5 FUNC 0 47 1 14 No Inverter error E49 _ Ai1 function selection ES Ai1 FUNC 0 18 1 0 No Detected tension input 0 10V 0 N E50 __ Ai2 function selection Ai2 FUNC 0 18 1 0 No Line speed command 0 10 V 0 m min E51 Ai3 function selection Ai3 FUNC 0 18 1 0 No Unused E52 ___ Aid function selection Ai4 FUNC 0 18 1 0 No Unused E53 Ai gain setting ACAN AT 10 000 to 10 000 mes 0001 1 Yes E E54 Ai2gain setting BZW GAIN A2 10 000 to 10 000 times 0 001 1 Yes E55 Ai3gain setting EI CANN AS 10 0
102. Option monitor 4 line speed U51 Speed limit value U10 Gain U01Max line speed 0r M49 Speed setting 1 Line speed from input at terminal 12 Y f amp Line speed LINE AIG selection Porarity 01 gt Determi gt f I 3 nation C 3 eT O4 U27 Filter time 26 ss A 15 RE constant 0 n Option monitor U49 6 Offset rotation A Reverse constant A Motor speed o3 U50 Operation direction setting Prohibition of change during operation M DRV Individual motor operation U48 Individual motor operation switch DE AE A U47correction ne speed gain selection Winding diameter ratio for determina tion of speed command See page 4 for details FWD o o REV o o M01 Speed setting 4 VG7 side lt gt UPAC side M06 Detected Speed setting 4 Limit gt ASR input UPAC side lt gt VG7 side Fig 4 1 3 Block diagram of UPAC dancer roll control software 1 4 speed See page 4 for details Line speed Windin NOEL diameter rato ere fS D diameter AO3 DIA AO3 seed OM UT3 j ratio Wi
103. Remove the front cover from the VG7S As shown in the figure below remove the front cover from the inverter Note that the removing method is different between applicable inverter models capacities Applicable inverter model capacity Applicable inverter model capacity FRN15VG7S 2 4 15 kW or smaller FRN18 5VG7S 2 4 18 5 kW or larger As shown in Fig 6 2 1 loosen the two screws 1 As shown in Fig 6 2 2 unfasten the a fastening the front cover Remove the front screws b the number of screws cover by holding it at the top depends on the capacity fastening the front cover and remove it 2 Unfasten the two screws c and remove the keypad 3 Unfasten the two screws d and remove the keypad case Keypad Keypad case AS Control printed circuit board Fig 6 2 1 How to remove the front cover Fig 6 2 2 How to remove the front cover FRN15VG7S 2 4 15 kW or smaller FRN18 5VG78 2 4 18 5 kW or larger 6 3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 How to handle the optional UPAC The battery can be replaced with the optional UPAC attached However it is advisable to remove the spacers before replacing the battery as shown in the figure below Spacers OPC VG7 UPAC Control printed circuit board Fig 6 2 3 3 Replacing the battery 1 Disconnect the battery connector from the CN2 and cut the band securing the battery wi
104. SI UPAC INV5 does not have a way to exchange data other than these In addition to UPAC Table 5 2 27 Dos FS BS 5 Remarks ress No Area Name d VELLE Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A more information 15 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f S monitor calculation IW5 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW5 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o 991W5 3 7 5 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 5 16 bit 2 IW5 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W T IW5 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT a IW5 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV5 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai D g terminals for control input Ai IW5 7 16 2 Ai Ai2 of INV5 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as a universal QW5 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW5 9 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW5 10 5 Z i Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW5 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 3 13bit required QW5 12 7 E Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW5 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT z Overwr
105. SX Series SPH instruction FEH200 system definition and other items of volume MICREX SX Series Explanation of basic operation of D300win and programming and monitoring methods of MICREX SX User s manual for MICREX 5 SX Series SPH lt elementary FEH250 volume gt for D300win Series User s manual for MICREX Description of menus and icons of 6 SX Series SPH lt reference FEH254 D300win and explanation of all volume gt for D300win operation methods 1 No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted without the prior permission from the publisher 2 Description in this manual is subject to change for improvement without prior notice 3 Though description in this manual is carefully prepared contact our sales outlet for any uncertainties or errors Microsoft and Windows are registered or mere trademarks of Microsoft Corp ntel 486 and Pentium are registered or mere trademarks of Intel Corp efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Introduction This product is an optional unit for variable speed operation of the three phase induction motor Before using our product read through Safety Precautions for correct operation As well ensure that these Safety Precautions are delivered to the final person in charge of maintenance Safety Precautions Read this manual carefully before installing connecting wiring operating
106. System Definition Sa R UPAC UPAC y Tasks Default DEFAULT e n PROG 1 LADDER 6 Global Variables Fig 1 3 38 Icons for Physical Hardware Control Variables Function List Physical Hardware This node defines the UPAC constitution Use icons under the Physical Hardware node in the project tree in Fig 1 3 38 to define the constitution e Configuration A configuration corresponds to one programmable logic controller system such as a rack e System definition Sets system components in detail e Resources A resource for example corresponds to a CPU that you can insert to the rack 1 39 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 e Tasks Tasks determine the time scheduling of programs that are associated with the tasks e Global variables Declares global variables valid in a resource e Control variables Global variables listed in IQ memory of VG7S e Function variables Global variables listed in MW memory of VG7S Double click the individual icons to display and set dialog boxes if you need The following section describes items required for UPAC 2 PC type and CPU type of UPAC The dialog boxes displayed when you display or insert the properties of the individual icons contain fields for the PC type and the CPU type when needed Set as below according to the har
107. U39 X4 terminal function 0 No assignment X4 NOP USER P39 1 Winding diameter calculation hold D_HOLD 1 0 Note 2 Specify 25 U DI at E04 ui 5 U40 X5 terminal function USER P40 0 No assignment X5 NOP 1 0 Note 2 4 15 E 1 Setthe initial diameter D SET Specify 25 U DI at E05 amp U41 X6 terminal function 0 No assignment X6 NOP o USER P41 itchi indi 1 ids between winding and RW 1 0 Note 2 Specify 25 U DI at E06 4 17 U42 Ai 2 terminal function 0 Noassignment AI2 NOP Taper variable gain 10 1 VDC 100 MPAG 1 Specify 14 U AI at E50 USER P42 Initial diameter ratio 10 VDC 1 Taper variable Note 2 when setting 1 to 3 at 4 9 2 winding diameter ratio 20 times IN AID gain U42 3 Line speed gain 10 VDC 4 folds LINE_AIG U43 AO 1 terminal function 0 No assignment AO1 NOP 1 USER P43 1 Note 2 4 9 1 Taper output 100 10 VDC TP AO1 Taper output Note 2 Specify 30 U AO at E69 U44 AO2 terminal function 0 No assignment AO2 NOP USER P44 Dancer roll position 1 0 Note 2 4 18 Az 100 DC 10V DAN_AO2 Specify 30 U AO at E70 U45 AO3 terminal function 0 No assignment AO3 NOP Winding diameter ratio output E USERTFAS 1 Winding diameter ratio 20 times DIA_AO3 0 Note 2 Specify 30 U AO at E71 ap 10 VDC U46 Correction method PID 0 P I D 1 I USER P46 5 5 5 D 1 pep iP D o 4 11 U47 Correction method offset Im USER P47 0 Off
108. USER P55 0 to 100 100 100 When the dancer roll position is within this setting 4 20 DANDCT turns on Version information 4 7 Note 1 Though the setting range of U01 through U64 is from 32768 to 32767 enter the setting in the above effective setting ranges Note 2 Change the setting during stoppage efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 1 3 2 Other function codes Table 4 1 4 Change Indication on during Effective setting range Remarks LCD screen opera tion Reference 0 Speed setting entered at the keypad panel Speed 0107 is valid 1 0 x During regular operation setting N1 2 Setting input at terminal 12 0 to 10V is Specify 0 at U48 2 at F01 and 1 at Speed setting N1 valid F02 0 Operation command entered at the keypad During maximum speed of winding motor i i Specify 1 at U48 0 at F01 and 0 at Operation Operation Oto 1 panel is effective 1 0 x es y 1 Operation command input at the FWD and REV terminals is valid Specify the motor speed that can achieve 50 to 24000 r m 1 1500 x the maximum line speed U01 with the s minimum winding diameter U02 M1 max speed M1 maximum F03 speed F61 ASR I P gain USER P6 0 1 to 20
109. VG7S the data set at function code UNO 01 as a speed command to control the motor Supplement VG7S can be operated with speed commands given at the keypad panel or data preset to multiple speeds While this is the standard function you cannot use the user area UN0 01 to 64 of the function code to give speed commands Though this is a simple example the user can customize VG7S voluntarily using UPAC 2 4 2 Creating a Program Create a program according to the specification Start D300win and select File F New Project The New Project selection screen opens Select VG7 6 UPAC il D300win Bl x File Edit View Project Build Online Extras Help Li New Project Ctrl N S An eem E eee z Open Project Unzip Project Ctr 0 Save Project As Zip Eroe New Project X Mase Froject Delete Project Xx ee Project Wizard NEW Frame MICREX SX MICREX SX BE Delete Template P5117 P574 Save As Template Import Br T TE 2 Esport TE MICREX S5xX MICREX SX MICREX SX Training lel Save P532 PHIE PHOS BIGSE E p Irt i Pint review SX simulator MEME v7 12 UPAC gt PrintSetup Sample T Print Project Recent File Exit Fig 2 4 1 2 19 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor A prototype project is created under project name Untitled Next select File
110. View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help 8 xl e Setting of activation of WIDTH and OUT for 10s in 20s B2u se s5e8 o e amp ammssxammsSsS e s interval Anan lom le e tome ea Lee noe me d Selection function block Is E Il E e IN1 output upon 1 input G and INO output upon 0 F Speed pattern generator Definition of variables PWM 1 VAR EXTERNAL AUTOINSERT BOOL 1 INV118_SPDREF1 INV118 SPDREFT1 INT INV1 S01 frequency speed TIME 4205 uD1 f command 1 TIME 10S u02_f u01_f INT U01 USER P1 u02_f INT U02 USER P2 ff END_VAR WD LadderLA VAR AUTOINSERT For Help press F1 5232 C gt 2GB 7 PWM 1 PWM END VAR Fig 3 2 2 3 35 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 2 2 Position Control Example Using Pulse train An example of simple position control program in the IL language using a pulse train reference is introduced 3 2 2 1 Specification The specification is determined as shown in the control block diagram below Dynamic switch perci APR Limiting process gain process Control Function Control Control input code command detection command command switch lt 7 A i F ACC DEC zero clear x1 iia Induc Spe
111. XX XX XK XK XK X OoOooOooooocooooooo X X X X X X XX X X X X X X O1 X X X X X X XX X X X X XK X Oo X X X X X xX X O X X X XXON X X X X X X X KX KX KX X X X X C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Oo X X X X X X X X KX X XK X XK X X X X X X X XX X X XK XK XK X X X XXX X X X XK XK XK XK XK X Output selection Option I O output 1 I O Module DO 16 points Communication setting RS485 station No 2 Port COM1 Baudrate 38400 Stop bit 1 Data length 8 Parity Even Timeout 3000 ms Fig 1 3 51 Example of printed system definition 1 49 emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor MFP FLN In l Preparation and Basic Operation Examples Examination of System Individual Operation of UPAC Operation of Multiple Units viaOptical Option OPC VG7 SI Basic Operation Examples efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 1 Examination of System 2 1 1 Application to Small to Medium Systems NCAUTION e UPAC has been developed for small to medium systems driving and controlling maximum about 10 inverters It is not for large systems where several tens of inverters are generalized and controlled When applying UPAC carefully examine the specifications of UPAC and design a system while allowing an extra room in the specifications UPAC has been developed for small to medium systems for from one to abo
112. Yes 4 51 E i 100 Yes U28 Maximum diameter us USER P28 10 2000 2000 mm mm 1 4 51 U29 Limit upper for ATR while stalling EJ USERPz9 0 500 0 50006 Ce 1 300 Yes 4 51 U30 Limit lower for ATR while stalling USERP30 0 500 0 500 9 1 100 Yes 452 U31 Minimum rotation speed USERP31 15 1500 15 1500 min r min 1 Yes 4 52 U32 Unused USERP32 0 U33_ Acceleration detection level USERP33 0 1000 1 20 Yes 452 U34 _ Deceleration detection level USER P34 0 to 1000 1 20 Yes 452 U35 Torque command filter USER P35 0 1000 0 1000 ms ms 1 5 Yes 4 52 U36 GD corresponding to ree kgenr USERP36 0 32767 ed ger 001 vee 453 U37 Speed setting correction USER P37 0 200 0 200 96 9o 1 100 Yes 4 53 uag Active time of dynamicmechanicalloss We userpas 05000 0 5 sec sec 0001 0 ve 453 while operating Active time of dynamic mechanical loss Yes U39 while stalinc USERP39 0 5000 0 5 sec sec 0 001 2000 453 0 50 Yes U40 Deceleration dv dt on emergency stop USER P40 ima miminisec 4 2 453 negative value ia ARE SERIE on torque corector USERP41 0 150 o 150 1 100 Xs 453 corresponding to material 2 ARE SNS torie cocon USERP42 0 150 0 15006 1 100 lis 453 corresponding to reel U43 Unused EZE USER P43 U44 Speed fortuming off ATR EZZ USER P44 0 100 0 1 m min m min 1 125 Yes 4 52 Torque corresponding to dynamic Yes U45 mechanical loss while operating USER P45 0 1500
113. a structure across this boundary IEC expression High performance CPU Standard memory MW 1 0 high speed M 2K words default value MW 1 2047 0 TM 1 2048 Standard memory default value Fig 5 2 3 5 5 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 2 1 3 Retain memory area This area is for auxiliary relays used in UPAC Key point 1 Direct addressing is represented as M03 0 is X W or D Since variable declaration assigns memory to an application program in general programming you do not have to bother the address See MICREX SX Series USER S MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS 1 4 Variables for more information 2 The following table shows the actions on start of cold operation and start of warm operation Note Start of cold operation Start of warm operation Retain memory Clears to 0 Retains previous values Retain memory with Writes initial values Retains previous values initial value specified 3 You can select to clear this area or not when you download a project The action on operation start is cold operation when you select to clear and is warm operation when you select not to clear 4 The size of the retain memory can be changed in cooperation with other memory areas Use CPU Memory size definition in Resource setting dialog box to change the size IEC expression MW 3 0 default value on o 9 Zz o 2
114. address distinction of W INV1 is usually 60ms cycle QW1 36 19 5 5 INV1 function code 2 data individual function INT Data transmission at the QW1 37 20 INV1 function code 3 address code W maximum of 1ms is possible by 9 QW1 38 21 9 INV1 function code 3 data INT defining this 4W area for QW1 39 22 5 8 INV1 function code 4 address W individual function code QW1 40 23 r INV1 function code 4 data INT QW1 41 24 Reserved QW1 42 25 g DO2 DIOB option 10bit of INV1 Data distinction 27 W UPAC controls AO DO of INV1 QW1 43 26 amp AO AO1 of INV1 4000h 10V INT AO DO used by INV1 are QW1 44 27 w AO AO2 of INV1 INT defined as universal 9 QW1 45 28 B AO RO of INV1 INT Note that universal definition is QW1 46 29 Z AO AIO option AO4 of INV1 INT not required for DIOB QW 1 47 30 2 AO AIO option AO5 of INV1 INT QD1 48 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV1 dynamically efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 INV2 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV2 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV2 does not have a way to exchange data other than these
115. applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 25 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 9elWLI 4 5 Real speed 20000 Nmax INT VG7S UPAC Before filter O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 26 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 9elWLIl 2 5 Real speed 20000 Nmax INT VG7S UPAC Before filter D 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 In speed monitoring the speed data real speed detected by the encoder before filtering is referred to The value functions as an estimated speed for operation without sensors 1 How to use Speed detection estimation Motor PG 15V 12V complementary output Standard built in Pot equipment 5 Motor PG z 5V line driver output 2 F bes 0 i E etection an roro 9 oPc ver ec s xaitulation Speed estimation z1 and calculation tO Speed z3 ee OPC VG7 PMPG detection and ro calculation UPAC SW Simdaion mods erus o n Torque reference Machine 2 model Load inertia M1 H51 calculation QA OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Fig Place a check mark at the real speed detected speed value check box in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen Next download the system
116. axl x C Si E Project Ca Libraries CA Data Types a Logical POUs E 8 LADDER f LADDERT LADDERV i LADDER Cip Physical Hardware 0 T 2 3 m x tv 3 o aiseg pue uoleiedaid INV 116_SPDREF 1 LadderLA 1 23 C gt 2GB 7 Fig 2 4 9 Speed setting frequency reference V f only is checked with the I O Group setting in the I O group setting Do not use the All A button to place check marks for all data items 7 UPAC system definition System configration definition CPU operation definition Memory boundary definition 1 0 group setting Communication setting Level DEFAU LT E Input selection Inverter 2 Input option 1 0 Input Inverter 3 Input Inverter 4 Input 1 0 Group setting x Inverter 5 Input Inverter 6 Input Inverter 1 Output word Use Word Name Speed setting 1 frequency reference V 7f 2 Torque reference 1 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference All 5 Control data Cw 6 7 8 m Output selection Universal DO1 standard DIDA option 13bit Acceleration time Inverter 2 Outpu Inverter 3 Output Inverter 4 Output Deceleration time Inverter 5 Output 3 Torque limiter level 1
117. by UPAC at a constant interval the data written from VG S via the keypad panel Or ee communication system RS485 T link etc is OPC VG7 SIUPAC _ _ TT overwritten by UPAC at the next period Fig 3 1 16 Unavailable for 12 unit system After placing a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset to validate the high speed function code data Be careful that the basic usage is different from that of 60ms refreshment 1 How to use Description is given here for the case to overwrite function code F61 ASR1 P gain from UPAC accordin g to the au Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help la x controlling state as an example paara Me zs aee emm o omset nati Heede e emere nw eoe ren I je s For example suppose an application dii where the gain of speed control adu m E CF61 changes in a winding system ane ee WORD 16 0030 INV133_ADRS1 according to the winding diameter S E CNOT EVET Toc INVISA DATA large winding diameter large a E RUFAT UPAG inertia large gain small winding i diameter small inertia small gain roi The figure on the right shows an Ip TERR example where 20 0 data 200 is written from UPAC to F61 data Object marked 25 25 C gt 2GB 4 To reflect the change on VG7S set the AA address 3Dh of function code F61 and data 200d on the worksheet Select the addr
118. can use the 16 bit input of the DIOB when the OPC VG7 DIO card is installed 1 For Encoder of 128 p r to 2048 p r 15141312 0 v 2 1 x 9 E 0 to 12 bit Stop position command 0 to 8192 pulses o S EU o 13 bit Orientation command on 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 14 bit Slow speed direction switching 0 OFF Forward 1 ON Reverse 15 bit Position change command Latch the position command data on a rising edge 2 For 4096 p r encoder 15 14 13 0 m 0 to 13 bit Stop position command 0 to 16383 pulses 14 bit Orientation command ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 15 bit Slow speed direction switching 0 OFF Forward 1 ON Reverse 3 For 8192 p r encoder 15 14 0 m 0 to 14 bit Stop position command 0 to 32767 pulses 15 bit Orientation command ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 4 34 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 7 ORT Stop Operation 4 2 7 1 Power ON sequence The reference position Z phase of your encoder should be recognized when you turn on the power Recognizing the reference position allows stopping at your target position Select either of the following two methods 1 Using Initial Operation of VG7S Just after you turn on power when you set the operation command either FWD or REV and the ORT ON X1 to ON your motor runs at the initial speed and stops at your ta
119. code for optical option Parameter name No Name Keypad panel indication Setting range Description of setting Define the link address of the optical option for the UPAC link Optical option 0 Master address pen alion ee Link address 0 to 255 1 to 11 Slave address 100 Master address broadcasting 101 to 255 Slave address broadcasting Number of slave Link system slave Number of slave inverters connected via optical 036 stations of optical Sy options with the one equipped with UPAC being station 1 to 155 system the master 2 1 How to set 035 No duplication is allowed for function code 035 among all units connected via the optical cables After the number of connected units is determined and the master slave connection sequence is determined a unique number is determined Set the serial number of the connection sequence of the optical cable 0 for master 1 for the next slave 2 for the next slave Table 2 3 5 Setting of function code 038 Function code Setting Function Remarks 0 Master Set for master slave connection The master slave connection state indicates the state where UPAC 1 to 11 Slave 1 to 11 writes or reads data to from each slave inverter 035 100 Mater Set for broadcasting The broadcasting mode is used to write the same data from UPAC 101 to 255 Slave 1 to 155 to all inverters at a high speed Writing to or reading from specific inverters is impossible Note If a value larg
120. control IW4 11 12 Position detection Z phase input 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 8 PG PD cycle IW4 12 13 a S05 Position reference 1 1 INT IW4 13 14 DI DIOB option 16bit of INV4 Data distinction 26 W 1W4 14 15 D w Ai A t of INV4 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW4 15 16 9 9 Ai Ai2 of INV4 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai IW4 16 17 5 Ai AIO option Ai3 of INV4 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as 1W4 17 18 Ai AIO option Ai4 of INV4 4000h 10V INT universal QW4 18 1 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW4 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW4 20 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT Just before torque current i reference filter QW4 21 4 Z Magnetic flux reference 10000 100 INT QW4 22 5 Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW4 23 6 g Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition G 13bit required QW4 24 7 3B Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW4 25 8 5 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW4 26 9 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW4 27 10 ea Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW4 28 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW4 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT x After torque limiter QWA4 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 INT Z
121. cycle Z train synchronized control IW5 10 11 8 Position detection built in or 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 11 12 and 13 are used for c PG PD cycle orientation control IW5 11 12 Position detection Z phase input 1 1 latched at4ms INT 8 PG PD cycle IW5 12 13 i S05 Position reference 1 1 INT IW5 13 14 DI DIOB option 16bit of INV5 Data distinction 26 W 1W5 14 15 D w Ai Ai of INV5 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW5 15 16 9 Ai Ai2 of INVS 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai IW5 16 17 5 Ai AIO option Ai3 of INV5 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as 1W5 17 18 Ai AIO option Ai4 of INV5 4000h 10V INT universal QW5 18 1 Speed setting 1 Frequency 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed reference during V f reference QW5 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW5 20 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT Just before torque current 2 reference filter QW5 21 4 Z Magnetic flux reference 10000 100 INT QW5 22 5 Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW5 23 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition c 13bit required QW5 24 7 y Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW5 25 8 5 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW5 26 9 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW5 27 10 Q Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW5 28 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference
122. description in section 2 2 Individual Operation of UPAC Read section 2 2 first 2 3 1 Preparation CAUTION After finishing installation wiring and switch setting inspect the following items before turning the inverter on e Check for wiring errors Check for remaining cable dust screws and so on Check if screws and terminals are tight Check if element wires at the crimp terminals make contact with another terminal Check if SW1 and SW2 settings are correct 0 T oO to E m x E 3 oO 2 aiseg pue uoleiedaid The following preparation confirmation and setting are necessary 1 Turn the main power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 or auxiliary power supply RO TO on 2 Confirm that the optical option is recognized and check the ROM version 3 Set the function codes Refer to Chapter 3 Operation Preparation and Test Operation in the User s Manual of the main body for operation preparation of the main body of VG7S 1 Power on CAUTION e If operation is started without turning even one unit on in the UPAC system an inverter to inverter link error Erb is caused Because optical communication is not compatible with fail soft operation turn on all the units linked via optical cables Power on sequence The master and slave units may not be turned on simultaneously As well there is no definite power on sequence However all the units linked via optica
123. drive servo motor L04 L05 L06 L07 L08 L09 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed updating Name I04 f UINT MW11 514 0904h S curve setting Fixed S curve pattern D oer ur frames sie foson Scurve seting ioe ur frames se osoen Scurve seting oor fuir pari sts osoon curve setings 10 1 UINT 96MW 11 520 090Ah S curve set MW 11 525 090Fh Adjustment for manufacturer Table 5 2 46 U User Functions F code U01 U02 U03 u04 U05 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25 U26 U27 U28 U29 U30 U31 U32 U33 U34 U35 U36 U37 U38 U39 U40 60 ms updating and n referencing data High speed Variabl updating Name name or wr pawvrssr osom USERPT uz wr wwwrrssz foson Jus u03 1 T MW 11 533 OBO3h USER P3 INT Mw11 534 oB04h USER P4 INT Mw11 535 0BO5h USER P5 INT vs Mw 11 536 OBO6h USER P6 INT Mw11 537 OBO7h USER P7 T 9Mw11 538 OBO8h USER P8 INT Mw11 539 oBo9h USER P9 INT Mw11 540 OBOAh USER P10 oe f u08 ut o ut u13 1 T 960MW 11 543 OBODh USER P13 ur wr perse oser usen pia ist mr peris oeorm usen pis et mr perse fosron usen eis ut wr parcs eri usere
124. during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 32 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written F code Variabi updating Name Setting range Type by name F17 Yes Fig Yes Starting speed 0 0 to 30 0s F22 22 1 UINT MW11 22 0016h Braking time 0 0 Inactive 2 Yes 0 1 to 30 0 s 0 0 to 150 0 r min F23 23 UINT 99MW 11 23 0017h Starting speed The frequency is limited so as not to fall below 0 1 Hz 2 Yes sensorless or under V f control F26 f26f UINT Mw1126 001Ah Motor sound 0 75 to 7 to 15 kHz 10 Yes carrier frequency t pd p 7 0to 1 F36 36 1 UINT MW11 36 0024h 30RY operation mode 0 Excitation upon alarm 43 Yes 1 Excitation during regular operation E Stopping speed setting 0 0 to 10 0 to 150 0 r min F37 37 1 UINT MW11 37 0025h Stoppi d The frequency is limited so as not to fall below 0 1 Hz Yes pping spee sensorless or under V f control Oto 1 Stopping speed 0 Detected speed 38 38 UINT MW11 38 0026h detection method 1 Commanded speed Yes However the setting is fixed at 1 under V f control zero speed holding time 0to3 E Toque limit setting 0 Torque limit invalid F40 UINT MW11 40 0028h Ti Hn 1 Torque limit Yes Torque limit mode
125. e To remove the system definition error delete tasks that have priorities other than default 0 or The priority of task Fixed 3 level cannot be used NINE x Please use either DEFAULT 0 level level 1 or change the priorities Fig 1 3 42 Error message when you open a System definition with invalid task setting W System definition 1 Starting system definition When you double click the System Definition icon in the project tree the UPAC system definition screen appears Project Tree Window I system definition Memory boundary definition 1 0 group setting Communication setting Project System configration definition CPU operation definition Libraries CA Data Types Inverter Logical POUs H LADDER LADDERT LADDERV E LADDER Sq Physical Hardware 3 3 C V87 6 VG7 E Double click System Definition Eg R_UPAC UPAC zm Tasks amp Default DEFAULT Tact cycle PROG 1 LADDER Global Variables B Bom 3 Control Variables pum Function List Setting 3 0ms z Number of Inverters 6 HOLD mode HOLD mode change Inverter 2 2 Reset mode Inverter 3 3 Reset mode Inverter 4 4 Reset mode 5 6 7 Inverter 5 Reset mode Inverter 6 Reset mode Option 1 0 Reset mode Link type between inverters Optical link C Simple R5485 link Initialization method selection
126. f UINT MW11 140 012Ch 0 000 to 0 100 to 1 000 s 4 Yes off delay timer 0 to 21 Units digit speed disagreement alarm Er9 0 Not used s 1 Used E45 e45 UINT MW 11 141 012Dh Speed disagreement alarm Tenth digit Lin phase lack detection Yes 0 No DCR level 1 DCR level 2 For manufacturer Do not specify Torque magnetic flux o E46 least UINT Mw11 142 012Eh detection level setting es 2 2 ps h mrt 16 Yes Torque detection level 1 A CUACA vare during CORTO E47 e47 MW11 143 D12Fh Torque detection level 2 ae d E dunn Vi oniri Yes E48 MW11 144 0130h Magnetic flux detection level 10 to 100 Yes 0 to 18 0 Input signal shutoff OFF 1 Auxiliary speed setting 1 AUX N1 10V Nmax 2 Auxiliary speed setting 2 AUX N2 10V tNmax 3 Torque limit level 1 TL REF 1 10V 4150 4 Torque limit level 2 TL REF2 10V 4150 5 Torque bias TB REF 10V 150 6 Torque command T REF 10V 150 7 Torque current command IT REF 10V 150 8 Creep speed 1 in UP DOWN control Ai terminal function CRP N1 10V Nmax E49 e49 f UINT eMW11 145 0191h Ai1 terminal function Creep speed 2 in UP DOWN contro 59 Yes CRP N2 10V Nmax Magnetic flux command MF REF 10V 100 gt Line speed detection LINE N 10V Nmax a 9 Motor temperature M TMP 10V 200 C 4 y Speed override N OR 10V 50 9 Universal Ai U Al 10V 4000 h Q E PID feedback value PID FB 10V 20000 d 5 PID r
127. f UINT MW11 668 Impossible Option monitor 4 0 to 65535 0 Impossible M59 m59 f INT 99MW 11 669 Impossible Option monitor 5 32768 to 32767 5 Impossible M60 m60 f INT 99MW 11 670 Impossible Option monitor 6 32768 to 32767 5 Impossible 3 22 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 4 6 Displaying data at keypad panel The data of UPAC can be displayed at the 7 segment LED red 4 digit LED display at real time using six points option monitor 1 to 6 Select one setting method from op1 to op6 in the function list of global variables Variable list of Resource C_VG7_6 R_UPAC tion monitor 1 op 1 Option monitor 1 op 2 Option monitor 2 z op 3 Option monitor 3 Properties op 4 Option monitor 4 op 5 Option monitor 5 Help op B Option monitor 6 p 1 f POT M1 control method p02_f P02 M1 motor parameters setting M1 motor selection p 3 f PO3 M1 motor parameters setting M1 rated capacity p04 P04 M1 motor parameters setting MI rated current Fig 3 1 34 As shown in the figure on the right ii D300win SPEED_CONTROL Ladder LADDER connect store the speed data user IH Eie Edit View Project Buld Objects Layout Onine Extras Window Help igi xj variable with option monitor 5 on the Daua xrxeo aammsiamms ece worksheet to display the data 855 amp lan 63 3
128. front cover reverse the removal procedure to reinstall the front cover Control PCB d Fig 1 2 11 Option installation method Fig 1 2 12 Option installation method Installation to CN2 Installation to CN3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao Sz am 5 a 3 1 2 2 7 Confirmation and setting procedures 1 Confirmation connection and setting of optical option Perform the following setting and connection 1 Set the rotary switch SW1 on the optical option Master 0 each slave 1 2 Check the setting of DIP switch SW2 SW 2 1 SW 2 2 ON ON fixed 3 Connect the optical cable attached to the optical option 5 meter long one cable attached to each optical option 2 Switch setting CAUTION e If the settings of the switches SW 1 and SW 2 on the optical option are wrong the UPAC system does not operate correctly Read the following description about the setting carefully and set correctly e Turn the power control power off before changing the switch setting If the switch setting is changed with the power ON turn the power off then on again to reset Table 1 2 10 Switch on card SW1 SW1 Part No setting Function Remarks Define the inverter on which UPAC is installed to be the master 0 BEST If 0 is set for an inverter without UPAC operation pro
129. information OFF OFF None ON OFF Normal operating or stopping ON ON Minor fault operating or stopping OFF ON Major fault stopping Table 5 2 15 Address Name Description MX 10 50 0 UPAC configuration 1 when resource operation status is normal or minor fault 96 MX 10 50 1 Not used 96MX 10 50 2 Not used MX 10 50 3 Not used 96MX 10 50 4 Not used MX 10 50 5 Not used 96MX 10 50 6 Not used 96MX 10 50 7 Not used 96MX 10 50 8 to Not used MX 10 50 15 16 Resource abnormality information MW 10 51 Table 5 2 16 Address Name Description MX 10 51 0 UPAC abnormality 1 when resource operation status is major fault or minor fault 96MX 10 51 1 Not used 96MX 10 51 2 Not used 96MX 10 51 3 Not used 96MX 10 51 4 Not used MX 10 51 5 Not used MX 10 51 6 Not used MX 10 51 7 Not used MX 10 51 8 to Not used MX 10 51 15 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 2 2 Input output Address Assignment 5 2 2 1 Address assignment rules Input output addresses are assigned following the rules below in UPAC Dot Dot sess Cars Inverter number 1 to 6 or 1 to 12 Optional I O is from 7 or 13 Input IX bit YlW word 9elD double word Output QX bit QW word QD double word Fig 5 2 8 5 2 2 2 Assigning input output address to application program Input outp
130. input at Ail V 10 V 2 Other than above 1 Taper variable U08 taper variable The output voltage at AO1 is smaller as the taper variable is larger Line speed offset Setting 1 000 to 1 000 1 000 to 1 000 mV Line speed gain Setting 0 to 10 000 0 to 10 000 Multiplication Use this function to correct the line speed input across 12 and 11 to the 10 V line speed specification Example When 0 5 V is obtained at the 0 line speed and 7 5 V is obtained at the maximum line speed U09 line speed offset 500 Correction of 0 5 V U10 line speed gain 10 7 5 0 5 x 1 000 1 429 1 429 times UU t 1 x Q Qa o fe gt E o c 5 Middle winding diameter DM Setting 0 to 2 000 0 to 2 000 m min U12 APR Pc DS Setting 0 to 10 000 0 000 to 10 000 Multiplication APR Pc DM Setting 0 to 10 000 0 000 to 10 000 Multiplication APR Pc DL Setting 0 to 10 000 0 000 to 10 000 Multiplication APR Pc DS Setting 0 to 10 000 0 000 to 10 000 Multiplication APR Pc DM Setting 0 to 10 000 0 000 to 10 000 Multiplication c E c U17 APR Pc DL Setting 0 to 10 000 0 000 to 10 000 Multiplication Concerning APR P With the APR Auto Position Regulator P term the deviation of the dancer roll position input multiplied by the setting is output The gain Pc at the constant line speed and the gain Pad during acceleration
131. is illegal operation procedure alarm Er6 or inverter to inverter link error Erb gives a warning e After changing 035 or 036 turn the power off then on again to reflect the new setting 1 Operation on 038 Set function code 038 on the master side inverter with UPAC 038 cannot be set on the slave side The UPAC SI system does not function if 038 is set at 0 If this happens each inverter operates on the individual operation command and speed command Table 2 3 3 Active inactive UPAC SI system operation Master UPAC SI link 038 system Outline of operation The communication link continues but various command data is not 0 Inactive reflected at the inverters connected via the optical cable if there is no trouble in communication The communication link is established and various commands and monitor 1 2 Active data are reflected at the inverters connected via the optical cable if there is no trouble in communication 2 16 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 Address setting rule e The 035 setting specifies between broadcasting and master slave communication The setting must be given at all units e Set the number of slave units at 036 Subtract one from the number of all units to obtain the number of slave units The setting must be given at all units Table 2 3 4 Special function
132. link option SI UPAC INV4 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 20 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type 3 See control block diagram a for more information IW4 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation IW4 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW4 2 3 m Torque current reference final 10000 100 INT Just before torque current 2 reference filter IW4 3 4 Magnetic flux reference final 10000 100 INT 991W4 4 5 2 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT IW4 5 6 E Tebi data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W o i IW4 6 T B Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W 9591W4A 7 8 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT g Before multistep speed during V f a reference IW4 8 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW4 9 10 5 Pulse train position reference 1 1 latched at 4ms INT x 10 and 11 are used for pulse E PG PR cycle Z train synchronized control IW4 10 11 8 Position detection built in or 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 11 12 and 13 are used for c PG PD cycle orientation
133. main control 0000 to FFFF M26 f umr MW11 636 Unavailable Transmission error code 0 to 65535 24000 to 24000 r min M27 1 MW 11 637 Unavailable Speed setting on alarm data Nmax 20000 M28 m28_1 MW 11 638 e Torque command on alarm 0 0196 1d M29 m29 MW11 639 ae current command on o 01 1d M30 m30f UINT Mw11 640 Unavai agne Aik commando 0 01 1d M31 m3t_f JUINT Mw11 641 Unavailable Output frequency command o 41Hz 4g on alarm LE You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions e Latest alarm 0 to 47 e Alarm before previous one 0 to 47 io ex m m o o lo m lt E o o 3 m ex iom nom non m ex Unavai m Unavai m oic e e No m ex m ex No wo w NIN ol o wo z o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed F code updating name 24000 to 24000 r min 9 M32 d NT MW 11 642 Unavailable Detected speed on alarm data Nmax 20000 M33 E MW 11 643 Calculated torque on alarm 0 01 1d M34 9 MWA1 644 RE torque current on o 549 14 M35 M36 m36 UINT MW11 646 Unavailable Motor output on alarm 0 1kW 1d No M37 ft JUINT Mw11 647 ih 0 1A 1d No Effective output voltage
134. multiple resources in one initi x UPAC system definition E configuration AS When you try to open the system definition in a Two or more resources in this configuration project with multiple resources you will get the Please adjust the resource to one following error message and cannot conduct the system definition Delete unnecessary resources to remove the error in the system definition Fig 1 3 40 Error message displayed when you open system definition with multiple resources 1 40 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup W Registering task and program If you run a program you should insert a task and associate the program with the task or determine on which task you run the program Though inserting a task and associating a program with the task is the same as that in the standard procedure the setting range is different in UPAC You can select 0 to 3 in the Priority field in the Task setting dialog box in the following figure but UPAC can execute only 0 or 1 Name of task Fixed Task type FIXED CYCLE C ancel Event varable Help Cyclic 3 ms Priority e When you try to open a system definition of a project including tasks with priority 2 or 3 you will get an error message in Fig 1 3 42 and you will not be able to conduct the system definition Fig 1 3 41 Task setting dialog box UPAC system definition
135. of System and Startup Project Tree Window Libraries Data Types Logical POUs a LADDER i LADDERT LADDERV E LADDER 3 Physical Hardware m3 C va 5 VG7 6 BIB System Definition Sa R UPAC UPAC 3 6 Tasks Default DEFAULT e 0 PROG 1 LADDER 6 T e ED Global_Variables Control Variables Function List Fig 1 3 37 Project Untitled including program LADDER and its worksheets 4 A new project named Untitled is created and the project tree to the left appears Libraries Register a project used as a library No libraries are registered in the template of UPAC Data Types Declare user defined data types in addition to basic data types defined in IEC1131 3 No user defined data types are registered in the template of UPAC Logical POUs The project Untitled includes one POU a program LADDER as default There are three worksheets Description worksheet for POU document optional LADDERT e Variable worksheet for declaring variables and FB instances LADDERV e Code body worksheet for defining code body LADDER You can change some of the properties of this program The default language for the first program inserted automatically is LD and you cannot change it If you need a program in other language insert a new POU a Physical Hardware C_VG7_6 VG7_6 BIB
136. of UPAC is sufficient to control this type of a small tension control system Winding side Feeding side Line speed detection Tension pickup FRENIC5000 7 E Tension command Fig 2 1 1 2 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Application to medium system The figure shown below indicates a schematic drawing of multiple VG7S units linked via the SI optical link option to form a small driving control group which are generalized and controlled together with other driving control groups by a host PLC or computer working as a system controller Digital commands issued by the PLC are sent to each inverter while commands issued by UPAC are sent to each VG7S unit in the driving control group via the SI optical link option At this time the generalizing and controlling PLC or computer sends operation commands and initial settings to each driving control group while receiving monitor data from each group UPAC functions as a master station in each control group and sends various commands for driving the motor via a high speed optical link that is superior in noise immunity A distributed control system can be configured in this way where the host and subordinate units play clearly divided roles 0 T 2 3 m x tv 3 o aiseg pue uoleiedaid Driving control group n Driving control group 2 Driving control group 1 3 ITOR F
137. on 04V 1d M38 m38_1 UINT 96MW11 648 Unavailable alarm 2 No M39 m39 WORD 96MW 11 649 Unavailable Operation command on alarm 0000 to FFFF No M40 M41 M42 MW 11 652 Unavaila arm M43 f uT Mw11 653 pcc MEN UIT KA M44 X EN MW 11 654 tes temperature 406 44 a M45 MW11 655 Unavailal a sink temperature SE ET M46 UINT MW11 656 Main circuit capacitor life 0 to 100 M47 f UINT MW11 657 PCB capacitor life 0 to 65535 h o M48 uNr XMW11 658 Cooling fan life 0 to 65535 h El mao mo a Sas command datayNmax20000 LEER calculation MSS meer wonp amW11 665 Unavailable oon monitor foor o fo MSG meer WORD pewwireos unavarebe optonmontorz foor fo Mer mery umr pemwirser Unavaiebe Option monitors owes L9 Mee meer UINT pemwirees Unavalabe Option monitora owes L9 M59 E MW11 669 Option monitor 5 32768 to 32767 M60 E MW11 670 Option monitor 6 32768 to 32767 LE You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Burwwei6oig 9VdN 5 50 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 2 3 4 Data format list Execution by code
138. order 75 01 Command error Codes other than the specified commands are transmitted 76 07 Link priority error 1 Writing to the S area through RS485 while a link option is installed 2 Writing to the S area through a link with lower priority while multiple link options are installed TE 07 No right to write function code data Not used for VG7S 78 02 Function code error 1 Access to a data out of the address range of the function codes such as access to a data over F80 2 Writing data over 16 words 79 07 Error on writing to write disabled data 1 Write disabled function codes Read only data or the M area 2 Function codes write disabled during operation 3 Writing through the link to data out of the S area in write disabled through link mode Note that FOO or Write enable for KEYPAD cannot protect from writing through the link 4 Function codes that cannot be written through the link link function codes H31 to 40 05x o6x and 08x 5 Writing to M1 function code P area when motor parameters are protected 6 Writing through the link in the copy mode operation of the KEYPAD panel 80 03 Data error Written data is out of the setting range in the area other than the S area 81 07 Error during writing Another writing request comes from the same source while writing function code data EEPROM other than the S area is accessed
139. product make sure of the following items 1 Check if the product is what you have ordered 2 Check if the product is free from damage 3 Check if all the accessories spacers screws and battery The battery is connected to the product are delivered NCAUTION e The product may be broken due to inadequate work during installation or removal Before installing or removing the option turn the inverter off and check that the CHARGE lamp is unlit Even if all the main circuit control and auxiliary power supply of the inverter are turned off control terminals 30A 30B 30C Y5A and Y5C of the inverter are live when the external control circuit is powered by another power supply e Turn the external power supply off to avoid electric shock 2 Outline of installation To install open the front cover and tighten screws Refer to the next page and thereafter for details Control PCB Connector Connector With the main body rated at 18 5 kW or above Fig 1 2 3 Remove the front cover install the option then install the cover efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 3 How to remove the front cover Remove the front cover from the main body as shown in the figure below Be careful that the removal method varies according to the applicable inverter model capacity Applicable inverter model ca
140. r to 2048 p r encoder 15141312 0 0 to 12 bit Stop position command 0 to 8191 pulses 13 bit Orientation command ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 14 bit Slow speed direction switching O OFF Forward 1 ON Reverse 15 bit Position change command Latch the position command data on a rising edge 2 For 4096 p r encoder 15 14 13 0 m 0 to 13 bit Stop position command 0 to 16383 pulses 14 bit Orientation command ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 15 bit Slow speed direction switching 0 OFF Forward 1 ON Reverse 3 For 8192 p r encoder 15 14 0 a 0 to 14 bit Stop position command 0 to 32767 pulses 15 bit Orientation command ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 4 33 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Using General Input Use general input when you use the general control terminals X1 to X3 to provide a control command You can use the function code S06 Operation command 1 to use X1 X2 and X3 as S05 Orientation position command when the access is over the communication system MICREX or PC When you enter control commands in both S05 and S06 they are ORed 15 54 32 10 2 bit X1 Orientation command on 0 OFF OFF 1 ON ON 3 bit X2 Slow speed direction switching 0 OFF Forward 1 ON Reverse 4 bit X3 Position change command Latch the position command data on a rising edge 3 Using DIO Card You
141. refer to Fig b Fig a Fig b Direction Direction A Synchro e Inverter Inverter Direction B unit unit Direction A Synchro H f transmitter transmitter OPC VG7 SN be TEE OPC VG7 SN MCA VG7 SN MCA VG7 SN Direction A indicates the speed Direction B indicates the speed boosting position boosting position Fig 4 1 1 2 Block diagram of MCA OPC VG7 SN Auxiliary potential input position voltage signal input 50 60Hz Synchronization and rectification Synchro transmitter Block diagram Fig 4 1 2 4 3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Control Block Diagram U05 U06 Dancer roll position voltage Y AO2 DAN AO2 Dancer roll position Option monitor 5 Dancer roll position See page 2 for details of P I D U32 APR output limit Ail offset I Dancer roll position gain ATT API gt Limit re gt A V input calculation A High Us 2 i selector N Dead zone width fo ole i APRIZH ea APR output U30 Bias correction WRW Dancer roll pria zero hold Virdngfeeding gt IN J position detection i D Winding diameter ratio for 1 1 i determination of speed U55 Dancer roll position detection U46 PID selection command See page 4 for line speed Line speed uoo offset
142. roll position is output at AO2 These settings are used for indication of the dancer roll position at an instrument The output is 10 VDC for dancer a roll position of 100 Assign the dancer roll position DAN AO2 to AO2 in the following settings U44 1 E70 30 U AO o1eMyOS poBeyxoed AO3 terminal function Setting 0 1 AO3 terminal function Setting 0 to 31 E71 Winding diameter ratio output The calculated current winding diameter ratio is output at AO3 The output is 10 VDC when the winding diameter ratio is 20 times Assign the winding diameter ratio output DIA AO3 to AO3 in the following settings U45 1 E71 30 U AO 4 18 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software Select the correction method for a tight dancer roll during stoppage of the line U49 0 Reverse rotation in the line direction is valid When the dancer roll is at position A in a tight state as shown in the figure below the winding motor is reversed in the line direction to return the dancer roll to the center Line direction _ gt N Rotates A B Fig 4 1 20 U49 1 Prohibit reverse rotation in line direction If the dancer roll is at position A in a tight state as shown in the figure below rotation of the winding motor is limited Use this function to limit the rotation in the loosening direction such as for metallic materials Line direction Failure to rotate
143. satisfies the rating dew or icing is caused in a site subject to large temperature changes Avoid such sites 1 Do not place the option on the floor Place it on a table or in a shelf 2 To store in an adverse atmosphere wrap the option in a vinyl sheet packing polyethylene film or the like 3 If there is danger of humidify effects place a drying agent silica gel etc inside before packing in the procedure specified in 2 X Storage in extended period The storage method for storing the option for a long time after purchasing varies substantially according to the environment of the storage site Clarify the concrete environmental specification and contact your dealer or nearest Fuji Electric s sales outlet to obtain advice for assured storage methods Generally observe the following precautions 1 Satisfy the requirements for temporary storage 2 Carefully pack to avoid intrusion of moisture or the like Place a drying agent silica gel etc in the package The amount of the drying agent may comply with JIS Z 0301 Method of moisture proof packaging The target relative humidity inside the package is 70 When leaving this option in the inverter installed to a unit or control panel especially at a site under construction the equipment is often exposed to moisture and dust If this is the case remove the option together with the inverter and store in preferable environment described in the inverter operation man
144. setting USERP11 10 2000 0 2000 mm mm 1 Yes 449 U12 Coil diameter minimum diameter m USER P12 100 2000 doin mm 1 100 Yes 4 50 U13 Maximum tension F B range120kgf NEN USERP13 o 14700 _ 0 1470 N N 1 Yes 450 Speed reduction ratio Yes Ut4 hotorfmachinex 100 USERP14 0 10000 0 100 00 001 4 50 U15 Maximum tension setting range E UsERP15 0 14700 0 1470 N N 1 Yes 4 50 U16 _ Unused WX usERP 6 000 4 50 U17 ATR CON P gain USERP17 0 40000 fine times 0001 6000 Yes 451 U18 ATR CON lime MERE USERP18 o 10000 0 10000 ec sec 001 400 Yes 451 U19 ATR CON D time REX USERP19 0 10000 0 10 000 sec sec 0 01 1 Yes 4 51 U20 ATR CON Limit upper BREDA USER P20 30010 300 300 to 300 99 1 100 Yes 451 UU U21 ATR CON Limit lower BREEAM USERP21 30010 300 300 to 300 1 100 Yes 4 51 E ATR CON accelerating decelerating line 0 Yes x U22 P gain USERP22 0 10000 4000 imes mes 0 001 6000 451 ATR No 1 P gain E ATR CON accelerating decelerating line Yes Q U23 lime RUPES USERP23 0 10000 0 100 00 sec seo 001 400 4 51 ao ATR_No 1 Itime Q ATR CON accelerating decelerating line Yes U24 D time USERP24 0 10000 0 10000 sec sec 001 1 4 51 S ATR No 1 D time a U25 ATR No 1 Limit upper EJ UsER P25 300 to 300 300 to 300 1 0 Yes 4 51 U26 ATR No 1 Limit lower EZA USER P26 30010 300 300 to 300 95 1 0 Yes 4 51 U27 Line speed USER P27 0 20000 0 2000 m min m min 1
145. simulator function is installed through custom installation Sample The D300win Help icon is the icon for displaying the basic help of D300win offline mode help The table of contents of help topics is displayed Cautionary items for operation of D300win are described in the text opened through double clicking of the left mouse button on the Notes on use of D300win icon Read through the description before starting D300win Notes on use of D300win f a Use the D300win Setup icon to add or delete option programs to from D300win or to start the setup program for uninstalling the D300win system D300win Setup 2 Starting from shortcut icon You can create a short cut of the D300win program icon with which D300win is started Do not create the shortcut icon in methods other than that described below The short cut icon creation method is described below 1 Click the right mouse button on the Start button of Windows Click the right mouse button Explore Find Fig 1 3 32 2 Select the Open O command The Start menu folder is displayed 3 Double click the left mouse button on the Programs folder icon in the Start menu folder 4 Double click the left mouse button on the D300win folder icon in the Programs folder 5 Click the right mouse button on the D300win starting icon and select the Create Shortcut S command from the shortcut menu Open SendTo
146. single unit i link card OPC VG7 SI control per each option For wiring length longer than 5 m contact us DIO expansion card OPC VG7 DIO For expansion of DI DO 16 10 Expand for I O Digital card AIO expansion card OPC VG7 AIO For expansion of AI AO 2 2 Expand for I O For 8 bit bus R Use the expansion card when the RS485 expansion en heap card OPC VG7 RS For connection of POD built in RS485 terminal is occupied for another application When sharing the purpose with for T link VE card For connection with MICREX example an external PLC for general OPC VG7 TL PLC control and UPAC for driving control High speed counter PG expansion card Position command and position Expand when necessary OPC VG7 PG detection D300win system software NP4H SEDV2 For Windows For Windows Syst k md S Programming tool While the inverter support loader is UPAC Upgrade provided with charge the UPAC 7 Upgrade only is provided without charge Software for tension control WPS VG7 TEN Application Software for dancer Package software group package software control WPS VG7 DAN operating on UPAC Software for position control WPS VG7 POS 2m use marketed RS 232C cable Cable Loader cable For downloading and for additional length NP4H CNV monitoring On NPH4 CNV side D subminiature 9 pin female connector Limitations for installation of UPAC and SI options There are limitations for simultaneous installation as shown in the table b
147. switched to speed control The HLR zero clear function is recommended to reset the output data of the acceleration deceleration calculator to zero 3 31 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 6 3 Data format When the corresponding bit of the data in the following data format is 0 the data is valid and when the bit is 1 the data is invalid 1 Lower 16 bits of 32 bits DSW 15 8 7 SaaS ee Ly 2 Upper 16 bits of 32 bits DSW 31 24 23 1 2 3 NOOO A co 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RE N O N OQ OC EN WE Se Mec MEE MEM Mame NEA UT No No No No No No No No No No 10 No 11 No 12 No 13 No 14 No 15 No 6 unit system 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 2 Torque reference 1 No No No No No 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference No 5 Control data No No 6 Universal DO1 No No 7 Acceleration time No No 8 Deceleration time No No 9 Torque limiter level 1 No No 10 Torque limiter level 2 No No 11 Speed setting 4 frequency No reference No 12 Torque reference 2 No 13 Torque bias 7 No 14 Auxiliary speed setting No 15 Actual speed simulation No 16 Address function code 1 of INV1 6 unit system 17 Data of function code 1 of INV1 18 Address of function code 2 of INV1 19 Data of function cod
148. than half of all buttons are set to OFF then all buttons are set to ON at once or otherwise set to OFF at once 1 45 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 Communication setting F UPAC system definition fe Zi eno F LAG S ent Fig 1 3 49 Communication setting screen 1 46 TT x o 3 Ss 28 ao T7 E o lt a A 7 3 The fifth property page of the UPAC system definition screen Sets the UPAC station number on RS485 in the range from 1 to 255 In addition to this the setting in the Communication setting dialog box displayed when you click the Communication setting button in the Resource setting dialog box is displayed Make sure to conform to the set value of 040 UPAC address of VG7 The factory setting of 040 is 100 If the change is not necessary you can use the setting for RS485 station No of 100 on the screen to connect At H34 set the same communication baud rate as the one shown on the left screen efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup W Printing UPAC system definition UPAC system definition Reset mode Reset mode Reset mode Reset mode Reset mode Reset mode Fig 1 3 50 Printing system definition n s 1 47 You use the Properties of printer screen displayed when you click the Print P button on the proper
149. the T Link I F card 4 57 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 ATR Tension Feedback Control Pe DCO0 10V Ait ATR control ATR Tension pickup value I Maximum tension feedback U13 0 to 14700 0 to 1470 N unm range setting Set a value in N when Ai1 i i input is 10V 0 to 10000 0 to 10 000 times i P gain U17 0 to 10000 0 to 100 00 sec time U18 f While line is em 0 to 10000 0 to 10 000 sec at constant D time U1 i speed Upper limit Erg 200 2 2007300 to 301 value I Lower limit 300 to 300 300 to 300 U21 value i P gain U22 EE time U23 2 accelerating D time U24 O to 10000 0 to 10 000 sec f 3 decelerating m Upper limit 300 to 300 300 to 300 U25 g value Ei Lower limit 300 to 300 300 to 300 E U26 value Upper limit value 300 to 300 300 to 300 U29 while stalling 1 Lower limit value while 300 to 300 300 to 300 U30 stalling I 0 100 0 1 m ATR OFF speed U44 ATR OFF delay timer U56 ATR ON delay timer U58 0 to 100 0 to 100 N ATR dead zone width U61 Tension feedback filter 0 to 5000 0 to 5 sec gt U48 I setting a E a a a NS 4 58 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 6 Acceleration Deceleration Compensation Torque Calculation Block Tac i Calculation for Accelerati
150. the VG7S control board and simple checkup of control functions However data exchange between VG7S and UPAC takes 1 ms at the minimum so that functions requiring controlling operation within 1 ms cannot be installed Make sure that simulation cannot be used for verification of control performance within 1 ms i15V 12V i 5V line driver output Motor PG F Motor PG complementary output OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Simulation speed le Speed detection Standard built in P01 8 Speed detection 0 Lo Speed A OPC VG7 PG D LY and calculation Speed assumption 1 and calculation Speed detection 73 CRON SERMES and calculation O UPAC SW Commanded OFF i torque gt Machine I model Load inertia M1 H51 calculation al 1 How to use Place a check mark at the real speed simulation speed check box in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System_Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen Next download the system definition and reset Set POI at 2 The speed setting data is converted into a scale where the maximum speed is 20000 Data x maximum speed 20000 Example When 3000 is written at the maximum speed setting of 1500 r min 3000 x 1500 20000 225 r min Fig 3 1 44 1 0 Group setting In
151. this alarm is displayed change the battery soon For the battery replacement method refer to the corresponding part of this manual If noise or vibration occurs due to resonance in the mechanical system or play in the gear the mechanical system must be examined and adjusted If the noise is not reduced after adjustment of the mechanical system electrical countermeasures must be taken so that the standard functions of VG7 gain and integration time of orientation control filter and other parameters are used for adjustment Please note that we will not meet requests to add special control applications to UPAC or to the main body of VG7 4 Reproduction of the whole or a part of the program or leasing or selling to the third party is prohibited in the scope of the Japanese Copyright Law 5 There are no limitations to voluntary addition change or deletion by the customer for program development based on this dancer control program We will provide cooperation and consultation for technical support concerning program development 6 We will assume no responsibility for the direct or indirect material losses or damage caused by the WPS VG7 POS program itself or change addition or deletion to the program 3 I agree with the above description Signature 4 21 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 2 1 Examination of System 4 2 1 1 Specification Table 4 2 1
152. to 10V line speed voltage across U10 Line speed gain USERP10 10000 0 000 t0 10 000 Fio 1 Multiplication 12 and 11 if itis not 0 to 10V U11 Middle winding diameter DM USER P11 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 mm mm 1 880 880 mm o 4 Oto 0 000 to 10 000 Multipli 100 0 100 Gain at minimum winding diameter DS and constant U12 ARR Pe DS USER P12 10000 Multiplication cation Multiplication line speed ai Apply the same value as APR Pc DS at gain setting U13 APR Pc DM USER P13 10 0 000 to 10 000 Multipli 4 0 0 000 O P0 with a middle winding diameter DM and constant 10000 Multiplication cation Multiplication line speed m Apply the same value as APR Pc DS at gain setting U14 APR Pc DL USER P14 0 10 0 0001510 000 Mufipl 4 0 0 000 O 0 with a maximum winding diameter DL and 10000 Multiplication cation Multiplication nh constant line speed Oto 0 000 to 10 000 Multipli 200 0 200 Gain at minimum winding diameter DS and U15 AFR Pad DS USER PIS 10000 Multiplication cation L Multiplication 2 accelerating line speed fun Apply the same value as APR Pad DS at gain setting z U16 APR Pad DM USER P16 onn 0 000 to 10 000 Mulipl 0 0 000 O P0 with a middle winding diameter DM and constant 5 Multiplication cation Multiplication line speed 8 E sn Apply the same value as APR Pad DS at gain setting 9 U17 APR Pad DL user 17 0 10 0 000 to 10 000 Mul
153. to 1000 0 0 to 100 0 5 1 0 0 0 o 4 13 roll position input ETE u29 APR invalidation dancer MA USER P29 0 to 50 0 to 50 1 5 5 o When dancer roll lt U29 and line speed lt U34 APR 4 14 G roll level is held at zero E U30 Bias correction LEL USER P30 0 to 1000 0 0 to 100 0 1 200 20 0 o 4 14 Ej U31 APR output limit USER P31 0 to 200 0 to 200 1 100 100 o 4 11 S U32 APR output limit USER P32 0 to 200 0 to 200 1 100 100 o 4 11 E Dancer roll level for appli oj a When dancer roll position U33 U22 is applied to ET U33 cation of ASR P I DL USER P33 10 to 100 10 to 100 e 1 50 50 ASR P and U25 is applied to ASR I 412 U34 Lowest line speed USER P34 1 to 100 1 to 100 m min m min 1 5 5 m min o 4 12 Note 1 Though the setting range of U01 through U64 is from 32768 to 32767 enter the settings in the above effective setting ranges Note 2 Concerning U04 Material length Specify the following distance to U04 Distance from A to B2 to C distance rom A to B1 to C B1 Position of dancer roll at tight limit B2 Position of dancer roll at loose limit Note 3 Concerning U05 and U06 Dancer Roll position voltage The U05 and UO6 settings vary according to application to feeding and winding cases Set the position Set the position voltage at the tight voltage at the tight limit to UOS limit to UO6 Set the position Set the position
154. to start the ATR control after conditions for enabling the ATR are met Detecting speed of out of material Set value 0 2000 0 2000 r min Rotation speed calculated from the wound diameter is used as a reference for detecting the speed This function sets a value corresponding to the o Torque command limit Set value 0 15000 0 150 Usually enter a value so as to fix this torque command limit to 150 ATR dead zone width Set value 0 100 0 100 N Enter the width of a dead zone for the ATR control input 8 Functions Relevant to Acceleration Deceleration Compensation Torque RS Rca ak eal acc E Acceleration deceleration detection level dead zone Set value 0 1000 detection level dead zone Set value 0 1000 A level for setting a deviation from a previous value for detecting a change in the speed command value as a detection flag for the acceleration Sets so as to avoid a detection error at a constant speed The value is compared with the previous value with a 1 msec of calculation interval Deceleration detection level dead zone Set value 0 to 1000 A level for setting a deviation from a previous value for detecting a change in the speed command value as a detection flag for the deceleration Sets so as to avoid a detection error at a constant speed The value is compared with the previous value with a 1 msec of calculation interval u35 Torque command filter Set value 0 1000 0 1000
155. to the position control mode stops at the position and enters the servo lock state When you set X1 to OFF the inverter switches to the speed control After test operation use the slow speed 1 the ORT gain and ASR adjusting such as gain I constant filter to adjust a behavior just before stopping according to your machine When you want an earlier stop time though you should set the slow speed 1 and gain larger and set the deceleration time smaller set the slow speed 1 and the gain smaller when the hunting is large just before stopping Calculate the number of pulses in the FWD CCW direction to a machine shaft from the Z phase reference position when you set a position You can rotate the machine shaft for adjusting while checking the option monitor 4 Z phase reference spindle position display when the operation stops Use the orientation complete signal and the orienting signal for providing an answer back to an external instrumentation When the completion signal chatters use the completion range setting and ON delay timer When the motor stops zero speed if you provide an orientation command a setting to stop in a direction for shorter rotation or to stop only in one direction is available as UNO 02 ORT rotation direction from stopping Use the UNO 03 ORT stop mode selection to select whether to stop in the shortest time or to stop while limiting the speed TU t 1 x Q Q o e gt E o
156. unit minimum 1 ms The two fold time is Even if the task operates at 1 ms the 2 units minimum 2 ms necessary for reading refresh time between VG7S and ite UPAC becomes as specified on the Writing same data to 12 units minimum 22 ms left according to the number of slave Minimum time ms number of units 1 x 2 connected units IO points DI Standard 11 points extended I O Standard 11 points Extended I O OPC VG7 DIOB OPC IO points AI Standard 3 points extended I O Standard 3 points VG7 AIO cannot be accessed in the IO points DO Standard 5 points extended 1 0 Standard 5 points 12 unit system IO points AO Standard 3 points extended I O Standard 3 points High speed Built in PG Impossible The counter function position counter OPC VG7 PG PGo synchronization and winding control is unavailable in the 12 unit system Function code Access to Writing to or reading from all areas F E C P H A o L U Function for master only VG7S master 60 ms refresh equipped with UPAC Access to 4W writing possible 4W writing possible Writing and reading High speed exchange using I O area slave Reading impossible Reading impossible impossible of both master and slave 2 1 2 2 Designing the number of inputs and outputs efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor NCAUTION Examine the following items in advance when designing the number of inputs and outputs e The numb
157. you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV11 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 33 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type See control block diagram for a more information IW11 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f S monitor calculation IW11 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW11 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o IW11 3 7 5 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W B 5 16 bit IW11 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W T IW11 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT S IW11 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV11 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW11 7 5 9 Ai Ai2 of INV11 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai c used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal QW11 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW119 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW11 10 5 z 3 Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW11 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition g 13bit required QW11 12 7 E Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW11 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT 2 Overwr
158. 0 0 UPAC overwrites data lot 10 0 Oo ASR 11 Write a value suitable for the winding _ F62 integration ASR1 I at to UPAC overwrites data s 0 001 0 200 dameter from UPAC constant E01 1 terminal X1 function 0 to 63 uu 0 x When U36 is 1 specify 25 U DI 4 16 function E02 X2 terminal X2 function 0 to 63 x 1 1 x When U37 is 1 specify 25 U DI 4 17 function 03 3 terminal X3 function 0 to 63 uum 2 x When U38 is 1 specify 25 U DI 4 17 function E04 X4 terminal X4 function 0 to 63 ls 3 x When U39 is 1 specify 25 U DI 4 17 function Eos 9 terminal X5 function 0 to 63 NE 4 x When U40 is 1 specify 25 U DI 4 15 function E06 X6 terminal X6 function 0 to 63 ls 5 x When U41 is 1 specify 25 U DI 4 17 function X9 terminal ify 9 i i E09 function X9 function 0 to 63 Specify 9 THR external alarm 1 9 x Assign to the external alarm input v X terminal function X normal The X9 external alarm terminal becomes a E E14 m open setting 0000 to 01FF Specify the part of 9 X9 on CL side 1 0000 x normally closed terminal 5 E15 Y1 terminal function Y1 function 0 to 47 1 1 x When U54 is 1 specify 25 U DO a E16 Y2 terminal function Y2 function 0 to 47 1 2 x When U54 is 2 specify 25 U DO o E17 Y3 terminal function Y3 function 0 to 47 1 3 x When U54 is 3 specify 25
159. 0 words UN 0 01 to 10 assigned to link NO can be changed or referred to from the PLC e The UNO data is written to the RAM evaporative memory from UPAC To retain memory even after the power is turned off there are the following two methods 1 Write manually at the keypad panel 2 Select Retain battery backup memory definition on the UPAC side Note H01 All save cannot be accessed from UPAC 3 10 lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 2 4 Operation of acceleration deceleration time 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 13 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 96QWLI 24 7 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT VG7S UPAC QWT 25 8 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT VG7S UPAC O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 14 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 96QWLI 12 7 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT VG7S UPAC 96QWLI 13 8 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT VG7S UPAC O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 There are two methods to operate the acceleration time and deceleration time from UPAC accessing the I Q memory and writing the function code Write the function code F07 F08 according to the method described in section 3 1 2 Access the IQ memory according to the method described in sectio
160. 00 to 10 000 times 0 001 1 Yes E56 Aigain setting ESA CANN AU 10 000 to 10 000 times 0 001 1 Yes E57 Ai bias setting BIAS Ai1 100 0to 100 0 96 0 1 0 Yes E58 AD bias setting ZJ B AS A2 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 0 Yes E59 __ Ai3 bias setting ZJ BIAS Ai3 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 0 Yes E60 Ai bias setting BIAS Ai4 100 0to 100 0 0 1 0 Yes E61 Ail filter setting FILTER Ai1 0 00 0 50 s 0 001 0 01 Yes E62 A filter setting EAFILTER A2 0 00 0 50 s 0 001 0 01 Yes E63 Ai3filer setting FILTER Ai3 0 00 0 50 s 0 001 0 01 Yes E64 A filer setting IEZI FILTER A4 0 00 0 50 s 0 001 0 01 Yes E69 Ao1 function selection ZJ A0 FUNC 0 31 1 1 Yes E70 _ Ao2 function selection ET 02 FUNC 0 31 1 6 Yes E71 Ao3function selection AO3 FUNC 0 31 1 3 Yes E72 Ao4function selection AO4 FUNC 0 31 1 0 Yes Unused E73 Aobfunction selection AO5 FUNC 0 31 1 0 Yes Unused P12 Mt iron loss coefficient 1 LE 1 Loss1 0 01 Yes P13 Mt iron loss coefficient 2 M1 LOSS2 0 01 Yes P14 Mt iron loss coefficient 3 A v 10ss3 0 01 Yes H02 All save function ELA ALL SAVE 0 1 1 0 oog _ Disitalline speed detection definition E LSPGDEF 400 60000 pf 1 4024 Yes PG pulse number Digital line speed detection definition Yes 007 D pulse correction 1 LS PG CP1 0 9999 1 1000 os redd pre bero taal LSPGCP2 0 9999 1 tooo Yes 038 UPAC start stop UPAC ACT 01 2 1 0 No 039 UPAC memory mode UPAC MEMO
161. 00h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW2 15 16 9 Ai Ai2 of INV2 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai IW2 16 17 5 Ai AIO option Ai3 of INV2 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as IW2 17 18 Ai AIO option Ai4 of INV2 4000h 10V INT universal QW2 18 1 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW2 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW2 20 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT Just before torque current reference filter QW2 21 4 Magnetic flux reference 10000 100 INT QW2 22 5 Z Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW2 23 6 i Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition G 13bit required QW2 24 7 y Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW2 25 8 5 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW2 26 9 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW2 27 10 a Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW2 28 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW2 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter QW2 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 INT S Before torque limiter QW2 31 14 Speed auxiliary reference 20000 Nmax INT Z QW2 32 15 Detected speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT v Speed output from motor q model QW2 33 16 5 INV2 function code 1 address Use after you Ww E Data transmission a
162. 038 conditions Stop S Output shutoff stop Possible 0 command Operating Impossible 1 Start W Stop Output shutoff stop Possible command data exchange Operating Impossible 1 Stop S Output shutoff stop Possible recommended 1 command Operating Impossible 1 Start W Start Output shutoff stop Impossible 2 command data exchange Operating Impossible 1 Stop S Stop Output shutoff stop Possible recommended 2 command data exchange Operating Impossible 1 Start W Start Output shutoff stop Impossible 2 command data exchange Operating Impossible 1 Downloading and resetting are impossible during operation of VG7S Stop VG7S temporarily 2 Downloading and resetting are impossible after UPAC has started Issue a stop command from D300win temporarily 2 Reset command When a reset command is issued from D300win to UPAC no response for confirmation of resetting may be displayed on the screen of the PC or it may be invisible even if displayed UPAC takes about five seconds to process a reset command Wait for five seconds after a reset command is issued before starting UPAC 2 13 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 3 Operation of Multiple Units via Optical Option OPC VG7 SI Basic operation and test operation of two or more units of VG7S linked with the optical option under control of UPAC are described Operation methods are based on
163. 1 universal Al2 INT U01 USER P01 INT UO2 USER P02 INT U03 USER POS DINT Line speed command V input value DINT Dancer position DINT TIME BOOL Zero hold INT DINT DINT efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 3 VG7S Control Block Diagrams 3 3 1 Operation Command VG7 Interface spueuuuloo Jeujo ui PEQNY eq Ilim uondo S 10 9vdf 24 woy spuewwog ue JO 90S Uorounj esf 1 0 peuinsse s NO Tyu JOJOW eu pue pejjeoueo aq m spueuuuJoo A snoeuejnuuis spueululoo A3 pue qM Jejue NOA JI puewwo9 Bumes Aioyoe ejeoipul seuoiMws lle jo sejeis G8rsu pereJBoju 9 snq pjey pue Xs 1 a uondo sy e puewwos uoneJedo Auoud BuiwojoJ eui e eu uoneJjedo xut 0 pazes spueuuulo uBnouu uonoejes uoneJedo y ufisse jou seop jeujw x ue J snq Play 10 KS TL WO ejqejoejes si uondo pjey euo Aug dois 0 ejejejoo2op IIM OVdN Wo pueuiuuoo uonejoi 2518184 oe ry uondo IM S8ySH pejeJbeju ovdn Is 9A 9dO Ovdfr49A 9d0 snq PI814 XS 19 0OdO 11L 29 0dO Speo lt gt jaued VIE avia uonejoJ pJewo4 203 poujeuJ uoneJjedo Orne 00 q jeuruue snq pjetJ XS 19A 0dO 11 29A 0dO Spie9 uondo n 7 AVA AS O Q uOHe O4 oto OO PIOH 9SJ9 0M l l l l l l l l l l l l l
164. 10 5 Pulse train position reference 1 1 latched at 4ms INT e 10 and 11 are used for pulse E PG PR cycle Z train synchronized control IW6 10 11 8 Position detection built in or 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 11 12 and 13 are used for c PG PD cycle orientation control IW6 11 12 8 Position detection Z phase input 1 1 latched at 4ms INT 8 PG PD cycle IW6 12 13 a S05 Position reference 1 1 INT IW6 13 14 DI DIOB option 16bit of INV6 Data distinction 26 W 1W6 14 15 D 7 Ai Ai1 of INV6 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai 1W6 15 16 9 Ai Ai2 of INV6 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai IW6 16 17 5 Ai AIO option Ai3 of INV6 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as 1W6 17 18 Ai AIO option Ai4 of INV6 4000h 10V INT universal QW6 18 1 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW6 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW6 20 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT Just before torque current reference filter QW6 21 4 Magnetic flux reference 10000 100 INT QW6 22 5 Z Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW6 23 6 S Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition c 13bit required 7eQW6 24 7 y Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW6 25 8 5 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW6 26 9 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT
165. 100 0 ms Yes P28 UINT se Mwt1 316 031Ch M1 PG pulses 100 to 1024 to 60000 Yes P29 aria MW11 317 031pn MT external PG correction 0000 to 4000 to 4FFF aa Yes coefficient 0to 1to3 0 No thermistor 2 3 1 NTC thermistor selection P30 p30 UINT MW 11 318 031Eh M1 thermistor selection 2 PTC thermistor selection 84 Yes 3 Ai M TMP Set the protection level of the motor Table 5 2 42 H High Performance Functions referencing data E A F code Variable updating Setting range by variable Type Address address UPAC name 0 to 4 Automatically reset to zero after data is written 0 Inactive 1 ASR auto tuning 2 Motor auto tuning R1 Lo H01 h01_f UINT MW 11 321 0401h Tuning operation selection 3 Motor stoppage auto tuning No 4 Motor rotation auto tuning The data after tuning evaporates when the power is turned off To retain the data validate H02 all save function Oto 1 If HO1 auto tuning is used to change internal data or if data is changed through the link TLINK field path H02 h02 f UINT MW 11 322 0402h All save function RS485 etc the data evaporates when the inverter is No turned off To retain data activate this function he setting is automatically reset to zero after data is ritten to 1 he data changed by the customer is initialized to the HO3 1h03 f UINT MW 11 323 0403h Data initialization 04 F05 and F10 through F12 he setting is automatically reset to zero after the data written
166. 15 steps 0 SS1 1 882 2 884 3 888 4 5 ASR acceleration deceleration 4 steps 8 wire operation stop command Coast to stop command Alarm reset External alarm Jogging operation Speed setting N2 speed setting Motor M2 selection Motor M3 selection DC brake command ACC DEC cleared to zero Creep speed switching in UP DOWN control UP command in UP DOWN control UP DOWN command in UP DOWN ci Write enable for keypad PID control cancel Inverse mode changeover Interlock 52 2 Write enable through link Operation selection through link Universal DI Pickup start mode Synchronized operation command PG PR option Zero speed locking command Pre exciting command Speed reference value relevant codes F76 F77 F78 H41 torque command cancel H43 magnetic flux command cancel H43 CCL without relations to deceleration time setting 0 to 1 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal func 0 to 7 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal function 0 to 8 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal func 0 to 9 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal function 0 to 25 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal function 57 0 to 25 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal function 57 0 to 25 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal function 0 to 25 to 63 Refer to X1 terminal function 0000 to 01FF Designate the normal state of X1 through X9 0 Normally open 1 Normally closed IL WE LK LE U DI STM S
167. 2 Battery change Maintenance parts Required number of parts exist Stored properly Inspection record Program No abnormality when referred Source program is stored properly No abnormality Program reference Note Voltage of battery decreases in storage due to self discharge Change to new battery before expiration date is reached 6 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 2 Replacing the Battery e When an ErA alarm UPAC alarm is displayed on the VG7S and the minor failure of lower battery voltage is discovered by the D300win failure diagnosis replace the battery immediately Otherwise any application operating with backup memory may fail to properly run when the power is turned ON An accident may occur NCAUTION Precautions for handling the battery e Do not short both of the poles Do not throw the battery into fire Do not charge or dismantle the battery Dispose of the battery according to the regulations stipulated by the competent local administrative agency Replace the battery with a new one when it reaches the effective period even if no battery failure message Is displayed Replace the battery immediately with a new one when an ErA UPAC alarm occurs on the VG7S and the minor failure of lower battery voltage is discovered by the D300win failure diagnosis Although the battery can be used for another
168. 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW5 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter QW5 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 INT Z Before torque limiter QW5 31 14 Speed auxiliary reference 20000 Nmax INT T QW5 32 15 Detected speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT lt Speed output from motor model QW5 33 16 5 INV5 function code 1 address Use after you W gt Data transmission at the QW5 34 17 amp INV5 function code 1 data check data INT minimum of 3ms is possible by QW5 35 18 S amp INV5 function code 2 address distinction of W defining this 4W area for QW5 36 19 INV5 function code 2 data individual function INT individual function code when QW5 37 20 2 INVS function code 3 address code W SI UPAC option is used QW5 38 21 INV5 function code 3 data INT QW5 39 22 D 8 INV5 function code 4 address W QW5 40 23 INV5 function code 4 data INT QW5 41 24 Reserved QW5 42 25 g DO2 DIOB option 10bit of INV5 Data distinction 27 W UPAC controls AO DO of INV5 QW5 43 26 amp AO AO1 of INV5 4000h 10V INT AO DO used by INV5 are QW5 44 27 w AO AO2 of INV5 INT defined as universal 9 QW5 45 28 g AO AO3 of INV5 INT Note that universal definition is QW5 46 29 Z AO AIO option AO4 of INV5 INT not required for DIOB QW5 47 30 2 AO AIO option AO5 of INV5 INT QD5 48 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected o
169. 20060 or later ROM versions of the main body If the version is earlier refer to section 3 1 5 Using Pulse Train Data to change Program Variable definition Definition of global variables START VAR_EXTERNAL AUTOINSERT LD INV105 CW Control data X1 input state acquisition SHR WORD UINT 2 Move X1 bit to the least significant position WORD TO BOOL ST SYC Reflect X1 input status to SYC Synchronous control routine LD SYC JMPCN SPEED_OP Synchronization when x1 is ON clearing process when OFF Store first data LD SYC_FLG Store first data immediately after the power is turned on JMPC PULSE_START LD BOOL 1 ST SYC_FLG LD NV109_PLSPOSREF Store previous PG_PR command data ST PR_DATA LD NV110_POSDET Store previous PG_ built in data ST PG_DATA JMP MAIN_END PULSE_START Latch position command data LD NV109 PLSPOSREF PG PR command data SUB PR DATA INT TO DINT Extension to 32 bits ADD PR CNT ST PR CNT LD NV109 PLSPOSREF Store previous PG PR command data ST PR DATA Latch position detection data LD NV110 POSDET PG built in data SUB PG DATA INT TO DINT Extension to 32 bits ADD PG CNT ST PG CNT LD NV110 POSDET Store previous PG built in data ST PG DATA Position deviation calculation LD PR CNT SUB PG CNT ST DEV _CNT Position deviation command data detection data APR output calculation LD u01 f Ass
170. 28 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft 10 022 function code UNO 09 2 for 128 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft 0 011 function code UNO 09 3 for 128 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft Note The positioning accuracy is for rotation in a uniform direction The stopping accuracy deteriorates in a system with forward and reverse rotation Pulse encoder specification Pulse encoder specification RS422A line driver specification SN75113 26LS31 A A signal B B signal Z Z signal 1 P R The underlined part indicates the reverse signal The Z phase is necessary for judgment of the reference stopping position Be sure to select the Z phase Resistive torque Possible up to the maximum value of the motor PI control The displacement increases temporarily in response to instantaneous load torques Adjust the resistance torque using the speed control gain integration time and orientation gain Mechanical conditions Max allowable input to PG card 500 kHz Speed steps 4 RT1 and RT2 are used RT1 RT2 OFF OFF Gain setting 1 is validated RT1 RT2 ON OFF Gain setting 2 is validated RT1 RT2 OFF ON Gain setting 3 is validated RT1 RT2 ON ON Gain setting 4 is validated Orientation specification Random access stopping direction selection speed boosting to stop in the shortest path stopping without speed boosting and other functions can be selected
171. 32 h32 1 MW 11 352 0420h Function select upon error Operation for H33 time and stop if continuation of communication alarm is judged Er5 Continuation of operation 1 19200bps 2 9600bps 0to 1to2 H36 n36 f UINT MW11 356 0424h Parity bit NONE 76 Yes 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity 0to1 H37 h37 UINT MW 11 357 0425h Stop bits 0 2bit 77 Yes 1 1bit H33 h33f UINT mw11 353 0421h 2 01 to 2 00 to 20 00 s 3 Yes 3 4800bps 0 0 to 60 0 s 0 0 Broken wire detection invalid No response error detection 0 1 to 60 0 Broken wire detection valid 9 Hog h38 UINT MW11 358 0426h i No access broken wire etc in the set time to stations 2 Yes via RS485 during operation is detected to trip the inverter due to Er5 alarm 0to4 H34 h34 1 UINT MW 11 354 0422h Transmission speed 4 2400bps You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting 0 38400bps Oto1 H35 h35 UINT MW 11 355 0423h Data length 0 8bit 75 Yes 1 7bit Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 43 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 60 ms updating and r referencing data High speed F code updating Vanable Address address name 0 00 to 0 01 to 1 00 s H39 h39 f UINT MW11 359 0427h Response interval Set the time until a response is issued upon a request 3 Yes fr
172. 4 0 1000 Times Yes 0 to 1000 0 0 to 100 0 times Position loop gain Setting for position adjuster proportional gain during ORT Use RT 1 and RT2 for switching these four steps Always assign RT 1 and RT2 to X4 to X5 respectively Reserved Reserved Reserved op position setting 1 P20 op position setting 2 P21 Set the number of pulses of installed encoder x 4 Set to 1024x4x100 360 1138 for stop position command of 100 in forward direction when you use 1024p r encoder Subtract one rotation when you set while exceeding four times Set the travel distance in shaft forward direction op position setting 3 P22 ud 2 No Use terminal input switching stop position 1 2 for changing four point stop position op position setting 4 USER Data switching is not accepted during ORT Turn on the P23 position change command or temporarily turn off the ORT ON signal 0 Integrated PG PA PB PG SD card valid SD prioritized M ection Er 0 1 1 0 No P01 3 PMPG card valid for synchronous motor driving 1 PG PD card valid ORT speed just after USER 0 500 1 0 Yes Speed limit function for orientation command from stop state just power on after power on 0 1 About setting range e Though setting range from KEYPAD panel is 232768 to 32767 the UPAC limits the set values to the above data range For example when yo
173. 4 2 5 3 Determining stopping position Understand the relation between an object to be stopped at a target position and an installation of an encoder for detecting the position Setting example 1 Setting with Calculation When you use an encoder of 1024 p r 4096 pulses Target stop position 816 pulses which are the result of multiplication by four are generated per rotation Use this count as 360 to set the stop position In the right figure the relationship between an object to be positioned and encoder matches the Z phase in horizontal direction When you want stop at a position 71 7 from this reference position 4096x71 7 360 816 pulse count is set to the stop position command Setting Manually When you move the object to the position of 71 7 the option monitor 4 Z phase reference spindle position shows 816 on the KEYPAD panel This value is set to the stop position command Forward direction CCW Z phase position 0 Object to be positioned B Fig 4 2 14 4 32 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 6 Control Command The definition for control command varies according to how many encoders you use 1 Using S05 Use S05 when you use an external device MICREX or PC to provide the orientation command over T link or RS485 The function code corresponds to S05 Orientation position command 1 For 128 p
174. 4096 or 8192 p r pulse encoder See section 5 2 4 1 OPC VG7 TL T link card Fuii s MICREX function code UNO 04 2 2 OPC VG7 DIO DIOB card function code UNO 04 1 3 Standard RS485 function code UNO 04 2 4 Standard terminal function X1 X2 and X3 function code UNO 04 0 U DI must be assigned 1 and 3 Function code S05 Orientation position command is used to write TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o Orientation command Issue this signal during FWD or REV operation to lock at the target stopping position Cancel the signal for operation under regular speed control Low speed direction command Define the direction of rotation for orientation from a stopping state Position change command Function for latching the external stopping position command The command is latched upon the rising edge Repeatability Varies according to the encoder resolution installed to the machine shaft Be sure to specify function code UNO 09 according to the resolution of the installed encoder 0 703 function code UNO 09 3 for 128 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft 0 352 function code UNO 09 2 for 128 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft 10 176 function code UNO 09 1 for 128 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft 0 088 function code UNO 09 0 for 128 P R pulse encoder on machine shaft 10 044 function code UNO 09 1 for 1
175. 60 32768 to 32767 U61 E MW11 591 0B3Dh USER P61 U Ai1 32768 to 32767 U62 MW11 592 0B3Eh USER P62 U Ai2 32768 to 32767 U63 MW11 593 0B3Fh USER P63 U Ai3 32768 to 32767 5 U64 MW11 594 0B40h USER P64 U Ai4 32768 to 32767 60 ms updating and F code a Setting range bit address UPAC por fpont wr AT omer eno wat e JE M03 d NT MW 11 613 Unavailable Torque current command 0 0196 1d No M04 INT Mw11 614 0 01 1d No 24000 to 24000 r min M06 T MW11 616 Unavailable Detected speed data Nmax 20000 M07 f INT Mw11 617 Unavailable Calculated torque 0 01 1d M08 iNT MW11 618 Unavailable Calculated torque current 0 01 1d M09 d UINT MW11 619 Unavai i m e i able Output frequency 0 1Hz 1d No M10 UINT_ Mw11 620 0 1kW 1d No M11 f uint xmwi1 621 0 1A 1d No M12 Ej MW11 622 Unavailable Effective output voltage 0 1V 1d No M13 i MW 11 623 ne eas 0000 to FFFF No M14 E MW11 624 0000 to FFFF No M15 Z MW11 625 0000 to FFFF No m ex M16 WORD MW11 626 Unavai M17 _f wonp MW11 627 Unavai M18 WORD MW11 628 Unavai M19 E MW11 629 Unavailable 0 to 47 M20 E MW11 630 Unavailable 0 to 65535 h M21 f umr Mw11 631 Unavailable DC link circuit voltage 1V 14 M22 MW11 632 Unavailable 1 C 1d M23 B MW11 633 Unavailable 0000 to FFFF M24 E MW11 634 Unavailable 0 to 29 M25 f woRD Mw11 635 Unavailabie verter ROM
176. 7 Ed UINT MW11 471 0607h definition 1 to 1000 to 9999 Yes detection pulse correction 1 Digital line speed detection 008 UINT MW11 472 0608h definition 1 to 1000 to 9999 Yes detection pulse correction 2 PMPG option setting 009 UINT MW11 473 0609h ABS signal input definition O to 16 Yes synchronous synchronous PG PR pulse string option O to 1 012 UINT MW11 476 060Ch setting 0 PG PR option Yes Command pulse selection 1 Internal speed command You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting MW 11 465 0601 Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 46 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written updating Name Setting range Type by F code to2 Is PN Phase difference 90 between A and B phases 013 UINT MW11 477 060Dh Pulse string input form A phase command pulse B phase command sign Yes selection z A phase forward rotation pulse B phase reverse rotation pulse 014 UINT 94MW11 478 060Eh Command pulse correction 4 1000 to 9999 0 Yes 1 015 NT Mw11 479 060Fh P ipd pulse correction 4 to 1000 to 9999 Lol Yes 016 NT MW11 480 0610h APR gain 0 1 to 1 0 to 999 9 Multiplication Yes 017 NT MW11 481 0611h F F gain 0 0 to 1
177. 8 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 5 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 5 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 5 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 5 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 5 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 5 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes o 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes 32768 to 32767 Yes The underlined part indicates the factory setting 5 48 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and High d referencing data Ig spee i F code Varabl updating Name Setting range Type name u41 1 5 U41 NT MW 11 571 USER P41 32768 to 32767 VENTE Us o Ua Uis us U46 E N MW11 576 0B2Eh USER P46 o 32767 5 Uso uso U51 N AMW 11 581 USER P51 32768 to 32767 5 TIR Uss CEEE Uss fuss U56 i N 96MW 11 586 0B38h USER P56 o 32767 5 N 5 U60 90MW 11 590 OB3Ch USER P
178. 9665 DE a O GS SEX 4 E cE o 9 O 09 oc o9 o aN wW o ep 24 eo Q Q ae P4 E gt ao o o oo 2 GN N efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor ndino uoneouyiuBeuu jenbe si yno 18plaip ndno esind eu yndul N 3N17 Iv 104 eBeyoA oyu 3 ueAuoo 0 pieoq JeYeAuod A4 SINA esn peeds eui se ndjno 9 se yons Aouenbeu Bojeue ue Ajdde no u yM 043009 J A 0 SOUOJIMS JOLBAU BY 10 0UJ EW OU 129Jos 03009 J A 10 PIBAUI 81e uoneuunse peeds pue uonoejep peeds au peeds eu jeu amp ip Bunoejep Aq peeds eui sjonuo q1 9d a peeds eje nojeo oj ules esjnd Bunoejep Aq peeds sj ouo qS 94 e Uonoejep peeds eui pue uonoejep peeds JOJOW UBOMJOG YMS 0 PILED 9d 9A 9dO 24 UO OMS e j99J8s UBD noA nof Jl uonoejep poeds IS OWdN oijosjsp uonoejep em o peeds Jejeujopeeds OY LV La4 N La4 N uonoejop em euo Jejeuiopeeds OY e dsip peeds peyoejeq Joyuou q31 pued QvdA3 uonoejep peeds uone nojeo uoroejep peeds uone nojeo uoneuinse peeds uone no eo uonoejep peeds JIN9119 Japiaiq i uoneJ89jur piepuejs EW ZIW LN 9 OF 0 7 uonosjes jndino esjnd 9d uonoeJ es EN ZIN J030IN Jequunu esind 9d LIN eza jueroujeoo uonoeuoo Od IeuJeixe LIN uonoejep peeds oul je
179. A12 A13 and A14 is referred to from UPAC Each analog input is assigned to OFF input shutoff signal in the factory shipment setting 13 Position reference 14 DI of INV1 DIOB option 16bit Ai of INV Ai1 Ai of INV1 Ai2 17 Ai of INVI AID option Ai 18 AiofINV1 AIO option Aid ISiisiis s JOC a Cancel A 10V analog input is converted into a 4000h 16384d digital value and Hb Fie Edt View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help la xi read into UPAC D uRS ire Lca aemnmeraressllsc e The standard function includes the gain im maA ars lea 50 8 E st de 0 GH UT DL He 44 bias filter increment decrement limiter x polarity inversion and zero hold For Pad M CA 1 Input details refer to Chapter 4 of the User s i 2 raies Manual for the main body 8 LADDER INV114 UNIALI AI DATA The state of analog inputs can be 3 yer checked using the I O check at the E F keypad panel If 15555 type INT is Ga C_VG7_6 VG7_ displayed when the AI DATA variable E ream is monitored the actual input is 9 49 V 10V x 15555 16384 when gain is 1 and bias is 0 Ladder LA Fig 3 1 22 3 14 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 3 3 Operation of digital output NCAUTION
180. AC M3 screw s L D Battery D b Control PCB e Fig 1 2 6 Option installation method NCAUTION e An ErA alarm may be developed when the option is turned on for the first time If this happens leave the power turned on for about 30 seconds then turn the power off and turn it on again 1 12 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 2 2 1 Description of product The UPAC option is designed for a small to medium system for generalizing and driving about 10 inverters UPAC is installed on an arbitrary VG7S inverter As a means to control the second and later VG7Ss from UPAC this optical option OPC VG7 SI hereinafter referred to as optical option is necessary Rigid digital system configured through optical communication In conventional small to medium systems a PLC computer board or the like is installed externally and each inverter is generalized and driven through input output basis or analog basis When network connection is possible digital control via the network including open and private ones can be made Using this optical option the control based on inputs and outputs or analog signals can be replaced with a rigid high speed maintenance free digital system where a small wiring length can result in a reduced cost and noise immunity is high Load distribution system Th
181. C start stop and the control state of D300win set 1 or 2 at 038 and give a start W command from the control of D300win to arrange the data exchange state between UPAC system and VG7S This data exchange state is defined in the table below as startup The user must select and prepare the pieces of data exchanged actually in the pre process the user must select in the System Definition UPAC system definition screen of D300win whether to use or not The System Definition is described in details in section 2 2 3 Settings on D300win side and in Chapter 3 Table 2 2 2 Starting and stopping condition of UPAC Function p300win control UPAC system Outline of action code 038 0 SUD S command Stop Data exchange between UPAC and Start W command Stop SY command 1 Start Data exchange between UPAC and Hot start Start W command data exchange VG7S is possible Started with memory retention when UPAC starts Stop Data exchange between UPAC and data exchange VG7S is stopped Data exchange between UPAC and VG7S is possible Started with cleared memory when UPAC starts data exchange VG7S is stopped Stop S command 2 Cold start Start Start W command data exchange In a system using UPAC make it a rule to set 1 or 2 at 038 and start or stop from the control of D300win This is important when UPAC is temporarily stopped for system d
182. E IEPA TOES Io eed TOS TEE T T T T T T T T T T T TA TA TY A T T TT TT TA TTA TATA TA TTA T T T TTA TT TATATATTATATTA TT TTTTTTTTTTYTTATTTTTTTYTMTTTTYT 3 28 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 5 5 Z phase detection method 2 CAUTION e With the ROM version of the main body being in the range described below the task of UPAC for referencing data must be fixed at 4 ms The data of the second and later units cannot be acquired via the optical link To configure the optical link with models of the following version contact us Applicable ROM version Earlier than H10060 H20060 The 4ms sampling data is calculated on the main body side and transferred to UPAC as the PG pulse To calculate cumulative pulses on the UPAC side simply add in the 4ms constant period task Be careful that tasks including data reference by UPAC must use the 4ms constant period Otherwise calculation becomes incorrect The Z phase detection method is the same as Z phase detection method 1 described in section 3 1 5 4 while this method uses the 4ms task and it is already the cumulative pulses at the 4 ms period Example of Z phase detection program in IL language LD INV111 POS Z No 12 position detection data ADD ORT DATA Absolute reference position data in 0000 to OFFF range INT TO WORD AND WORD 16 0F FF With 1024 P R encoder multiplication by four that i
183. E uu E Ll eceleration time D300win screen E 89 Toqueliierlevel1 10 Torque limiter level 2 All 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f The auxiliary speed setting data is converted o e into a 20000 scale Data x maximum speed 20000 13 Torque bias ivi Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed 16 Address of function code 1 of INV1 17 Data of function code 1 of INV1 18 Address of function code 2 of INV1 18 Data of function code 2 of INV1 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 Example To write 3000 for a maximum speed setting of 1500 r min L 21 D sirs of NV E 3000 x 1500 20000 225 r min Cancel Fig 3 1 7 3 4 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 1 4 Torque reference NCAUTION e After the operation command is turned on and a torque reference is given the motor does not turn off even if the operation command is turned off To stop after giving a torque reference turn the operation command off and turn on coast to stop BX Otherwise injuries may be caused 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 6 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 96QWLI 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 96 INT UPAC gt VG7S Before torque limit 96QWLI 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT UPAC gt VG7S After torque limit O 1 to 6 IN
184. Eo x lt a 3 You can uninstall similarly using Add Remove Programs in the Control Panel window m Opening UPAC Project The first step after you have installed and started D300win is to produce a new UPAC project or to open an existing UPAC project This section describes steps required to create a new UPAC project Creating new project using UPAC template If you use this method to create a new project D300win will copy the selected template to project as Untitled The template consists of POUs worksheets and configuration elements required for the PLC type You can edit the project Untitled and save it as a name you want to use 1 A Creating new project with mouse Select the New Project menu item from the File submenu The New Project dialog box appears 2 Creating new project with keyboard Press ALT F to open the File submenu and press N The New Project dialog box appears N H amp Project Wizard NEW Frame MICREX SX MICREX SX Im PS117 PS74 HA MICREX SX MICREX SX MICREX SX Training PS32 PH16 PHOS pag BE EM d SX simulator MEANS VG 12 UPAC Sample Fig 1 3 36 New Project dialog box containing available project templates 3 B Using New Project dialog box Left click to select VG7 6 UPAC or VG7 12 UPAC template 1 38 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation
185. G7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Torque reference 1 Fig 3 1 43 An example of speed setting 1 and torque reference 1 switching program of the above control in the IL language is shown below jb pes pop b Edo p 3 p E pd Eos p pop prp AE LD S pp bob OM CE oh ce pope p pp bp E pb E AE EE ES ES LOS FON E26 S TEN TOES EE A IEL pop ce pop ob pb pog LER MES ES CN CUI RN REI DT TEN ded deb och hb hed ce ed eee ee EI RU de ede de de de SEEN CON UD TER ee ee ce TRI KENN TOI MEDI DES RET KS UE DEI de a Dynamic switching process LD SPEED SW Control flag 0 torque reference 1 speed setting JMPC SPEED CONT LD DWORD 16 00000000 No 02 torque reference 1 is made valid ST INV148 DSW LD TORQUE_DATA Memory of torque reference data ST INV119_TRQREF1 Torque command 1 VG7 JMP DYNAMIC END SPEED CONT LD DWORD 16 00000002 No 2 torque reference 1 is canceled ST INV148 DSW LD SPEED DATA Memory of speed setting data ST INV118 SPDREF1 Speed setting 1 VG7 DYNAMIC_END Apo Ee dope Ez p pe TEES dp p pep p Ce Tee Eu TEN EE d Eel TS el p Ect Loe EE VS pe Deed EST ETE Um cel Fee TEE PO PE Pre LES TEPS EN Eb p ES oo Ue heb kde de deh bok holed teh kkk dock ONE CUP CRE GE ONF deck ded bebe ode ded hbo de deck dy dk bite dr de ded CO PES DER de CU ME LP de bed dee dt hehe ot Note In this example output data of the acceleration deceleration calculator may remain when the torque command is
186. G7S MPAG SIW Fig 3 1 46 1 Brief explanation 1 On VG7S side The VG7S inverter drives the induction motor and performs speed feedback by means of the motor PG for vector control with PG thereby conducting classic automatic PI control Set 2 at function code P01 M1 control method to shut down the secondary output and select the simulation mode Next validate the actual speed simulation speed in the system definition After these operations the switch changes the flow as shown in the control block diagram Give the speed setting from the keypad panel or the like and transfer torque command 1 an ASR output of VG7S as a driving torque of two inertia model of UPAC 2 On UPAC side e Scale conversion The scale 10000 100 and unit 100 N m unit of rated torque of the torque command are converted The scale 20000 Nmax and unit r min rad s of the simulation speed are converted e Inertia model motor and load rad s 4 few m dt J kg m Speed rad s J Inertia kg m t Torque N m e Shaft model Model including the rigidity N m rad of the shaft and backlash and other dead zone e External disturbance torque An impact load fixed load viscosity load working as a function of the load speed can be given 3 34 lt 1 E 5 Ej fa e efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 2 Application Creation Exa
187. Item Orientation specification Model of option card OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 PG PD Packaged software Orientation package Version No 13 Displayed at function code UNO 01 and 64 Stopping position Stopping position setting external stopping position setting internal stopping position setting For example with 30 internal and 10 external commands 40 External stopping position setting Any of the following interface can be used to set 1 OPC VG7 TL T Link card Fuji s MICREX 2 OPC VG7 DIO DIOB card 3 Standard RS485 1 and 3 Function code S05 Orientation position command is used to write Internal stopping position setting When the external stopping position setting is used this setting may be a value for offset adjustment Four points can be specified using the UNO function code General purpose input terminals are combined to switch among them When using this function assign the U DI function to X6 and X7 X6 X7 OFF OFF UNO 20 Stopping position setting 1 is validated X6 X7 ON OFF UNO 21 Stopping position setting 2 is validated X6 X7 OFF ON UNO 22 Stopping position setting 3 is validated X6 X7 ON ON UNO 23 Stopping position setting 4 is validated Control command Use any of the following setting Use function code UNO 04 to select among them However there are limitations when using a
188. L AUTOINSERT Develo i Rid INV105 CW WORD INV1 M13 control data CW Develop to each input state rc LD DI INPUT END VAR SHR_WORD UINT 2 WORD TO BOOL OM m ST X1 INPUT Definition of local variables LD DI INPUT N WORD SHR_WORD UINT 3 4 Ene WORD TO BOOL oo ST X2_INPUT HEHEHEHEHE eee EHE EE E EHE E EHE EE E EHE He ERE E EE HH EE HE EE HE EE EHE EHE EE HE EE E EHE HE HERE HER B pape ithe FBD language is JR File Edi View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help aziz shown in the figure on the right ID ES ER 8225 C gt 268 7 Fig 3 1 21 3 13 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 3 2 Referring to analog inputs NCAUTION e To use analog inputs Ail A12 A13 and Ai4 AIO option only for monitoring from UPAC set function codes E49 to E52 at 14 to assign each analog input to universal AI U AI so that the analog inputs do not give effects on the control function of the main body 1 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 17 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks IWO 14 15 Ai of INV1 Ai 4000h 10V INT VG7S UPAC Define U AI to allow UPAC IWD 15 16 Ai of INV1 Ai2 4000h 10V INT VG7S UPAC to use the AI terminal for AIWO 16 17 Ai of INV1 AIO option Ai3 4000h 10V INT VG7S gt UPAC Control input
189. L Current limiting ACC Accelerating DEC Decelerating ALM Alarm relay output 0 REM LOC 1 COM 0 KEYPAD panel 1 RS485 2 link option Not used Writing 0 OFF 1 ON 0 OFF 1 ON T Q 5 o Cc c 67 o amp e D T D Ko Cc c o Cc c o o amp e D X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 Y22 Y23 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 Y28 Y29 Y30 0 OFF 1 ON 5 53 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Type 28 Inverter capacity Table 5 2 50 Code Inverter Code Inverter Code Inverter Code Inverter capacity capacity capacity capacity 0 0 05 8 5 5 16 45 24 220 1 0 1 9 7 5 17 55 25 250 2 0 2 10 11 18 75 26 280 3 0 4 11 15 19 90 27 315 4 0 75 12 18 5 20 110 28 355 5 1 5 13 22 21 132 29 400 6 2 2 14 30 22 160 7 3 7 15 37 23 200 Type 29 Inverter model common to entire FUJI inverter system The number is fixed to 1213h or 1214h for the VG inverters 200V system fixed to 1213h 400V system fixed to 1214h Table 5 2 51 Cod Model Development code Series Voltage ode Division Display Division Display Division Display Division Display 0 x a x i Standard for Single phase 1 VG VG 11 series 11 domestic 100V 6 Standard for Single phase 2 G G 7 series 7 Asia 200V 7 Standard for Three phase E China 200V 2 Standard for Three phase 4 7 E Europe 400V
190. L2 58 Yes AL4 AL8 FAN TRY U DO SY C LIFE U ACC U DEC INV OL M OH M OL DB OL LK ERR lated ANC TBH O DO1 to O DOS Yes ction Yes ction Yes g m 92 Yes tput as it is is output as it is e M TMP is p Yes e M TMP is p Yes 3 Yes 0 Yes Yes Yes efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 60 ms updating and a High speed Written F code Variabi referencing data updating Name Setting range Type by Address address UPAC E36 UINT MW11 132 0124 DB overload early warning 0 to 80 to 100 0 Yes E37 e37 t UiNT Mw11 133 0125 DB thermal time constant 0 to 300 to 1000 s o Yes 000 to 111 Detection method of E39 Detection method of E40 i Speed detection setting Detection method of E41 WORD MW11 134 0126h Speed detection method 0 Speed detection Yes 1 Speed setting The command value only is valid during V f control E38 E39 E MW11 135 0127 Speed detection level 1 0 to 1500 to 24000 r min Yes E MW11 136 0128 Speed detection level 2 24000 to 1500 to 24000 r min E41 ra INT MW 11 137 0129 Speed detection level 3 24000 to 1500 to 24000 r min Yes Yes Yes E42 B MW11 138 012Ah Speed arrival hysteresis 1 0 to 3 0 to 20 0 Speed agreement E43 B MW 11 139 012Bh hysteresis 1 0 to 3 0 to 20 0 2 Yes Speed agreement E44 e44
191. LA lt Q A 5 Fy fa o Fig 3 1 33 Table 3 1 31 Monitor code list Refer to the function code list for details 60 ms updating referencing data High speed Written by Fcode Variable Type Address updating Name Setting range Type UPAC name address M01 m01 f INT MW 11 611 Impossible Speed setting 4 ASR input 24000 to 24000 31 Impossible M02 m02 f UINT 96MW11 612 Impossible Torque reference 0 01 1d 7 Impossible M03 m03 f UINT 96MW11 613 Impossible Torque current reference 0 01 1d 7 Impossible M04 m04 f UINT 96MW11 614 Impossible Magnetic flux reference 0 01 1d 7 Impossible M05 m05 f UINT 96MW11 615 Impossible Output frequency reference 0 1Hz 1d 2 Impossible M06 m06_f INT MW 11 616 Impossible Speed detection value 24000 to 24000 31 Impossible M07 m07 f UINT 96MW11 617 Impossible Calculated torque value 0 01 1d 7 Impossible M08 mO8 f UINT 96MW11 618 Impossible Calculated torque current 0 01 1d 7 Impossible M09 m09 f UINT 96MW11 619 Impossible Output frequency 0 1Hz 1d 2 Impossible M10 m10 f UINT 96MW11 620 Impossible Motor output 0 1kW 1d 2 Impossible M11 m11 f UINT 96MW11 621 Impossible Effective output current 0 1A 1d 2 Impossible to M56 m56 f WORD MW11 666 Impossible Option monitor 2 0000 to FFFF 9 Impossible M57 m57_f UINT MW11 667 Impossible Option monitor 3 0 to 65535 0 Impossible M58 m58
192. M 10 ad 12 X12 m 13 X13 eee 14 X14 e I 15 RST RESET command 3 21 TL torque limiting VL voltage limiting IL current limiting ACC accelerating DEC decelerating ALM alarm 0 remote local 1 COM REV reverse operation EXT DC braking pre exciting INT inverter shutoff BRK braking NUV DC link circuit voltage establishment efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 4 5 Status monitor 60ms sampling The M area of the function code ii D300win SPEED_CONTROL Ladder LADDER oO xj can be monitored at a refresh rate d File Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help laj x OSH AS eee QQ Ma anaes le 2389 Qs e33 e om w ie er vo eod ar of 60 ms The figure on the right shows a program referring to the M code area for the motor output and E Project n cumulative operation hours Libraries El The M code can be selected from mins m10_f MOTOR_OUTPUT the function list of the global DH LADDER variables similarly to other i LADDERT m20 f ACCUMULATED OPERATION TIME 8S LADDERV function codes E LADDER Ep Physical Hardware C VG 5 VG 7 E BA System Defin a R_UPAC UF For details of the data refer to the function code list o P 119 C gt 2GB 7 X Ladder
193. M version in the maintenance information given at the keypad panel If the version is uncertain contact us Check the ROM version of the main body before installing the option If the option is already installed check the ROM version of the main body in the state MAIN H1xxxx MTR H2xxxx Check the ROM version of the main body of VG7 not optical option or keypad KP K xxxx panel To check view the information displayed on the right of MAIN and MTR in the maintenance information of the keypad panel The screen shown on the right is displayed on page five of the maintenance information Press the key of the keypad panel to open page five efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup Table 1 2 8 ROM version MAIN MTR OPC VG7 SI UPAC H10060 or later H20060 or later 1 2 2 5 Storage Model of option 1 Temporary storage Table 1 2 9 Item Specification Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C T Storage temperature 1 25 to 65 C Mion dew or feli Caused Dy Relative humidity 5 to 95 Wer ARTEN peras enshges Free from dust direct sunshine corrosive gases flammable Atmosphere gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration Little salt inclusion Note 1 The storage temperature indicates the allowable temperature in a short period such as during transportation Note 2 Even if the humidity
194. O Total I O points 3 0 2 1 1 2 0 3 DI 75 9 3 16 3 59 9 3 16 2 43 9 3 16 1 27 9 3 16 0 DO 45 5 3 10 3 35 5 3 10 2 25 5 3 10 1 15 5 310 0 Al 9 3 3 2 0 11 8 3 2 1 13 3 3 2 2 15 3 3 2 3 AO 9 3 3 2 0 11 3 3 2 1 13 3 3 2 2 15 3 3 2 3 In the above table the maximum number of inputs and outputs with one high speed pulse counter PG card is as shown in the table below Combination of option DIOB AIO Total I O points 2 0 1 1 0 2 DI 59 9 3 16 2 43 9 3 16 1 27 9 3 16 0 DO 35 5 3 10 2 25 5 3 10 1 15 5 3 10 0 Al 9 3 3 2 0 11 3 3 2 1 13 3 3 2 2 AO 9 3 3 2 0 11 8 3 2 1 13 3 3 2 2 PG 1 1 1 Design the number of inputs and outputs with some spare points If the number of inputs and outputs is in shortage or there is no spare points installation of an external PLC is recommended 2 4 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 2 Individual Operation of UPAC Basic operation and test operation in a system consisting of one unit of VG7S without optical option are described here 2 2 1 Preparation NCAUTION After finishing installation wiring and switch setting check the following items before turning the inverter on e Check if wiring is correct e Check if wire dust screws or the like is left e Check
195. O option AO5 of INV6 INT QD6 48 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV6 dynamically 5 22 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 2 System configuration with twelve VG7S s Master VG7S Slave VG7S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 X H f H T hg ee Input output address s M i i IW1 0 to IW1 7 E E E poU UM CR CC QW1 8 to QD1 20 DRE PRENNE LANCE tte carte ee ee IW2 0 to IW2 7 r7 son 00220 amenos mE BD N LUC oem es QW3 8 to QD3 20 MM E D E SREE scans w EN ee a ice 96QWS5 8 to QD5 20 t IW6 0 to IW6 7 96QW6 8 to QD6 20 22W are occupied by one VG7S i IW7 0 to IW7 7 QW7 8 to QD7 20 Same for inverter 8 to 11 901W12 0 to IW12 7 QW12 8 to QD12 20 Fig 5 2 10 5 23 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Control variables IQ area 22W input output These control variables global variables assigned to Control Variables are available when you select VG7 twelve unit system When you use a variable select it from the Control Variables list or specify the table address 1Q area to register the variable and mark the check box for availability in the system definition 1 INVI data The following table lists data exchanged betwe
196. OA Data distinction 32 W 5 16 bit 2 991W4 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W T IW4 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW4 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV4 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai 991W4 7 16 o Ai Ai2 of INV4 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal AQW4 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QWA4 9 2 x Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW4 10 5 Z b Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW4 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 3 13bit required QW4 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW4 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW4 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT 4 QW4 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW4 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW4 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV4 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV4 58 AO used by INV4 are defined QW4 18 27 2 amp AO AO2 of INV4 INT as universal QW4 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV4 INT QD4 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV4 dynamically 5 INVS data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INVS you need inter inverter link option
197. Option Description of Data range Description monitor indication 0 to 32767 T Valid data of the stopping position setting Option Stopping position Positive value internal external is displayed For the monitor 3 command conversion method of the displayed data refer to the column below 0 to 32767 The position in the forward direction counter clockwise rotation from the Z phase datum is Option Datum shaft Positive value displayed monitor 4 position in Z phase The angle of rotation of the shaft in reference to the direction of rotation is displayed in pulses To convert the data into degrees follow the description below Option monitor 5 Position deviation variable Internal stopping position command current position Positive or negative value 500 to 500 pulses 500 to 500 The deviation variable is displayed in the positive or negative value Positive If there is deviation in the forward direction reverse rotation reduces the deviation to zero Negative If there is deviation in the reverse direction forward rotation reduces the deviation to zero 0 is displayed for values exceeding 500 4 2 8 5 Gear selection If a speed reduction means is installed between the motor and the shaft the first slow speed speed control adjustment gain integration constant etc position control gain orientation gain and S curve acceleration deceleration time can be switched in f
198. PAC and VG7S INV3 you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV3 does not have a way to exchange data other than these In addition to UPAC Table 5 2 25 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name d VELLE Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A more information 13 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f S monitor calculation 991W3 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW3 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o 991W3 3 7 5 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 5 16 bit 2 991W3 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W o IW3 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW3 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV3 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW3 7 16 o Ai Ai2 of INV3 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai c used by UPAC is defined as universal QW3 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW3 9 2 Q Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW3 10 5 Z i Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW3 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 3 13bit required QW3 12 7 E Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT c Over
199. QW6 27 10 Q Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW6 28 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW6 29 12 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter QW6 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 INT S Before torque limiter QWE 31 14 Speed auxiliary reference 20000 Nmax INT Z QW6 32 15 Detected speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT v Speed output from motor model QW6 33 16 5 INV6 function code 1 address Use after you Ww a Data transmission at the QWE 34 17 5 Q INV6 function code 1 data check data INT minimum of 10ms is possible QW6 35 18 S INV6 function code 2 address distinction of WwW by defining this 4W area for QW6 36 19 5 5 INV6 function code 2 data individual function INT individual function code when QWE6 37 20 2 9 INV6 function code 3 address code W SI UPAC option is used AQW6 38 21 9 9 INV6 function code 3 data INT QW6 39 22 5 8 INV6 function code 4 address W QW6 40 23 r INV6 function code 4 data INT QW6 41 24 Reserved QW6 42 25 g DO2 DIOB option 10bit of INV6 Data distinction 27 W UPAC controls AO DO of INV6 QW6 43 26 amp AO AO1 of INV6 4000h 10V INT AO DO used by INV6 are QW6 44 27 w AO AO2 of INV6 INT defined as universal 9 QW6 45 28 g AO AO3 of INV6 INT Note that universal definition is QW6 46 29 Z AO AIO option AO4 of INV6 INT not required for DIOB QW6 47 30 2 AO AI
200. R 0000 001F 1 0 No o40 UPAC Address UPAC ADRES 100 255 1 100 No 4 55 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 3 6 Calculation Control Block Diagrams 1 Mechanical Loss Automatic Measuring Control Block TUPAC Mechanical loss Speed command O Mechanical loss automatic measuring command Reads in torque command automatic measuring Automatic measuring completion Mechanical loss torque data file ON for two seconds on completion Use a hardware sequence to build a circuit which uses the completion command IM to turn off the mechanical loss automatic measuring command When you want to stop the automatic measuring on the way turn off the mechanical loss automatic measuring command Material thickness Motor rotation Speed speed reduction ratio Machine rotation speed v f 1 S 2 Wound Diameter Calculation Control Block e 2 e 9 p F DCO 10V UPAC 5 Line speed command Wound diameter VAR from z H woun Pre a reset Actual rotation speed of calculation diameter Hardware NOR S EE winding machine motor calculation Reset to initial sequence or o o diameter T Link 100 to 2000 100 to 2000 mm I Initial diameter Minimum coil 100 to 2000 100 to 2000 mm diameter POD 100 to 2000 100 to 2000 mm KEYPAD Maximum diameter 1 panel T Link Mini
201. RENIC5000 069009 PIO POD Programmable Operation Display Open network PLC or Process Controller Fig 2 1 2 2 2 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 1 2 Examination of Specification NCAUTION link Be aware of the following limitations when examining the specifications e If the system VG7_6UPAC VG7 12UPAC of the project is determined first modification to the other system becomes impossible e Function codes cannot be read from slave VG7S VG7S without UPAC connected via the optical 2 1 2 1 System selection After project creation is selected from D300win the dialog box shown on the right is displayed The UPAC system has the following system options from which you can select the desired one If the system is selected first modification to the other system becomes impossible Examine the system first before selecting Table 2 1 1 System Selection Broadcasting System consisting of 6 or fewer units VECS MEN Broadcasting System consisting of 1 to 12 units Wer TE VERE x 8 Project Wizard NEW Frame A A M CREX Sx MICREX SX P532 SX simulator Sample PH16 a 8j L MICREX SX MICREX SX c PS117 PS74 E MICREX SX Training PHO8 A VG7_12 UPAC Fig 2 1 3 Examine the applicable system
202. T Overwrite on F07 QW1 13 8 E Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW1 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT 4 QW1 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT O QW1 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f calculation a QW1 17 26 5 AO AO1 of INV1 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV1 3 O QW1 18 27 o AO AO2 of INV1 INT AO used by INV1 are defined O F Zo as universal ER QW1 19 28 5 AO AO3 of INV1 INT Sa QD1 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on o 3 INV1 dynamically 5 a 5 24 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 2 INV2 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV2 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV2 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 24 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name EPRE Type See control block diagram for data distinction g A more information 2 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f Sg monitor calculation IW2 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW2 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detecti
203. T gt gt gt gt Lo REMOTE LOCAL n REMOTE LOCAL In this state correct operation of the UPAC function and data exchange between UPAC and VG7S has been verified Press the FWD or REV key on the keypad panel to start simulation simulation speed at 75 r min When 20000 is entered to UNO 01 the speed setting becomes 20000 x maximum speed 1500 r min 20000 1500 r min The 7 segment LED blinks as shown in the figure on the right 2 30 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor MEMO 2 31 efesotomasyon com Control Techn PFI PI E i Pi 3 Il VG7 Interface 3 1 Memory Interface 3 2 Application Creation Examples 3 3 VG7S Control Block Diagram List efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 Memory Interface 3 1 1 Giving Basic Commands 3 1 1 1 Operation command CAUTION e To operate from UPAC short circuit FWD and REV with CM at the terminal block If only one terminal is short circuited the motor rotates when 038 UPAC start stop is set at 0 Stop Be sure to short circuit across FWD and CM and across REV and CM 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 1 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Control data CW 1 QWHO 22 5 standard DIOA 16 bit Data type 32 WORD UPAC VG7S
204. The later sequence is processed with software and therefore there is no problem if the speed is smaller than 60 r min Program a special sequence for Z phase detection to be called only immediately after the power is turned on Applicable ROM version H10060 H20060 or later 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 34 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks IWO 10 11 Position detection built in or PG PD 1 1 INT VG7S UPAC 96IWLI 11 12 Position detection Z phase input PG PD 1 1 INT VG7S UPAC Detection of the Z phase reference position is effective for models equipped with the OPC VG7 PG PD option s For details of the PG option refer to the description of operation in the VG7S User s Manual 2 The PG pulse acquisition method is similar to Recognition of Z phase by software because of difference between PG CNT and PG CNT Z that described in section 3 1 5 2 PG pulse Task A acquisition method 1 When the results of L m 9 differentiation of the above two memories in the task are PG CNT and PG CNT Z the cumulative PG CNT Z data in the task period tms is reset to zero upon detection of t Period ms PG CNT Z ORT DATA ior ORT_DATA i o d hardware Z phase Each memory is compared j a dE ro with each other in the next task and if Li in reference to the Z phase
205. U DO B E18 Y4 terminal function Y4 function 0 to 47 1 4 x When U54 is 4 specify 25 U DO P E19 Y5 terminal function Y5 function 0 to 47 1 14 x When U54 is 5 specify 25 U DO E49 Ai 1 terminal function Ai 1 function 0 to 18 Specify 14 U AI 1 0 x Assign for dancer roll position input 2 Ai 2 terminal function Ai 2 function 0 to 18 1 0 x When U42 is not 0 specify 14 U AI o AO1 i uq ity an AO1 function function 0to 31 1 1 O When U43 is not 1 specify 30 U AO AO2 i ug ity an AO2 function function 0to 31 1 6 When U44 is not 1 specify 30 U AO AO3 function AS 01031 MET 3 O When U45 is not 1 specify 30 U AO function Download the UPAC software specify 1 After specifying 1 at 038 STOP C to IUE x All save function All save o1 at 038 and save the initial data 1 0 specify 1 to save all initial U code data UPAC start stop UPAG 0102 Specify 1 at 038 ls 0 x Specify 1 at 038 operation UPAC address Specify the same communication setting 100 to 255 1 100 x RS485 station number in the UPAC system definition as 040 UPAC address 4 8 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 1 3 3 Description of each function code Max line speed Setting 0 to 1
206. U54 0 No assignment to Y1 to Y5 U54 1 Assign to Y1 U54 2 Assign to Y2 U54 3 Assign to Y3 U54 4 Assign to Y4 U54 5 Assign to Y5 4 1 3 4 Option monitor Table 4 1 5 Function Indication on Data dienian Minimum R k code LCD screen aa c Spaying range increment emaks OP2 Calculated OP3 winding Option monitor 3 O to 2000 0 to 2000 mm mm 1 diameter op4 Line speed Option monitor 4 lo to 1000 t m min 1 p 1000 m min A OP5 Dancer roll Option monitor 5 200 to 200 to 200 9 1 When a voltage specified at U05 or U06 is input 100 96 is position 200 displayed ope Offset Option monitor 6 aa to 100 to 100 1 n n line speed or maximum motor speed is assumed to 4 20 TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 WPS VG7 POS WPS VG7 POS is packaged software for controlling the orientation position Windows Personal Computer Software Package Position control system on VG7S The package features the following items e The encoder resolution can be selected from seven options of 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 and 8192 according to the requirement of the stopping accuracy of the machine shaft e Four stopping position commands can be preset inside among which the target one is selected with a contact e The stopping position comm
207. UINT MW 11 340 0414h 1 Active Yes Function select 2 Inverse action 1 3 Inverse action 2 Oto 1 H21 h21 1 UINT MW11 341 0415h Command select 0 Keypad panel or input at 12 70 Yes 1 Analog input PIDS H22 h22 MW 11 342 0416h 0 000 to 1 000 to 10 000 Multiplication 4 Yes H23 h23 MW 11 343 0417h J Igain 0 00 to 1 00 to 100 00 s 3 Yes H25 MW 11 345 0419h Upper limit 300 to 100 to 300 Yes H26 h26 MW11 346 041Ah 300 to 100 to 300 96 Yes 0t02 H27 hn27 t UINT mw11 347 041Bh Speed command select 9 Ineffective 95 Yes 1 PID selection 2 Auxiliary speed selection H28 h28 MW11 348 041Ch Droop control 0 0 to 25 0 96 2 Yes 40 Yes Oto 1 Function provided to protect codes from inadvertent changes through link T Link RS485 etc Link function 0 Write enable 9 neg n29 UINT MW 11 349 041Dh Data protection via link 1 Write protect The link area is divided into two areas regular code area mentioned above and command data area S The S area is defined with H30 T itor command data operation FWD REV x H30 h30 UINT MW 11 350 041Eh Link operation x Oo O 0 to 1 to 255 RS485 setting The station address of RS485 is set 9 H31 n31 f JUINT MW11 351 O41Fh Station address Broadcast 0 RTU 99 Fuji Address 1 to 255 72 Yes Yes 73 Yes 74 Yes 0to3 Forced stop Er5 Operation for H33 time and alarm Er5 H
208. UPAC f04 f AT MW11 4 UINT FO4 M1 motor mf Tasks fos f AT MU11 5 UINT FOS M1 motor Global Variables f07 f AT MU11 7 WORD FO Accelerat Control Variables f08 f AT MW11 6 WORD FO8 Decelerat mS f10 f AT 5MU11 10 UINT F10 M1 electr fll f AT MW11 11 WORD F11 M1 electr fiz f AT 5MUJ11 12 UINT F12 M1 electr fil4 f AT 5MU11 14 UINT F14 Restart mi f17 f AT MW11 17 UINT Fi Gain for f18 f AT MW11 18 INT F18 Bias for f20 f AT 5MU11 20 UINT F20 DC brake f21 f AT 5MU11 21 UINT F21 DC brake f22 f AT MW11 22 UINT F22 DC brake 4 f23 f AT 5MU11 23 UINT F23 Starting JE ni Function Lis For Help press F1 Line 1 Row8 C 2GB 74 Fig 5 2 11 The user uses this information to refer to or change function codes In the figure below select a variable on the worksheet select the Global G range and select Function List for the global variable worksheet W to list the function codes in the alphabetical order in a variable list V resource C VG7 6 UPAC The user selects this to create a program without paying attention on the address MW L1 Variable X Variable list of Resource C_VG7_6 R_UP4C f 3 f FO3 M1 motor parameters setting M1 max speed E Cana Properties Scope Local Global Global Scope Help Local Variables Worksheets Global Variables W orksheets JLADDERY Function List Bilobal
209. VI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 7 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWE 19 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT UPAC VG7S Before torque limit O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 There are two methods for the torque reference operation of torque reference 1 and operation of torque reference 2 unavailable for a 12 unit system Because torque reference 1 is inserted immediately after the ASR output of the VG7S control some of standard torque control systems torque bias torque limit of VG7S can be used Torque reference 2 is inserted immediately before the torque current reference calculation 1 How to use To reflect the torque reference calculated at UPAC on VG7S place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset In the figure below torque reference 1 is switched Observer Iculati UPAC SW CU Son UPAC SW OFF ae Torque Speed control system limit ON R Magnetic Torque bias flux Torque reference 1 from reference UPAC OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Torque reference 2 from UPAC Fig 3 1 8 Place a check mark at the torque reference 1 check box TEE xj in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at Inverter 1 Output word UPAC System_Definition I O group setting of the Use Word Name TE e oO 1 Speed se
210. Variables Control Variables Function List Fig 5 2 12 5 31 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 2 3 2 Addresses updated at high speed To update the function code data at minimum ms intervals directly access the high speed updating address found in section 5 2 3 3 Function code list With this method parameters can be accessed at high speeds which is used to access control data using the input output memory IQ For details of the accessing method refer to section 3 1 2 2 High speed data updating Be careful that the data cannot be referred to with this method 5 2 3 3 Function code list Table 5 2 37 Description of list Fcode Identification code of function code 60 ms updating and Name and type of variable and address assignment of function code that can be referred to or updated at a referencing data constant period of 60 ms from UPAC into VG7S where UPAC is installed High speed updating Assigned address of function code of VG7S where UPAC is installed and two or more units of VG7S linked address via optical link for updating at a minimum period of 1 ms The type of the called data is always integer INT The address is the same as the RS485 communication NO Name Function code name Setting range Indicates the setting range and definition of the data Type Definition of the scale of the data and meaning Written by UPAC
211. W Addition timer 7 32x 8 W Timer 128 x 8 W Other system FB area Reserve memory size per POU Use reserve memory Not use Non retain memory 0 Retain memory 0 User FB memory 0 I O group setting Default Input selection Input signal se inverter 23 4 zx eo N U 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference monitor o Torque reference 2 o Real speed detected speed value o Control data CW standard DIOA option 16bit o o o o o Operation status SW Line speed input Ai of INV Ai Ai of INV Ai2 ANOARWNDM X XX X X XO X X X XXX XXX OXOXOXOXx X XX XX X X X O1 Oooooooooo X X XX X X X XM X X X XX X KX X Ow X X X XX XXX Oo X X X X X XXX X X X X X XXX X X X X X XXX Input selection Option I O input 1 1 0 Module DI 16 points 1 48 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup Output selection Output signal se inverter 23 4 zx eo e N U 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f o Torque reference 1 o Control data CW o Universal DO1 standard DIOA option 13bit o Acceleration time o Deceleration time o o o o o o o o o Torque limiter level 1 Torque limiter level 2 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f AO of INV AO1 AO of INV AO2 AO of INV AO3 Dynamic switch 1 DSW1 Dynamic switch 2 DSW2 OAONDOABRWNM X X X X X X X X KX X XK XK XK X X X X X X X
212. X1 to X9 and X11 to X14 and operation status 1 How to use To refer to the data place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset Place a check mark at the check box of the corresponding data items in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen 1 0 Group setting xj Inverter 1 Input word Use Word Name a 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference monitor Torque reference 2 3 Torque current reference final 4 Magnetic flux reference final 5 Real speed detected speed value 6 8 Control data Cw standard DIDA 15bit Operation stati IONS Speed setting 3 Line speed input 10 pulse train position reference PG PR 11 Position detection build in or PG PD J 12 Position detection Z phase inputJ PG PD 13 Position reference 14 DI of INV1 DIOB option 16bit 15 Aiof INV1 Ail quency reference V f Cancel Fig 3 1 32 The control input and operation status data are referred to in word information The data format is as shown below Control data CW operation status 15 8 7 0 E See Control data CW type 32 Operation status SW type 21 0 FWD eee FWD forward ope ration 1 REV HMM 2 XA creer e MR 3 pQ eee e A X3 n MM 5 XA MM 6 XB e MM 7 XO s MH 8 T7 se n Q XB 10 XQ s
213. YC EXITE imiter cancel N LIM H41 CCL 57 H42 torque current command cancel H42 CCL F40 torque limiting mode 1 canc Torque limit level 1 2 selection TL2 TL1 Bypass BPS 38 Torque bias command 1 2 37 TB1 38 TB2 Droop selection DROOP Ai 1 zero hold ZH AM Ai 2 zero hold ZH AI2 Ai 3 zero hold AIO option ZH AI3 Ai 4 zero hold AIO option ZH AI4 Ai 1 polarity inversion REV AI1 Ai 2 polarity inversion REV AI2 Ai 3 polarity inversion AIO option REV AI3 Ai 4 polarity inversion AIO option REV AI4 PID output inversion selection PID INV PG alarm cancel PG CCL Under voltage cancel LU CCL Ai torque bias hold H TB STOP 1 The motor decelerates and stops in normal deceleration time STOP1 STOP 2 The motor decelerates and stop time 4 STOP2 STOP 3 The motor decelerates and stop STOP3 DIA data latch DIA option DIA DIB data latch DIB option DIB Multi winding motor cancel SI MWS option MT CCL 58 59 60 61 62 63 OptionDi 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 DI1 to 6 Written by UPAC selection 4 RT1 5 RT2 HLD BX RST THR JOG N1 N2 N1 M CH2 M CH3 DCBRK CLR CRP N2 N1 ontrol DOWN WE KP KP PID IVS LOCK Yes el H40 CCL s in deceleration S with max torque ion 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ion Yes Yes Yes Yes 57 Yes 57 Yes Yes The underlined part indicates the factory setting
214. a Universal DO1 standard DIO4 option 13bit Acceleration time Deceleration time 9 Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f Torque reference 2 13 Torque bias 14 Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed gt Ol JOOOOOL Cancel Fig 3 1 2 Note To invalidate FWD and REV operations of UPAC while validating control over X1 through X14 place a check mark at the control data CW and according to the AND logic condition OR the content of the corresponding memory with the following data and write the result to the control data CW 0000 0000 0000 0011 binary 3 Operation from UPAC To issue operation commands from OFF Forward rotation UPAC Forward rotation command P O command from external device Place a check mark at the control data CW check box in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at System_Definition I O group setting of UPAC This makes operation of FWD REV and X1 through X14 operation commands and control input commands of UPAC valid In the figure on the right the operation from UPAC concerning the forward rotation command is validated Because of operation from UPAC external commands must be always turned on short circuited at terminal block If only one terminal is short circuited at the terminal block when UPAC is stopped with 0 at 038 UPAC start stop
215. a All codes can be read or written only at the master inverter equipped inverter 1 of a 6 unit system can with UPAC Only the 4W function code data can be written at the slave inverter Broadcasting method Q area only 32W Only the master can refer to 18W in the area be used 1 14 v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 2 2 3 External dimensions and accessories Y a FH l 15 E 7 i IE N ETH UTE 2 30 a CN1 u in eu CO ex e xS lp E e ko FF EIE Er wn 11 5 MADE IN JAPAN S one CN2 CN2 gi SW V CN zn Y Y s 40 10 50 Unit mm Fig 1 2 7 External dimensions of option PCB Plastic optical fiber cable 5m viv DD Connector with a locking Optical plastic cable Connector with a locking mechanism gray mechanism dark brown Fig 1 2 8 Plastic optical fiber cable efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 1 Receiving inspection When the product is de
216. a of function code 3 of INV1 x OOOOOO8 JOL Example To give a 60 torque bias write 6000 7 cel Fig 3 1 13 3 7 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 2 Referencing or Updating Function Codes NCAUTION e There are some write protected function codes in UPAC Write protected codes P02 H01 H02 H03 H68 H71 035 040 SOI S12 The data is written from UPAC to RAM where the data evaporated when the power is turned off Because the data evaporates when the power is turned off change the default value at the keypad panel There are two methods for the referencing and writing of function codes referencing and writing at 60 ms refreshment intervals and high speed minimum 1 ms writing Use the former one for the data to be referred to or changed when the power is turned on and use the latter for the data changed dynamically in interlock with the control 3 1 2 1 Referencing and updating at 60 ms refreshment intervals lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o Use the data for calculation at UPAC based on referenced function code F E C U data or for modification of function codes in the power up sequence Refer to the type in the function code list for scale conversion of the data For example data type 5 of function code F44 Torque limit level 1 indicates a signed value with two decimal places Therefore 1000 i
217. adjustment e to 10 dark Yes The unit of the input power and motor selection M1 2 UINT MWw11 60 003Ch Output unit HP KW setting OF function code setting is defined on the LED Yes 0 kW 1 HP U ASR 1 setting F60 F61 61 1 NT MW11 61 003Dh ASR 1 P Gain 0 1 to 10 0 to 200 0 Multiplication 2 Yes ASR 1 1 0 010 to 0 200 to 1 000 s rez ANN TIBA 4j Q0SEN Integration constant 1 000 P control LJ You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 34 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written F code Variabi updating Name Setting range Type by F63 MW11 63 003Fh ASR 1 FF Gain 0 000 to 9 999 s Yes F64 EE MW11 64 0040h ASR 1 input filter 0 000 to 0 040 to 5 000 s Yes F65 Sa MW11 65 0041h ASR 1 detection filter 0 000 to 0 005 to 0 100 s Yes ree ree r ur Mw11 66 0042h ASR 1 output filter 0 000 to 0 002 to 0 100 s Yes S curve F67 CETT MW 11 67 0043h Acceleration start side 1 0 to 50 Yes S curve 8i F68 rest jur MW11 68 0044h Acceleration end side 1 0 to 50 Yes S curve 9 9 F69 Eu MW11 69 0045h Deceleration start side 1 0 to 50 Yes 6 S curve o F70 MW11 70 0046h
218. age gain tuning 62 Yes executed upon no connection of motor 3 Voltage offset tuning 4 Inter phase imbalance tuning 5 Magnetic pole position auto tuning for synchronous motor 6 Shunt resistance gain tuning LI You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 44 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and R referencing data High speed F code Variable updating Name Setting range name 0 to 9999 H72 h72 f UINT MW11 392 0448h For manufacturer 3 0 Standard 1 to 9999 Undecided 0 to 9999 H73 h73 f UINT MW11 393 0449h For manufacturer 4 0 Standard 1 to 9999 Undecided Table 5 2 43 A Alternative Motor Parameters 60 ms updating and A High speed Written F code referencing data updating Setting range by Address address UPAC 0to 1 M2 motor parameter setting M2 is exclusively for vector control of induction motor A01 NT MW11401 0501h M2 control method 0 Vector control Yes 1 Sensorless vector control F j When F60 0 0 00 to 500 00kW A02 NT MW11 402 0502h M2 rated capacity When F60 1 0 00 to 600 00HP Yes 0 01 to 99 99A A03 WORD MW11 403 0503h M2 rated current 100 0 to 999 9A Yes 1000 to 2000A A04 MW11 404 0504h M2
219. al motor exclusively for VG7 The data for the corresponding motor is automatically set at F04 F05 and P03 to P27 Wii motor parameter settin F04 F05 and P03 through P27 are write P02 p02 f UINT MW11 290 0302h UM tipos ioa 9 protected 82 No 36 P OTHER F04 F05 and P03 through P27 do not change F04 F05 and P03 through P27 are write protected 37 OTHER F04 F05 and P03 through P27 do not change F04 F05 and P03 through P27 are not write protected When F60 0 0 00 to 500 00kW P03 UINT 70MW 11 291 0303h M1 rated capacity When F60 1 0 00 to 600 00HP 3 Yes 0 01 to 99 99A P04 WORD MW11 292 0304h M1 rated current 100 0 to 999 9A 13 Yes 1000 to 2000A P05 UINT 96MW 11 293 0305h M1 poles 2 to 4 to 30 Poles Yes Po6 poe t UINT MW11 294 0306h M1 R1 0 00 to 30 00 Yes P07 UINT _ MW11 295 0307h M1 X 0 00 to 50 00 Yes 0 01 to 99 99A P08 p08_f WORD MW11 296 0308h M1 exciting current 100 0 to 999 9A 13 Yes 1000 to 2000A 0 01 to 99 99A P09 WORD MW11 297 0309h M1 torque current 100 0 to 999 9A 13 Yes 1000 to 2000A P10 MW11 298 030Ah M1 slip driving 0 001 to 10 000 Hz 4 Yes P14 MW 11 299 030Bh M1 slip braking 0 001 to 10 000 Hz 4 Yes P12 MW 11 300 030Ch M1 iron loss coefficient 1 0 00 to 10 00 Yes P13 MW11 301 030Dh M1 iron loss coefficient 2 0 00 to 10 00 Yes P14 MW 11 302 030Eh M1 iron loss coefficient 3 0 00 to 10 00 Yes M1 magnetic saturation
220. all usage states are ON displayed as ON 1 If some usage states are ON displayed as gray Mi If all usage states are OFF displayed as OFF L Each time you click the check box the state changes as follows LI5 vI PLI PsUTOSL P MC MC EME Advanced setting for individual words 1 0 Group setting x If you click the Details button or double click an item the following screen for the advanced setting appears Inverter 1 Qutput word Address of function code 1 of INY1 17 Data of function code 1 of INV1 Address of function code 2 of INV1 18 Data of function code 2 of INV1 All 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 21 Data of function code 3 of INV1 22 Address of function code 4 of INV1 23 Data of function code 4 of INV1 24 Reserve 25 DO2 of INV1 DIOB option 1 Obit AD of INV1 A01 27 AO of INV1 02 28 AO of INV1 03 29 AD of INV1 810 option 404 30 AO of INV1 AIO option 405 gt OOB 5 5 E y w o Cancel Fig 1 3 48 Advanced setting screen for individual words The following table describes the operation Table 1 3 4 Operation on Details setting screen Item Description Use check box Sets individual words to enabled disabled Word No Shows word number beginning with 1 Name Shows signal name All button Set all points to ON OFF at once If more
221. alue 0 1 Define the operation while stopping Set to accelerate over the second slow speed or not in orientation operation 0 Stop in shortest time may accelerate 1 Stop without accelerating from current speed Table 4 2 9 State UNO 03 Operation Operation wave form Spindle rotation speed N1 First slow speed E o a Any c 9 E Position a i i deviation ORT ON 360 11 25 0 00 Target stop position Spindle rotation speed z i N1 First slow speed AL o a o Any c 2 w 2 Position ORT ON 360 ties coo VIN Target stop position pum N1 First slow speed Mode for stopping in Spindle rotation speed Setting 0 shortest time may E Position z accelerate NE TEF deviation y ORT ON 11 25 0 00 3 Target stop position o 5 N1 First slow speed E Mode for E stopping Spindle rotation speed 4 Without Setting 1 accelerating from current speed Position j deviation 11 25 0 00 Target stop position 4 36 v I o x Q Qa ao e 9 E D efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 7 4 Orientation from a stopping state Direction of orientation from stopping state Setting 0 1 Orientation mode selection Setting 0 1 U02 Select the orientation method from a stopping state between random pat
222. and can be given externally from our MICREX series PLC 16 point digital input RS485 communication via POD or the like or Field Bus The stopping position latch function can be used to stop at multiple points e Because the orientation function is shared by the UPAC option all the standard functions of the VG7 inverter can be used without limitations To realize the orientation function the MCA OPC VG7 PG option is necessary in addition to the UPAC option For the hardware specification installation method and other details of the option refer to the VG7S USER S MANUAL MEH407 This packaged software is included in the CD ROM of WPS VG7 PCL loader software and provided free of charge To configure a system using this package agreement with the following description is necessary Terms of Agreement You are requested to agree with the following items If you do not agree with them do not use WPS VG7 POS packaged software For inquiries about the agreement items contact our sales person 1 Function codes UNO 01 through 63 used for orientation control are set at 0 before shipment from our factory The user must change the setting of necessary parameters voluntarily according to the purpose 2 A built in battery of UPAC backs the data The life of the battery is five years at 25 C The battery life is reduced during operation at higher temperatures When the battery life is reached UPAC alarm ErA is displayed If
223. and deceleration can be individually specified Values at the three points minimum winding diameter DS middle winding diameter DM and maximum winding diameter DL can be specified When the settings U13 U14 U16 and U17 at the middle winding diameter DM and the maximum winding diameter DL are specified at 0 the settings U12 and U15 for the minimum winding diameter DS is applied to the maximum winding diameter Flat characteristic 4 10 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software P gain U15 setting APR Pad DS Line speed acceleration 46 deceleration in progress APR Pad DM l U17 Constant line speed APR Pad DL U12 2 U13 Bos PR Pc DS A PR Pc DM A PR Pc DL i I Winding diameter U11 j Min winding te hain winding winding diameter i diameter diameter Fig 4 1 7 P gain U15 settin A Li d acceleration g RO ere aanpas The figure on the left indicates the P gain setting with zero settings U13 U14 U16 and U17 of the middle winding diameter DM and maximum winding diameter DL Constant line speed U12 APR Pc DS Winding diameter U11 U03 T is 5 Middle Max P WINCINY winding winding diameter diameter diameter Fig 4 1 8 U18 ASR I Setting 0 to 10 000 0 00 to 100 00 s APR D Setting 0 to 1 000 0 00 to 10 00 s u31 APR output limit Setting 0 to 200 0 to 200
224. anical loss is measured the motor accelerates to the maximum rotation speed again to automatically measure the acceleration torque It is dangerous and you should watch for eight minutes until the measuring is completed Keep away from your winding machine 2 Set Check Fixed Constants Start the UPAC and check the constants 038 1 or 2 To prevent a malfunction reset the I O definition for UPAC gt INV Uncheck the check marks for the individual output in the I O group setting in System Definition Record the existing setting for later recovery 1 Dedicated Software for Winding Machines The current software is configured for a winding machine 2 I O Check Experimentally apply external DI s and use the online monitor of the UPAC to check their state Use the online monitor of the UPAC to check whether external analog inputs are received as correct values 3 Checking Individual Constants Check if input values set by using the user parameters are received in the UPAC as correct values If you can experimentally provide the tension command value and the like check the calculated torque value 3 Adjusting Control Parameters Conduct individual adjusting with an actual operation while raw material is mounted Set the I O definition for UPAC gt INV Uncheck the check marks for the individual output in the I O group setting in System Definition Record the existing setting for later recovery 1 Setting Individual Condit
225. ard or reverse rotation command from UPAC is two bits in the lower order of the control data CW in the word memory 0 at the corresponding bit is OFF while 1 is ON Control data CW operation command type 32 15 8 7 0 g FWD Forward rotation operation command 1 REV Reverse rotation operation command 2 to 15 X1 to X14 RST 3 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Operation from outside other than UPAC To operate without relations to UPAC according to operation commands from external device Clear the control data CW check box in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at System Definition I O group setting of UPAC This operation makes operation of FWD REV X1 through X14 operation commands and control input commands of UPAC invalid In the figure on the right the link from UPAC concerning the forward rotation command is canceled Because this causes word level control including FWD REV and X1 through X14 there is the following precaution Forward rotation command OE ano Forward rotation from external device command ON Forward rotation OPC VG7 UPAC ar TOA OPC VG7 SI UPAC command of UPAC im 1 0 Group setting x m Inverter 1 Output word 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f Torque reference 1 Torque current reference Magnetic flux reference Control dat
226. ble to broadcasting Table 3 1 28 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks IWO 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT VG7S UPAC After torque limit O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 There are two methods for torque monitoring torque reference 2 after torque limit and torque current reference not for 12 unit system where torque reference 2 is divided by the magnetic flux reference 1 How to use lt 1 E 5 Ej fa e Observer calculation Torque limit command Torque UPAC SW current UPAC SW Torque 1 OFF OFF UPAC SW OFF reference orque I A Torque reference reference T QOH limit selection _0 0 _ gt ASR selection A A yA ON ON Magnetic flux reference eae eet l Torque reference 2 OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Doc ctu EI 4 la Torque current reference Fig 3 1 30 Place a check mark at either torque Lnpeer d reference 2 or torque current reference or both of them in the I O Group setting Rs screen of output definition at UPAC ord Name System Definition VO group setting 1 p pm eden reference monitor M orque reference 2 of the D300win screen Next download M Torque current reference final the system definition and reset Magnetic flux reference final Al Control data Cw J standard DIOA 16bit
227. cation link Inverter being stopped The protective function does not work if the communication link is not established The conditions for failure of establishment of the communication link are Protective Inverter running Illegal setting function code function Protective function inverter to inverter link error is developed if the System Definition communication link is not established Broken wire in communication link broken wire bending at 35 mm or a smaller curvature etc The option is not compatible with degeneracy operation Fail soft When inverters are connected via optical link in a system consisting of operation total n units 2 lt n x 156 n is an integer the communication link is lost if x 1 lt x lt n 1 xis an integer units of inverters are turned off Turn on all n units of inverters or control power of the inverters Software specifications Item Specification Remarks H10060 or later H20060 or later ROM version Operate at the above ROM versions Use the I O check at the keypad panel to check the ROM version Definition of Master slave function code 035 036 If these settings are wrong the 036 set only at master communication link is not connection established Master slave method Selected in 6 12 unit system I Q area selection between 50W and 22W With the broadcasting method Function code area only the output selection of Input output dat
228. causing a resource one CPU system to stop Table 5 2 2 Address Name Description MX 10 2 0 CPU error 1 when major fault occurs to its CPU module MX 10 2 1 Power abnormality 1 when power is disconnected MX 10 2 2 Memory error led error is present in memory module of its CPU MX 10 2 3 VG7S interface fault 1 when error is presents in interface with VG7S MX 10 24 Application abnormality ee is present in application program or MX 10 2 5 Not used MX 10 2 6 Not used MX 10 2 7 to Not used MX 10 2 12 MX 10 2 13 Not used MX 10 2 14 Not used MX 10 2 15 User major fault 1 when any bit of user major fault flag MX 10 14 0 to MX 10 16 15 is set to ON in application program 5 10 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 4 Resource minor fault factors MW 10 4 Read only Fault factors in the presence of which resource continues operation Table 5 2 3 Address Name Description 96 MX 10 4 0 MX 104 1 Notused MX 10 4 2 Memory error sy error is present in the memory module of its CPU MX 10 4 3 Not used MX 10 4 4 Application abnormality eee ad is present in application program or MX 10 4 5 Not used MX 10 4 6 Not used MX 10 4 7 to Not used MX 10 4 12 MX 10 4 13 Not used MX 10 4
229. cedure alarm Er6 is caused SW1 rotary switch Set all the slaves at 1 Slave cR qum 1 If the switch is set at other than 1 operation procedure 1 to 11 de alarm Er6 is caused 2109 Invalid Do not set in these positions Otherwise operation procedure alarm Er6 is caused Set the station switch of the master at 0 and that of all the slaves at 1 The station with SW 1 being 0 is defined to be the master while that with SW 1 being 1 is defined to be a slave Fig 1 2 13 Table 1 2 11 Switch on card SW 2 Part No S MTM Function Remarks OFF OFF Do not set ON OFF These settings are used for definition of SW 2 DIP 7 other applications and therefore no warning switch OFF ON is displayed ON ON UPAC The optical option is sued in the UPAC SI system system DIP switch shown on the left is located at the lower end of the option Be sure to set the two elements at ON After the above settings are given the optical option becomes available as a UPAC system Fig 1 2 14 1 20 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 3 Connection of optical cable NCAUTION e f the optical cable is bent at a curvature smaller than 35 mm for a long time optical communication does not function correctly and inverter to inverter link error Erb is caused Avoid routing the cable at curvatures sma
230. chanical system or play in the gear the mechanical system must be examined and adjusted If the noise is not reduced after adjustment of the mechanical system electrical countermeasures must be taken so that the standard functions of VG7 gain and integration time of dancer control filter and other parameters are used for adjustment Please note that we will not meet requests to add special control applications to UPAC or to the main body of VG7 5 Reproduction of the whole or a part of the program or leasing or selling to the third party is prohibited in the scope of the Japanese Copyright Law 6 There are no limitations to voluntary addition change or deletion by the customer for program development based on this dancer control program We will provide cooperation and consultation for technical support concerning program development 7 We will assume no responsibility for the direct or indirect material losses or damage caused by the WPS VG7 DAN program itself or change addition or deletion to the program 4 I agree with the above description Signature 4 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 1 1 Examination of System 4 1 1 1 Specification Table 4 1 1 Item Specification of dancer control Model of option card OPC VG7 UPAC To use synchro transmitter MCA OPC VG7 SN Packaged software Dancer control package Version 1100
231. connected is displayed as a state in the control screen on the left side of the figure shown below H D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER OI x es File Edit View Project Build Objects mem Online Extras Window Help Os u ae xo e c Soe a Ctrl F10 5 amp amp QR e3 3h e G R_UPAC CPUO SR ac a Pre State Resource Control IE J CPUO i PC is not connected State Run Monfatal failure Key state Key state TERM d i ri C Individual operation Cg io Stop Irina Start Stop Initial start Start Heset Start Reset Es Download Upload Download Upload Vent Sear Verify Hear Eogam contol salendav vv atch Program control Calendar W atch nf pn Resource mitanmation Failure diagnosis Resource information Eailure diagnosis Password Password Show Contro be Fig 2 4 12 2 25 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 Stopping UPAC Click on the Stop S button of the control A Stop dialog box appears Select Yes Y R UPAC CPUO 0 D e 9 fe 5 m x D 3 0 aiseg pue uonejedaJjg Fig 2 4 13 4 Downloading Check that the state of the control is Stop as shown in the figure below and click on the Download D but
232. cription 4 48 4 3 5 Table for Setting Relevant Parameters none 4 54 4 3 6 Calculation Control Block Diagrams 4 56 5 UPAC Programming Specification gt 5 1 5 1 Performance Specification 5 1 5 2 Memory 5 3 5 2 1 Memory Map 5 3 5 2 2 Input output Address Assignment 5 16 5 2 3 Function Code Area Address Assignment IPIE TIPP IP IE E ener 5 31 5 2 4 Option Monitor Area Address Assignment css 5 59 5 2 5 User Application RAS Area Address Assignment PT CR C RON COR 5 59 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 6 1 General Inspection ltems 6 1 6 1 1 Inspection Interval 6 1 6 1 2 Inspection Item 6666 6 1 6 2 Battery Change n 6 2 6 2 1 Batter Changing Procedure 6 2 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor adJLdgJAmi Jn I Preparation of System and Startup 1 1 System Configuration of UPAC 1 2 Preparation of Option 1 3 Preparation of Software efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 1 System Configuration of UPAC Install D300win UPAC Upgrade to the PC to use it as a programming tool for the VG7S UPAC SI system shown below In the syst
233. ction Parr ere er rier CR ret oe er er CORR er ee 3 42 3 3 4 Motor Speed and Line Speed Detection conso 3 43 3 3 5 Pulse Train Reference Input Section and Position Detection Section 3 44 3 3 6 Speed Control and Torque Reference Section CR a ee ee a ee ET 3 45 3 3 7 Torque Limit Torque Current Reference and Magnetic Flux Reference Section 3 46 3 3 8 Current Control and Vector Control Section CR ITI IIT IET IP 3 47 3 3 9 Function Code Writing Permission and Saving rere E EN S ee oe EN ee 3 48 4 Packaged Software a5 lal by RR CRCR NU ROR am RR RR 2 8 ane 4 1 4 1 WPS VG7 DAN cre ie eae ee ee ae ee ee E 4 1 4 1 1 Examination of System 4 2 4 1 2 Control Block Diagrams 4 4 4 1 3 Function Code Pee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee 16 4 6 4 2 WPS VG7 POS re ELLETENETEN 4 21 4 2 1 Examination of System 4 22 4 2 2 Basic Connection Diagram 4 27 4 2 3 Control Block n 4 29 4 2 4 Function Code DDR IE UIDERI ee E EE 4 30 4 2 5 Preparation for Operation 4 31 4 2 6 Control Command 4 33 4 2 7 ORT Stopping Action 0 4 35 4 2 8 Input Output Specification 4 39 4 2 9 Troubleshooting 0666n 4 42 4 3 WPS VG7 TEN n 4 43 4 3 1 System Consideration esetet 4 44 4 3 2 Input Output Standard Interface single inverter is used 4 45 4 3 3 How to Adjust RR EORR CR IR OR RR EON CROIRE CR ee eT 4 A7 4 3 4 Parameter Des
234. ction code 2 of INVI 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 21 Data of function code 3 of INVI All 22 Address of function code 4 of INV1 To operate the state of AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 23 Data of function code 4 of INVI 24 Reserv and AOS5 from UPAC assign each output to the C 25 D 2eflNVI 0108 option 26 AO of INV1 401 universal AO U AO 27 AD of INV1 A02 1 1 1 m 28 AO of INV1 A03 Each analog output is assigned to various purposes such EL a ANTAD eigen as the torque current command in the factory shipment D Der to To shut off these functions assignment of U AO is 32 Dynamic switch 2DSW2 necessary Cancel A 4000h 16384d digital amount is calculated and converted by UPAC into a FRERES mess vum ax eae BUE 10V analog output bD anelirss caanme lt ares se The gain bias and filter functions can be ja A used as standard features Refer to Chapter nH 4 for details d E B Use the I O check at the keypad panel to TE pa Dan AO1 Output monitor the analog output If 15555 E E LADDER type INT is displayed when an LADDERV AO DATA INV143 UNIAO1 AO DATA variable is monitored as shown Les is M in the figure on the right the actual output Pe s RR is 9 49V 10V x 15555 16384 when the gain is 1 and the bias is 0 Eid R_UPAC UF e LI el 1522 C gt 2GB 7 Fig 3 1 25 3 17 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson sa
235. d D300win Help delete or reinstall the UPAC support function program in the same procedure as shown E D300win File Divide amp Merge Notes on use of D300win SX Control Utility SX simulator S ample Easy operation menu UPAC setup Fig 1 3 18 2 The dialog box for modifying repairing or removing the program is displayed CMS aes D300win Setup x Welcome Modify repair or remove the program cy amp Welcome to the D300win Setup Maintenance program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below o Select new program components to add or select currently installed components to remove Repair iP Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup C Remove 3 Remove all installed components instal Seld Fig 1 3 19 3 Select the Modify M option button and click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button The Select components dialog box is displayed D300win Setup x Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Cy Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to install fv SX simulator Template S ample a Description E m SPS_A Sample This is a function to execute SPS R definition files Sample 2 ne renu emae O SPS_R Template Sample Bez ESI en m PageLayout iv SX Control Utility POD cooperated su
236. d 0to4 0 38400bps 1 19200bps Communication definition 2 9600bps 037_f 70MW 11 501 0625h setting 3 4800bps No 4 2400bps Tens digit Parity bit and stop bits Oto 2 0 No parity 2 stop bits 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 0to2 0 UPAC stop 038 038 f UINT mw11 502 0626h Bie d 1 UPAC start No p 2 UPAC start initial start Controls starting and stopping of UPAC 00 to 1F Set the corresponding area for changing UPAC during stoppage 0 Hold 039 1039 f WORD Mw11 503 UPAC memory mode 1 den No it 2 M area it 3 RM area it 4 FM area it 5 SFM area 100 to 255 040 040_f UINT Mmw11 504 0628h UPAC Address Station address of UPAC for communication over No RS485 in a system where PC accesses refers to or downloads UPAC application Table 5 2 45 L Lift Functions 60 ms updating and High speed Written referencing data a F code Variabi updating Name by Lot flo1_f uNT MW11 511 0901h Password data 1 0 to 9999 o Yes Lo2 102 f UINT MW11 512 0902h Password data 2 0 to 9999 o Yes Lo3 los fuit Mw11 513 0903h Rated lift speed 0 0 to 100 0 to 999 9 m min Yes LJ You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions error 034 037 5 47 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac
237. d 8 8 W nverter 3 Input ha s m Output selection E Option 1 0 Output Inverter 2 Qutpul Minverter 3 Output Viinverter 4 Output inverter 5 Output viInverter 6 Output Inverter 7 Output Details Selected 0714W Inverter 8 Output Inverter 9 Output Fig 1 3 47 I O group setting screen The following table describes the operation Table 1 3 3 Operation on I O group setting screen Item Description Level Lists priorities of tasks included in the resource If you select the priority of a task current setting will be displayed Input selection Lists usage state of the I O of the inverter under input signal output signal and option I O Sets the usage of input devices used as input for all points of inverter input inverter output and option I O at once Output selection Sets the mask of output devices used as output for all points of inverter output and option I O at once Sets the number of signals whose usage is ON for selected devices Details button Sets individual words for selected devices to enabled disabled or double click an item You can set all devices whether a device is installed or not installed Selected 1 44 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup Detailed operation on selection check boxes Display and use as described below If
238. d inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV7 does not have a way to exchange data other than these In addition to UPAC Table 5 2 29 FS BS E Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type See control block diagram for a more information IW7 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f g monitor calculation IW7 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW7 2 6 m Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o PIN7 3 7 5 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 9 16 bit 2 IW7 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW7 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT z IW7 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV7 4000h 10V INT 7 UPAC uses INV and Ai IW7 7 16 5 9 Ai Ai2 of INV7 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai c used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal QW7 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW7 9 2 Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW7 10 5 Z S Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW7 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition T 13bit required QW7 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT n Overwrite on F07 QW7 13 8 E Deceleration time 1 0
239. d on page 9 of the I O DPG PR DIPG SD check Press the key at the keypad panel to open page 9 DUPAC OSX If LISI UP is displayed the inverter does not recognize the optical DTL DFIELD option ISI UP ISI MW In this case check the installation state of the optical option and the state of SW2 again 0 T oO to E m x E 3 oO 2 aiseg pue uoleiedaig 2 ROM version confirmation Check the ROM version of the main body of VG7 no optical option or keypad panel See the information displayed on the right of MAIN and MTR in a Bios the maintenance information at the keypad panel KP K xxx The screen on the right is displayed on page 5 of the maintenance information Press the key at the keypad panel to open page 5 Table 2 3 2 ROM version Maintenance information Version to which optical option is effective MAIN H10060 or later MTR H20060 or later 2 3 2 Setting the Function Code Errors in the data of the function code may cause a dangerous state To avoid this check the data after setting or writing it Otherwise accidents may be caused CAUTION e Set 0 for 038 UPAC start stop of the master unit or issue a stop command at the D300win control to stop the UPAC SI system e Be sure to set 035 and 036 at all units After the number of connected units and the connection order are determined a unique setting is determined If this setting
240. d part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 45 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written Setting range Type by F code updating Name name M2 electronic thermal A34 834 1 UINT MW11 434 0522h overload relay 0 5 to 75 0 min Yes thermal time constant Setting of motor parameter When F60 0 0 00 to 500 00kW A35 a35 f UINT MW11 435 0523h M3 for V f control When F60 1 0 00 to 600 00HP Yes M3 rated capacity S 0 01 to 99 99A A36 836 1 WORD 96MW 11 436 0524h M3 rated current 100 0 to 999 9A Yes 1000 to 2000A A37 MW11 437 0525h M3 rated voltage 80 to 999 V Yes A38 ass f UINT mWw11 438 0526h M3 maximum output voltage 59 to 999 v Yes at V f maximum speed A39 MW11 439 0527h M3 rated speed 50 to 1500 to 24000 r min Yes A40 asof ur MwW11440 0528h M3 maximum speed 50 to 1500 to 24000 r min Yes A41 MW11 441 0529h M3 poles 2 to 4 to 12 Poles Yes A42 MW11 442 052Ah M3 R1 0 00 to 30 00 96 Yes A43 MW11 443 052Bh M3 X 0 00 to 50 00 96 Yes 0 01 to 99 99A A44 WORD 96MW 11 444 052Ch M3 exciting current 100 0 to 999 9A Yes 1000 to 2000A A45 MW11445 os2pn MS slip compensation 20 000 to 0 000 to 5 000 Hz Yes 0 0 to 20 0 0 0 Automatic torque boost for constant torque load A46 i MW 11 446 052Eh M3 torque boost 0 1
241. d setting NCAUTION e The auxiliary speed setting cannot be used when function code F01 or C25 is set at 0 3 4 or 5 The auxiliary speed setting can be given at UPAC 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 5 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 96QWLI 31 14 Auxiliary speed setting 20000 Nmax INT UPAC VG7S O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 1 How to use To reflect the auxiliary speed setting calculated by UPAC on VG7S place a check mark in the system definition then download the system definition and reset In the figure below connection is switched to the auxiliary speed setting As shown in the block diagram the auxiliary speed setting from UPAC is canceled if function code F01 or C25 validated one is set at 0 3 4 or 5 setting lt 1 E 5 Ej fa e S shaped OTe Speed limiting acceleration function ASR input deceleration filter calculation Speed setting at keypad panel Speed setting of other than UPAC UPAC SW UPHE d Dow I I OPC VG7 UPAC LLL OPC VG7 SI UPAC Auxiliary speed setting of UPAC Fig 3 1 6 Place a check mark at the auxiliary speed setting check box in the I O Group setting Inverter 1 Output word screen of output definition at UPAC Name System Definition I O group setting of the
242. d to moisture and dust If this 1s the case remove the option together with VG7S and store in preferable environment described in the operation manual 1 8 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startu 1 2 1 6 Installation method 1 Notes on handling NCAUTION Avoid the following in installation and operation They may cause damage malfunction or failure 1 Do not drop or turn over 4 Do not install in the same panel where high voltage 3000V 6000V or more devices are installed 5 Do not use the power supply provided for devices generating excessive noise High voltage devices Devices generating noise 2 Do not install where large vibration is present 6 Do not operate with high temperature and high humidity or low temperature Do not operate under a condition where rapid humidity change causes condensation Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Operating ambient humidity 20 to 95 No condensation 3 Do not install where corrosive gas is present m AAC 43 SE 1 9 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v A oO E 2 as ao T7 am Eo x lt a 3 2 Before starting installation 1 Confirmation of product When unpacking the delivered
243. d uonounj yur pe12ejoJg uz l BuiAdoo eyeq Dunes eyeq Sjuejsuoo Jojo N ejejid Burnes JoJo uo sen eA 004 Jojoeuuoo exeq aivoon jaued QvdA3M suonounj paea onewoyny JO OW L A cOd 23 WE LK QB Write enable through link 2a a Es E o gt gy c efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor MEMO 3 49 Existe 0 shee sem Oe sre euer cmerson saftronics ac drive servo motor aJLdg3AmN JL IV Packaged Software 4 1 WPS VG7 DAN 4 2 WPS VG7 POS efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 1 WPS VG7 DAN WPS VG7 DAN is packaged software for controlling the dancer of the winding system Windows Personal Computer Software Package Dancer control system on VG7S The features of the package are e Speed control through detection of position of dancer roll e Calculation of winding diameter based on line speed command and winding feeding motor speed e Switching of dancer roll position control gain speed control gain and I constant according to variation of wound coil e Common control system for winding and feeding compatible with reverse mill e Tension taper output function e Applicable to wire drawing machine To realize the dancer control function the MCA OPC VG7 SN option is nece
244. ddress information to them in variable declaration See 5 2 2 Input output address assignment and MICREX SX Series USER S MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS 1 4 4 Variable declaration for more detail 2 Input and output cannot exist in the same word IEC expression Zl Q Input output memory 302 words Fig 5 2 2 5 4 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 2 1 2 Standard memory area This area is for auxiliary relays used in UPAC Key point 1 Direct addressing is represented as MO11 L1 is X W or D Since variable declaration assigns memory to an application program in general programming you do not have to bother the address See MICREX SX Series USER S MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS 1 4 Variables for more information 2 Cleared to 0 at the start of UPAC operation 3 2K words from the beginning of the standard memory are high speed memory where one accesse is processed in 20ns 4 The size of the standard memory can be changed in cooperation with other memory areas However you cannot change the size of the high speed memory The size is fixed to 2K words Use CPU Memory size definition in Resource setting dialog box to change the size 5 You cannot access across the boundary between the high speed memory and the other standard memory For example you cannot arrange an array or
245. ded Use the KEYPAD panel to check and make sure the function code UNO 01 show version number 12 Here indicates INDEX 4 Control Input Selection UNO 04 Select the standard integrated terminals X1 to X3 the DIO B card or the TL card for entering the orientation command the slow speed orientation command and the position change command Use the standard integrated terminals X1 to X3 which are 0 for test operation For X1 to X3 set the function codes E01 to E03 to 25 U DI respectively Pulse Encoder Selection UNO 09 Set the pulse number of an encoder which is connected to a machine shaft or a motor shaft for position control to function code UNO 09 Selecting Speed Detection Determine whether to use the encoder input terminals PA PB or PG SD which is integrated as standard or to use the PG PD card to detect speed When driving a synchronous motor set the PMPG card to 0 for speed control When using an encoder attached to a shaft separated from your motor through gears also set the function codes P28 M1 PG pulse number and P29 M1 external PG compensation coefficient See VG7 USER S MANUAL MHT263 1 for more information Selecting Feedback Pulse Set the function code 005 Feedback pulse selection to 1 You can detect pulses of the spindle encoder 8 Setting Position The stop position setting 1 UNO 20 is valid as default The factory setting is 0 This means a distance
246. definition and reset The speed setting data is converted into the scale where 20000 indicates the maximum speed Data x max speed 20000 Example If 3000 is obtained in a system where the maximum speed setting is 1500 r min 3000 x 1500 20000 255r min 3 1 28 1 0 Group setting x Inverter 1 Input word Use Word Name m Torqui Torqui owog 2 3 4 5 Real 6 7 8 9 Line sy OOOOOGI JOO 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference monitor ie reference 2 ie current reference final Magnetic flux reference final speed detected speed v Control data Cw J standard DIDA 6bit Operation status Sw Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f peed input pulse train position reference PG PR J 11 Position detection build in or PG PD Position detection Z phase inputJ PG PD J Position reference DI of INV1 DIOB option 1 6bit Aj of INV1 Ait value Cancel Fig 3 1 29 3 19 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 4 3 Torque monitor high speed 1 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 27 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 9eIWLI 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT VG7S UPAC After torque limit WE 2 3 Torque current reference 10000 100 INT VG7S UPAC D 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system not applica
247. ding to C21 C17 UINT MW11 209 0211h Multistep speed 13 o 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min Yes witched according to C21 o Multistep speed 14 creep o 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min Ci8 o18 UINT MW 11 210 0212n speed 1 Switched according to C21 Multistep speed 15 creep 0 to 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 96 0 0 to 999 9 m min C19 c19 UINT TSMWTT2TT 10218h speed 2 Switched according to C21 c20 c20f UNT Mw11 212 0214h Multistep speed command lp 000 to 0 100 s EL Yes agreement timer 0 O to 24000r min 1 0 00 to 100 0096 Definition of multistep speed 2 0 0 to 999 9m min cn e21 UINT MW 11 213 0215h setting Define the setting method of C05 to C19 93 Yes When 1 is selected the setting is the ratio to the maximum speed F03 A06 A40 of the selected motor Refer to F79 for details of motor selection 0to7 Keypad panel a v key Analog input 0 to 10V Analog input 0 to 10V C25 625 1 UINT MW 11 217 0219h Speed setting N2 UP DOWN control initial value 0 41 Yes UP DOWN control initial value previous value UP DOWN control initial value creep speed 1 2 DIA card input 7 DIB card input C29 c29 MW11 221 021Dh Jogging speed 0 to 50 to 24000 r min o ves ASR JOG setting VM C30 c30 MW 11 222 021Eh ASR P gain JOG 0 1 to 10 0 to 200 0 Multiplication Yes P ASR I integration constant 0 010 to 0 200
248. displayed at function code UNO 64 Dancer control method PID control of dancer roll position APR Auto Position Regulator Winding diameter calculation function Automatic switch of P gain of APR and P I of ASR according to winding diameter Tension taper output Analog output A01 Input signal Analog 12 Line speed input 10V to OV to 10V Ai 1 Dancer roll position input signal 10V to OV to 10V Ai 2 Selection from the following signals 10V to OV to 10V Analog taper gain analog initial diameter analog line speed gain Output signal AO 1 Taper output 10V to OV to 10V AO 2 Dancer roll position detection 10V to OV to 10V AO 3 Winding diameter ratio 10V to OV to 10V Input signal Digital X1 Individual motor operation X2 APR I zero hold X3 APR output zero hold X4 Winding diameter calculation hold X5 Initial diameter reset X6 Winding feeding switch TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o Output signal Dancer roll position detection Select Y1 to Y5 and assign the U DO function Detection level defined with function code U55 Keypad panel monitor function The following data items can be referred to at real time at the LED monitor of the keypad panel Option monitor 3 Calculated winding diameter Option monitor 4 Line speed input Option monitor 5 Dancer roll position input Option m
249. dware you use Table 1 3 1 PC type and CPU type of UPAC Hardware used PC Type CPU Type Number of inverters Inter inverter link type 1 to 6 units VG7 6 Tto 12 units Optical link OPC VG7 S1 VG7 12 UPAC W Resource setting Resource setting for UPAC is the same as the standard setting steps except for the following three points e You use the communication setting dialog box that appears when you click the Communication setting button in the Resource setting dialog box to set the communication between the personal computer and UPAC and use the system definition to set the station number on RS485 of UPAC See System definition in this manual for more information UPAC operates based on the commands from VG7S regardless of the specified action when turned on CPU running definition MICREX SX UPAC Use the Running specification at power on radio button in the CPU running definition dialog box to specify the action when you turn on However UPAC starts based on the command mode from VG7S regardless of your selection m Watch Dog Timer setting i C Specify Cancel WDT time jo 95 ms Help r Running specification at power on Battery less run RUN Run TERM Run OFF C RUN Run TERM Last State C ON C RUN Stop TERM Stop Fig 1 3 39 CPU running definition dialog box e One resource of UPAC can exist for one configuration UPAC cannot handle
250. e Finish button to close the Setup dialog box Files created and saved by the user are not deleted during program deletion 1 34 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 3 4 1 D300win starting method There are the following two methods to start D300win Do not start D300win in other methods 1 Start from the Start menu After the D300win system is installed a new program group having the icon shown below is created The program group is registered to the Start menu E Windows Update m My Office HH E EET gt A Accessories gt d Backup Utility 7 9 D300win Help gt j5 D3 win Setup To start D300win select this command Em D300win 53 FRENIC500N EA Online Services Fe StartUp Settings d umm EJ File Divide amp Merge MS MS DOS Prompt Notes on use of D300win Eind Outlook Express SX Control Utility Lui SX simulator Sample ua Easy operation menu A Windows Explorer Log Off Takegawa Shut Down AS A e m amp Qe 1 HED e Windows98 Fig 1 3 31 Click the left mouse button on the Start button select the D300win program group from the Programs P menu and click the left mouse button on the D300win program icon After the D300win system starts the screen shown in section 1 3 4 2 is displayed Descripti
251. e 2 of INV1 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 21 Data of function code 3 of INV1 22 Address of function code 4 of INV1 23 Data of function code 4 of INV1 24 25 DO2 of INVO 26 AO of INV1 AO1 27 AO of INV1 AQ2 28 AO of INV1 AO3 29 AO of INV1 AO4 30 AO of INV1 AO5 31 32 3 32 No 12 unit system 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 2 Torque reference 1 5 Control data 6 Universal DO1 7 Acceleration time lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o 8 Deceleration time 9 Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4lfrequency reference 12 unit system No 26 AO of INV1 AO1 No 27 AO of INV1 AO2 No 28 AO of INV1 AO3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 7 Speed Simulation NWARNING e Before starting simulation disconnect secondary cables U V W between the inverter and the motor or leave them disconnected Otherwise accidents may occur NCAUTION e When performing simulation select 2 simulation for function code P01 M1 control method 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 38 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 9eQWLI 32 15 Real speed simulation speed 20000 Nmax INT UPACAOVG7S O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 UPAC can be used to make speed simulation This 1s useful for examination of control using
252. e UPAC control group can be placed as a subordinate system in a system where the host PLC or computer board takes charge of generalization and control of each driving control group In this system the load of the CPU can be reduced and a distributed system consisting of host and subordinate devices can be configured High response control dedicated to the driving control becomes possible in the subordinate system and the CPU of the host can be dedicated to generalization and control of various data sent from each driving control group Here preparation for operation of multiple inverters using a link optical link connected via optical fiber cable hereinafter referred to as optical cable with UPAC being the master is described for customers having purchased the optical option of the FRENIC 5000 VG7S inverter Read through this manual carefully before operating because there are some limitations in operation efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 2 2 2 Specifications Table 1 2 6 Hardware specifications Item Specification Remarks Optical option Mogel OPC GIRI High speed serial link Connector Transmission TX reception RX connector Definition Define SI UPAC using SW 1 and SW 2 on the option SW1 SW2 ON OFF Power supply The power is supplied through the connector Accessory Plastic optical fiber cable 5 m Communicatio n specificat
253. e data other than these In addition to UPAC Table 5 2 31 Dos FS BS 5 Remarks ress No Area Name d VELLE Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A more information IW9 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f S monitor calculation 991W9 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter 991W9 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o 991W9 3 7 5 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 5 16 bit 2 991W9 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W 4 991W9 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT 2 IW9 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV9 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai IW9 7 16 d amp Ai Ai2 of INV9 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as universal QWY 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QWI 9 2 Q Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW9 10 5 Z i Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW9 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition 3 13bit required QW9 12 7 E Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QW9 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F08 QW9 14 9 a Torque limi
254. e may result e When using DC power input ensure that the fan power switching connector CNRXTX is correctly engaged in the inverter as a trouble may occur e When using DC power input of 18 5kW or larger inverter be sure to connect AC power to terminals RO and TO for a power supply of fan as a trouble may occur Ensure that the noise generated by the inverter motor or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral sensors and equipment as accident may result efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Introduction Instructions on operation e Be sure to install the surface cover before turning on the power closed Do not remove the cover while power to the inverter is turned on Electric shock may occur Do not operate switches with wet hands as electric shock may result e When the retry function is selected the inverter may restart automatically after tripping Design the machine to ensure personal safety in the event of restart Accident may result e When the torque limiting function is selected operating conditions may differ from preset conditions acceleration deceleration time or speed In this case personal safety must be assured Accident may result e As the STOP key is effective only when a function setting has been established install an emergency switch independently and when an operation via the external signal terminal is selected the STOP key on the keypad panel
255. e the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 35 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Table 5 2 39 E Extension Terminal Functions F code E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 Variable name e01 f o o a I l ojo 3 miIloio ajolole eu 60 ms updating and referencing data Address UINT MW11 97 uNr MW11 98 JUINT wMwt1 99 UINT Mmw11 100 lur MW11 101 UINT Mmw11 102 UINT v Mw11 103 UINT Mw11 104 JUINT MW11 105 UINT Mmw11 106 UINT Mmw11 107 JUINT 4MW11 108 UINT XMw11 109 WORD MW11 110 High speed updating address X terminal function pom X1 terminal function function function 0103 X3 termina 0104 ermina X6 termina h h h 0102h ermina h h function terminal function function function X7 termina X8 termina X9 terminal function X11 terminal function X12 terminal function X13 terminal function X14 terminal function 010Eh X terminal function normally open closed function LJ You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions Setting range 0 to 63 0 1 2 3 Multistep speed selection 1 to
256. earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB this grounding work is necessary for protection against electrical shock e Use a crimp terminal to connect a cable to the main circuit terminal or inverter ground terminal e Use a single cable to connect the G inverter ground terminal Do not connect two or more cables to the inverter ground terminal Use a molded case circuit breaker MCCB and magnetic contactor MC that conform to EN or IEC standards Use the inverter under over voltage category III conditions and maintain Pollution degree 2 or better as specified in IEC664 To maintain Pollution degree 2 or more install the inverter in the control panel IP54 or higher level having structure free from water oil carbon dust etc e For the input output wiring of the inverter use cable diameter and type as specified in Appendix C in EN60204 e To ensure safety install an optional AC reactor DC REACTOR or external braking resistor as follows 1 Install inside an IP4X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are exposed 2 Install inside an IP2X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are not exposed General Instructions Although figures in this manual may show the inverter with covers and safety screens removed for explanation purposes do not operate the device until all such covers and screens have been replaced efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Introduction Warning label pos
257. echanical Loss Compensation Torque Calculation Block DCO to 10V Calculation for Mechanical loss Line speed command mechanical loss compensation compensation torque torque Speed Motor rotation O to 10000 0 to 100 00 s speed reduction ratio Machine EI rotation speed 1 Output from wound diameter calculation Mechanical loss torque data file 4 59 emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor adJLdJAmi In V UPAC Programming Specification 5 1 Performance Specification 5 2 Memory efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 1 Performance Specification Table 5 1 1 Item Specification Type OPC VG7 UPAC Execution control type Stored program Cyclic scan type default task fixed cycle task event task Input output control type Task synchronized refresh CPU 32 bit OS processor 32 bit execution processor Memory type Program memory data memory temporary Programming language IL language Instruction List ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC element Sequential Function Chart conforming to IEC 61131 3 Instruction word length Variable length depending on language Sequence Instruction instruction execution time 20ns or more instruction Data instruction 40ns or more instruction
258. ecssssseusesssetesssetuos 2 1 Examination of System 2 1 1 Application to Small to Medium Systems crosses 2 1 2 Examination of Specification 2 2 Individual Operation of UPAC 2 2 1 Preparation Meses t t n 2 2 2 Settings on VG7S Side 2 2 3 Settings on D300win Side 2 3 Operation of Multiple Units via Optical Option OPC VG7 Sl 2 3 1 Preparation Meses t t n 2 3 2 Setting the Function Code 2 3 3 Connection n I 2 4 Basic Operation Examples 57 2 4 1 Determination of Specification 2 4 2 Creating a Program 2 4 3 Downloading TED 2 4 4 Simulating and Monitoring 3 VG7 Interface ee 3 1 Memory Interface Giving Basic Commands Referencing or Updating Function Codes n n Operating Inputs and Outputs Monitoring Data css Using Pulse Data Dynamic Speed Change Speed Simulation n 3 2 Application Creation Examples 3 2 1 Pattern Operation Example 3 2 2 Position Control Example Using Pulse String PTS 3 2 3 Example of Dancer Control Ww _ No 9 Q9 uw Qo Co NOOR 3 3 VG7S Control Block Diagram List 3 40 3 3 1 Operation Command 3 40 3 3 2 Speed Command Selection Section 3 41 3 3 3 Acceleration deceleration Calculation Speed Limit Position Control Input Se
259. ection Setting 3 0ms Memory diagnosis execute Memory diagnosis not exect Print Cancel Fig 1 3 44 System configration definition screen The following table describes the operation Table 1 3 2 Operation on System configration definition screen Item Description Number of inverters Displays whether six inverter system or twelve inverter system Equipment Mark the check box of a device you use an inverter without check mark will be considered as not installed You can not remove the last check mark SX station Displays the SX station number of inverters HOLD mode change button or double click inverter list Specifies the HOLD mode of the inverter selected in the list HOLD mode Reset mode You cannot select this button if the selected inverter is not installed Tact cycle The normal value displays standard value 1ms to 3 ms automatically according to the number of inverters to be used Click the J button to copy the normal value to the setting You can select the button only if the normal value and the setting are different Default 1 0ms 1 0ms 2 0ms 3 0ms are listed both for optical link and simplified RS485 in the setting combo box and select from them Smaller values than the normal value are masked and are not available Link type between inverters Select Optical link Initialization method selection Sets whether to exec
260. ed Speed limit B ion motor settin filter ASR os calculating pi 7 Omitted gt gt a00 UNO 01 acceleration Ypac 000 deceleration sw Speed detection Speed he HA PG en detection N P generator OPC VG7 PG 0 FRENIC5000VG7S Fig 3 2 3 1 Description of specification e The pulse train reference issued by the pulse generator is received at the OPC VG7 PG o option and sent to UPAC as a pulse reference Variable pulse string position reference PG PR e The speed feedback data of the encoder installed to the induction motor is sent to UPAC as detected pulses Variable position detection built in e The cumulative count multiplied by APR position control gain is handed over to VG7S as a speed command so that the cumulative deviation between the command and detection becomes zero Variable speed setting 4 frequency reference during V f Note The stationary deviation does not become zero with APR gain only It becomes zero during stoppage e VG7S dynamically switches between validation and cancellation validation of internal speed setting of the speed command sent from UPAC using the X1 input e When the speed setting of UPAC is effective the internal data of the internal acceleration deceleration calculator is reset to zero Variable control data e The APR gain is assigned to UNO 01 so that it can be changed or referred to from the keypad panel e The definition of the APR
261. ed for a highly precise tension feed back control PID control type selection Set value Fixed to 000 Fixed to the PID control type described in the figure below U16 0 PID Type ATR output ATR P ATR I ATR D Tension P regulator feedback 4 49 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor co Functions Relevant to Feedback Control P gain for ATR during constant speed Set value 0 10000 0 10 000 times without limiter c l Sets P gain while the line speed is constant time for ATR during constant speed Set value 0 10000 0 100 00 sec without limiter Sets I time while the line speed is constant D time for ATR during constant speed Set value 0 10000 0 10 000 sec without limiter Sets D time while the line speed is constant Upper limit value for ATR while constant speed Set value 300 to 300 300 to 300 without limiter It will be the upper limit value for correction value of the ATR while the line speed is constant Lower limit value for ATR while constant speed Set value 300 to 300 300 to 300 without limiter B It will be the lower limit value for correction value of the ATR while the line speed is constant P gain for ATR while accelerating decelerating line Set value 0 10000 0 10 000 times without limiter B Sets P gain while accelerating decelerating the line time for ATR
262. ed setting 1 INV118 SPDREFI from the variable list Select the global range and Control Variables for the global variable worksheet in advance Variable xi Variable list of Resource C_VG7_6 R_UP4C Cancel INV114_UNIAIT INV1 Ai of INVI AIT INV115 UNIAI INV1 Ai of INV1 Ai2 INV116_UNIAI3 INV Ai of INV1 AID option Ai3 Properties INV117_UNIAI4 INVI Ai of INV1 410 option Aid INV119_TROREF1 INV1 Torque reference 1 Help INV120_TROCURREF INV1 Torque current reference INV121 MGNETREF INV1 Magnetic flux reference INV122 Cw INV1 Control data Cw INVI 23 UN IDO1 INY1 DOT of INV1 standard DI DA 3bit Fig 2 4 6 2 22 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples The INV118 SPDREFI variable appears on the worksheet Click on u01 f and the icon shown in the circle to connect ET D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER E Eie Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help BS D5u 36 1 e osj amp 6 nens emm jo esset nage OC Drenrea leer sks e xl Project Ca Libraries CA Data Types 6 Logical POUs 5 LADDER i LADDERT zz LADDERV T LADDER 3 8 Physical Hardware C V67 6 VG7 E BIB Svstem Definition 3 6 R_UPAC UPAC H B Tasks Global Variables 6 Control Variables B Function_List
263. eed setting 1 from UPAC ASR input filter for speed limiter function calculating S curve acceleration deceleration Speed setting 4 from UPAC UPAC SW OFF TO O ON FO 1 0 Group setting x Place a check mark at the speed setting 1 frequency command during V f check box in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen The speed setting data 1s converted into a 20000 scale Data x maximum speed 20000 Example To write 3000 for a maximum speed setting of 1500 r min 3000 x 1500 20000 225 r min 3 3 r Inverter 1 Dutput word 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference 5 Control data Cw 6 Universal DO1 standard DIOA option 3bit 7 Acceleration time 8 Deceleration time 3 Torque limiter level 1 Torque limiter level 2 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f Torque reference 2 Torque bias Auxiliary speed setting Real speed Simulation speed Cancel Fig 3 1 5 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Limitation When speed setting 4 is used the acceleration deceleration calculator does not function Therefore function code M14 or acceleration ACC and deceleration DEC in the operation state information of IQ memory SW do not function correctly 3 1 1 3 Auxiliary spee
264. eference value PID REF 10V 20000 d i 5 PID correction gain PID G 10V 4000 h 5 Option Ai O A 10V 7FFF h ro E50 UINT _ MW11 146 0132h Ai2 terminal function 0 to 18 Refer to Ait terminal function Yes E51 lest t UT Mw11 147 0133h Ai3 terminal function oie doa one Yes E52 UINT wMW11 148 0134h Aid terminal function pue be Ait emina Oi Yes e Ai gain setting EPOR E53 e53_ MW 11 149 0135h Ai1 gain setting 10 000 to 1 000 to 10 000 Mulltiplication Yes E54 e54 MW11 150 0136h Ai2 gain setting 10 000 to 1 000 to 10 000 Multiplication 8 Yes E55 e55 MW11 151 0137h Ai3 gain setting rere CE cci Pe opere qid 8 Yes E56 e56 INTO rmrt 162 0138h Ai4 gain setting aed cence wd AE e Yes Ai bias setting E57 e57 MW 11 153 0139h AM bias setting 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 m Yes E58 e58 1 MW 11 154 013Ah Ai2 bias setting 100 0 to 0 0 to 100 0 6 Yes 5 E59 e50 MW11 155 013Bh Ai3 bias setting cR inode in No opion e Yes D E60 esor int MW11 156 D13Ch Aid bias setting BE a 2m octet m Yes Ai filter setting E61 MW 11 157 013Dh Ait filter setting 0 000 to 0 010 to 0 500 s EL Yes E62 MW11 158 013Eh Ai2 filter setting 0 000 to 0 010 to 0 500 s 4 Yes E63 e63_1 MW 11 159 013Fh Ai3 filter setting pe ae AIO option a Yes E64 e64 i MW11 160 0140h Aid filter setting pesca tena ee wih mem EL Yes Increment decrement limiter Ai setting E65 e65 f UINT
265. efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac BEN t FRENIC ATA USER S MANUAL High performance Vector Control Inverter FRENIC 5OOOVG7S Series MEH422 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Introduction Introduction Thank you for purchasing option OPC VG7 UPAC hereinafter referred to as UPAC and OPC VG7 SI hereinafter referred to as Optical Link of Fuji s general purpose vector inverter FRENIC 5000 VG7S hereinafter referred to as VG7S This User s Manual describes the procedure for operating VG7S using UPAC only or UPAC and Optical Link Read through this User s Manual for correct operation This manual is prepared for those familiar with the operation methods of the D300win software and VG7S hardware Therefore the operation method of each piece of software and the unit itself is not described in this manual Refer to the following relevant manuals together with this manual Reference document No Remarks Reference document High performance vector 1 control inverter MEH405 Catalog FRENIC5000VG7S Series Instruction manual attached to product Instruction manual Description concerning test operation FRENIC5000VG7S NERESI SORRE and connection only attached to purchased product FRENIC5000VG7S 3 USER S MANUAL MEH407 Main manual for VG7S User s manual for MICREX Explanation of memory language 4
266. efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software Limit lower limit for ATR while stalling Set value 300 to 300 300 to 300 without limiter Sets the upper limit value for the correction value by the ATR while stalling Increase this setting when you want to increase the correction value by the ATR while stalling Minimum rotation speed U31 Set value 15 1500 15 1500 r min without limiter Enter the minimum rotation speed of a winding motor when the wound diameter is the maximum at the maximum line speed for calculating the wound diameter Vmax m min i EM vae mimi X Speed reduction ratio calculate and enter minimum rotation speed of motor Dmax m x x Motor rotation speed Speed reduction ratio Machine shaft rotation speed 7 ATR Control Timing Adjusting Speed for turning off ATR Set value 0 100 0 1 m Sets the line speed for turning off the ATR correction Sets to 0 when you want it active until complete stop Delay timer setting for ATR OFF Set value 0 5000 0 5 sec Sets the time until the ATR control is turned off after the condition for turning off the ATR is met Delay timer setting for detecting speed of out of material ur Set value 0 5000 0 5 sec Sets the time for the timer for confirming that the machine is out of material Delay timer setting for enabling ATR PI Set value 0 5000 0 5 sec Sets the time
267. efinition downloading or reset command issuance In such an instance do not manipulate 038 but control the D300win control Because function code 038 controls UPAC directly UPAC cannot operate 038 2 6 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 2 2 2 UPAC memory mode You can select whether to clear the memory to zero or to hold at the state immediately before a stop in the stopping state of UPAC The memory area of UPAC includes the IQ M RM FM and SFM areas Clear hold selection can be made for each memory area individually The 039 setting is reflected when UPAC is being stopped and the starting UPAC is stopped The I area VG7S UPAC of the IQ memory is updated immediately after it is cleared by VG7S so that it cannot be cleared Leave the hold setting for the FM and SFM areas Definition of function code 039 UPAC memory mode 15 87 0 0 IQ area 0 Hold 1 Clear OR condition with definition of D300win Bit 1 Marea 0 Hold Clear Bit 2 RM area 0 Hold Bit 3 FM area 0 Hold Bit 4 SFM area 0 Hold Clear Clear Set at 0 Clear Set at O lt Q A M The IQ area is the control data area for speed torque and other data items exchanged at a high speed Items related directly to the user in the M area is the function code area F E C P H A o L U The RM area is the retain memo
268. eleration deceleration Speed setting of other than UPAC l I Speed setting 1 OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Speed setting 4 Fig 3 1 26 Place a check mark at the speed setting 170 Group setting Ex 1 frequency command during V f check box Rondes in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen Next download the system definition and reset The speed setting data is converted into the m scale where 20000 indicates the maximum Torque reference 2 2 3 Torque current reference final 4 Magnetic flux reference final All 5 Real speed detected speed value 6 Control data Cw standard D104 16bit 7 Operation status S w 8 Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f speed 3 Line speed input O 10 pulse train position reference PG PR Data x max speed 20000 E 11 Position detection build in or PG PD 12 Position detection Z phase input PG PD 13 Position reference Example If 3000 is obtained when data is 14 DIofINVI D108 option 18bi referred in a system where the maximum speed 15 AiofINVI Ait H is set at 1500 r min 3000 x 1500 20000 225r min Cancel Fig 3 1 27 3 18 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 4 2 Speed monitor high speed 1 6 unit system not
269. elow OK Can be installed simultaneously NG Cannot be installed simultaneously Table 1 1 2 PG SI SI PMPG SN FV AIO Dio po Tt uPAc wws RS eec une SX OPEN SN NG FV NG NG AIO NG NG NG SI UPAC SI MWS RS OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG NG PMPG OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG MOK NG PMPGo Being develop develop develop develop develop develop develop develop ed ed ed ed ed ed ed OPEN Being Being Being Being Being Being NG Being Being Being NG NG develop develop develop develop develop develop Hevelop idevelop develop develop ed ed ed ed ed ed ed ed efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 1 2 1 Hardware To run D300win and UPAC Upgrade on the PC the following hardware requirements must be satisfied e IBM compatible PC DOS V PC or PC98 series PC equipped with Intel Pentium 233 MHz or faster recommended e Windows VGA resolution 800 x 600 dots minimum SVGA resolution 1024 x 768 dots recommended e 32 MB or more RAM e 220 MB or more free space on hard disk However the necessary hardware space varies according to the installed program D300win system software 100 MB minimum standard expansion FB package 120 MB minimum e 3 5 floppy disk drive 1 44 MB forma
270. em without OPC VG7 SI one VG7S unit can be controlled by UPAC Loop connection accessory ah Optical cable with I connector E S S 0000 0000 0000 ooog High speed counter position command but detection bh Extended DI DO Extended Al AO RS485 connector on control PCB un p Master and slave units Max 12 c Broadcasting units Max 156 FRENIC5000VG7S FRENIC5000VG7S FRENIC5000VG7S Lithium primary battery Special connection cable 3 NPAH CNV with converter pui 4 LEE cable 4 D300win system disk Printer Standard extension FB disk D300win lt Reference volume gt Install Com Ez PC WPS VG7 PCL ouse UPACU de f f ch Windows95 98 NT parade free et ehaige Fig 1 1 1 1 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v o 38 s E 492 52 Table 1 1 1 Option card and other system component list 2 Division Name Model Application Remarks 3 Digital card High performance PLC One accessory lithium primary For 16 bit bus Technology card OPC VG7 UPAC controller battery Expanded when controlling multiple NT units High speed optical UPAC communication System Optical cable 5 m with connector Unnecessary for
271. en UPAC and VG7S INVI at high speed In addition INVI can exchange function codes F E C P H A o L U and M at about 60ms constant cycle Table 5 2 23 FS BS S Remarks Address No Area Name d ion Type See control block diagram for ata distinction p A more information IW1 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f b monitor calculation 991W1 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW1 2 6 9 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o 991W1 3 7 8 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 5 _16 bit E 991W1 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW1 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT S IW1 6 15 E Ai Ai1 of INV1 4000h 10V INT Z UPAC uses INV and Ai 5 g terminals for control input Ai W1 7 16 2 amp Ai Ai2 of INV1 4000h 10V INT used by UPAC is defined as 5 universal QW1 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW1 9 2 S Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW1 10 5 Z B Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW1 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition m 13bit required QW1 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s IN
272. ension Tension set to 100 0 Dmin D mm Dmax Wound diameter gt 12 Load cell input 0 EN USER P50 POD 402867 13 Speed monitor 0 E m min 1000 100m min USER P49 POD 402866 4 45 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Example of Basic Connection The following figure shows a connection example You can use the POD or the PLC to select different settings of tension Note that there is a restriction for the setting from PLC You can use the link No to set U01 to U10 You need an option card OPC VG7 RS to use the POD You need an option card OPC VG7 TL to use the PLC You use either the POD or the PLC to constitute your system FRNOVG7s O CT use Power supply 5 30 o 1 50Hz 60Hz ltt LO OOo gt FWD TH1 pine KEYPAD panel SEI THC M e NTC thermistor 1 l x1 CCL Torque command cancel v1 Operation o 4 X2 U Di ON on operation command v2 L i Stop Te x3 U Di OFF on stop command v3 ns Tension ON 0 o X4 U Di ON on tension ON command Digital input Eee erm x5 U Di OFF on emergency command Nc ME e o x6 i TU I o x Q 2 ao e 9 E D Alarmreset U Di ON on alarm reset Mechanical Di oss o o I U Di Mechanical loss f measuring measuring command YSA Relay output Wound o o joe U Di ON on wound d
273. environment and it is therefore necessary to perform a regular inspection on the UPAC The unit must be inspected monthly but it should be inspected at shorter intervals according to the ambient environment If any of the inspection results does not meet the criterion take appropriate corrective measures 6 1 2 Inspection Points 1 3 Inspection items Follow the items in the table below to inspect your facility Inspection items What to inspect Criteria How to inspect UPAC operation Failure diagnosis display with Normal display Visual inspection state D300win No major or minor fault c Temperature Within the specification temperature 10 to 50 C Maximum and 2 inside the panel if installed in the minimum 2 panel thermometer Q 2 Humidity Condensation Excessive color 20 to 95 RH Visual inspection 5 change or rust hygrometer t Vibration Vibration None Tactile inspection X Dust Attached dust or foreign object None Visual inspection Individual cards are fixed firmly No loose cards Visual inspection Screws of terminals for external wiring are not loose No loose screws Screwdriver Mounting state Connector for connecting cable is No loose or Visual inspection inserted firmly playing screwdriver connectors Disconnecting external wiring cable No abnormal Visual inspection appearance Battery Expiration data is reached Note Expiration label Visual inspection display
274. eoueo iw Humes peeds qvdA3 eui 10 uonounj NMO d N SUL l IV I S peeds peeds dee 490 g 01U09 l 609 daysninw did 84 8ag enjeA pejejnojeo Ajeuueju s 1 1o dId 1ndino uonejnojeo did eu l 303 y peeds 819 o43uo9 peeds qash b Z m OlLN du2 8 peeds M eu Jo 12efqns eu Ayoads yorum GZO pue L04 seuoiws LN ZN PUU SU 409 geisunw OT amea reni l NMOG dn oL eoo z peeds l 909 dasyny anjen 8188 peeds dead I peeds snolA81d 1 80D deisnnw oO anjea jenu des poods deas QNEN duo 94 poyjew Buy s peeds daysqinyy Veo l NMOG dhn puewwoo l p ds Bu66or l a eid M oo OINNMOGI 84 Up i Bumes peeds Sumas peeds N MH am Olan 4L 09 sisejejsAu duin em 9vdan E pueuiuo dr najno 09 peeds duunr 92ue 9je peeds IDE did A C 7 I 10 U09 ld j O Od 00 z peeds dunr 1noadid z a 109 L peeds dunr T S y o MS OVdN b AOL 01 0 Sol 1 L O4 PAS eouejejei Eire RES AOLF 01 0 peeds NM 10 pis mr O o ueg p ds Le l Lo pd d I HS CTD Wu torotoro M royolrotoj 7 010 1010 840 Bunes pook z 1 9 Z 4s NO go i pueis pued QVdA3M EN Sco 0 H Sco peeds mE puewwos peeds V03 roll JEW yul ejes 104 LN puewiwoo 92u9J8J81 Ald LN tot tol ud d puewwos peeds zx zx jueuieeJDy peeds E ois IC v o oo mm oe e8g og ESgoz Er LZ BSR aRs sg lu gpz ato as 9978 O8 ox HNN AAS LE LI OP 2 gt 5 2809 63225 nm 00 SG D DEZ og
275. equivalent to 0 pulse from Z phase reference position of your encoder Maintain 0 during test operation and check if it stops at the 0 reference position You can use the option monitor 4 Z phase reference spindle position display of the KEYPAD panel to check the 0 reference position Setting Slow Speed 1 For the orientation command while the motor is rotating set the target speed to which the motor decelerates following the deceleration time setting Set 200 r min to the function code UNO 10 Slow speed 1 1 during test operation UNO 10 is valid as default 10 Setting ORT gain Set 50 5 0 times to the function code UNO 14 ORT gain 1 during test operation UNO 14 is valid as default 5 6 wm 7 9 7 4 31 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 11 Setting Orientation from Stopping Just after Power On Set 100 r min This is the speed limiting feature for orientation from stopping just after power on You cannot conduct the orientation without changing the default of 0 r min feature of VER 13003 or later 4 2 5 2 Test operation and adjustment After you finish checking and setting as described in 5 2 2 use the FWD or REV terminal to start operation and operate the motor under the speed control At this time you can specify zero speed command In this operation if you set X1 Orientation ON to ON the inverter switches
276. er of I O expansion cards installed in each units of VG7S is two An optical link connected to the SI card reduces the number of expansion cards by one e The synchronous motor drive PMPG card necessary and position control PG card necessary reduces the number of expansion cards by one too e In the 12 unit system the I O expansion option cannot be operated DIOA card can be operated 0 T to E m x E 3 oO 2 aiseg pue uoleiedaid The standard I O and the I O of the expansion card can be operated from the UPAC Two expansion cards can be installed The number of inputs and outputs is restricted in this capacity One SI optical link card reduces the number of installed cards by one though all the inputs and outputs of the linked VG7S become accessible However the I O expansion option cannot be operated in a 12 unit system Table 2 1 3 Maximum number of inputs and outputs controlled with one unit of VG7S Combination of option Total I O points Standard DIOA DIOB AIO sion 1DiOB TDIOA AIO DIOB AIO SI DIOA SHDIOB SHAIO DI 9 4 16 29 13 25 13 o 25 a 9 o DO 5 8 10 z 23 13 15 13 o 15 a 5ta 3 Al sont z 2 3 3 5 3 0 3 0 5 0 AO 3 z z 2 3 3 5 3 0 3 o 5 o The maximum number of inputs and outputs controlled from the UPAC is shown in the table below for a system consisting of three units a 3 Combination of option DIOB AI
277. er than 036 is set at 035 035 gt 036 or a value between 12 and 99 is set at 035 an operation procedure alarm is caused If though 035 lt 036 the same value is set at 035 for two or more inverters the communication link is not established and an inverter to inverter link error is caused 2 2 036 setting method The number of slave units connected via the optical cable must be set at function code 036 This is not the number including the master unit Table 2 3 6 Number of connected units and function code Function code Function 036 setting Remarks 1 Setting for a system of two units 1 master 1 slave 2 Setting for a system of three units 1 master 2 slaves 036 RAM elle 10 Setting for a system of 11 units 1 master 10 slaves 11 Setting for a system of 12 units 1 master 11 slaves 101 to 255 Number of slave stations in broadcasting mode 1 to 155 setting 100 Note If the 036 value does not agree with the number of slave units the communication link is not established If operation is performed in this state inverter to inverter link error Erb is issued to warn of a setting error 2 3 Process after change After changing 035 or 036 data turn the power off then on again The reset button at the terminal block RST or at the keypad panel is not effective Note H31 is the address for identification in the data writing or reading process for the master unit
278. ess from the communication address 485NO of the function code list Name 15 Real speed Simulation speed 6 of func code 1 of INV1 Data of function code 1 of INVI 18 Address of function code 2 of INV1 All 18 Data of function code 2 of INV1 20 Address of function code 3 of INV1 21 Data of function code 3 of INV1 22 Address of function code 4 of INV1 23 Data of function code 4 of INV1 24 Reserve 25 DO2 of INV1 DIOB option 1 Obit 26 AD of INV A01 27 AD of INV A02 28 AO of INV 403 29 AD of INV1 810 option A04 JOOOOORS To reflect the data place a check mark for two items in the system definition download the system and reset IC Place a check mark at the INVO function code address and data check boxes in the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System res Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen ooog Le Fig 3 1 17 3 9 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 2 3 Using user code FRENIC5000VG7S FRENIC5000VG7S 2 Placing a PLC for generalization and control outside ds VG7S JA Use UNO as a buffer for data exchange between the PLC n and UPAC Fig 3 1 18 There are the following two methods for using the user code Touch panel UNO 1 Using the user code as a parameter for writing the control and sequence program from UPAC Assign a control para
279. evev L9 ve 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s F07 07 WORD XMW11 7 0007h Acceleration time 1 100 0 to 999 9s 13 Yes 1000 to 3600s 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s F08 WORD 96MW11 8 0008h Deceleration time 1 100 0 to 999 9s 13 Yes 1000 to 3600s 0to2 Protection against an overload of the motor functions M1 electronic thermal due to the NTC thermistor of the special motor for VG overload relay setting In this case select inactive for the setting of the F10 f10_f UINT MW11 10 000Ah M1 electronic thermal electronic thermal overload relay 85 Yes overload relay 0 Inactive When the special motor for VG is used function selection 1 Active For general purpose motor with internal cooling fan 2 Active For inverter motor with external cooling fan M1 electronic thermal 0 01 to 99 99A E11 WORD MW11 11 000Bh overload relay 100 0 to 999 9A 13 Yes operation level 1000 to 2000A M1 electronic thermal F12 d UINT MW11 12 000Ch overload relay 0 5 to 75 0 min 2 Yes thermal time constant 0to5 0 Inactive No restart immediate alarm Restart after momentary 1 Inactive No restart alarm upon power recovery F14 a UINT MW11 14 000Eh power failure 2 Inactive No restart alarm after controlled stop Yes function selection 3 Active Restart continuation of operation 4 Active Restart operation at speed on power failure 5 Active Restart operation at starting speed You can change the setting of the shaded setting code
280. execution time of default task exceeds 0 dida d WDT abnormality watch dog timer value Major fault MX 10 38 1 Application 1 when error such as temporary size over Major fault execution abnormality occurs during user program execution MX 10 38 2 to Not used MX 10 38 10 MX 10 38 11 um setting Dl m specified memory address does not Major fault 9 MX 10 38 12 Initial value setting 1 when set initial value exceeds memory area Major fault ME abnormality range MX 10 38 13 SFM boundary definition 1 when capacity exceeding maximum capacity Maior fault and setting abnormality of instance memory for system FB is set J MX 10 38 14 POU instruction 4 for abnormality in POU Major fault abnormality MX 10 38 15 iom 1 for abnormality in task registration Major fault 96 MX 10 39 0 0 level task skip 1 when task execution is skipped Minor fault MX 10 39 1 1 level task skip You can set to OFF in application program 96 MX 10 39 2 Not used MX 10 39 3 Not used MX 10 39 4 0 level task congestion 1 when specified constant cycle is not observed due to program execution congestion Minor fault MX 10 39 5 1 level task congestion You can set to OFF in application program 96MX 10 39 6 Not used 96MX 10 39 7 Not used 96MX 10 39 8 to Not used 96MX 10 39 14 MX 10 39 15 Not used 13 Annunciator relay MW 10 42 MW 10 43 Table 5 2 12 Address Name Description 9 MX 10 42 0 In
281. f KEYPAD panel U06 Abnormal tension Lower limit setting 0 150 96 0 150 U07 Wound diameter Initial value U08 Material mass U09 Linear taper setting U10 Two point taper setting U11 Two point taper diameter setting U10 96 Set tension kg Dmin U11 mm Dmax mm mm 100 1500 mm 100 1500 500 2000 kg m 500 2000 0 150 96 0 150 0 150 96 0 150 0 2000 mm 0 2000 U09 96 When you use the POD to set the data use an option card OPC VG7 RS RS 485 extension card Though you can connect the POD to the integrated RS485 you need the extension card when you are using the integrated RS485 for another application When you use the PLC to set the data use an option card OPC VG7 TL T Link I F card 4 44 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 4 3 2 Input Output Standard Interface single inverter is used 1 Bit Signal from Control Panel to UPAC POD address 1 Tension command ON on ON IX1 5 5 gt X4 Hardware T link POD 401799 5 2 Operation command ON on command IX1 5 3 O o X2 Hardware T link POD 401799 3 3 Stop command OFF on stop IX1 5 4 Q X3 Hardware T link POD 401799 4 4 Emergency stop OFF on emergency stop IX1 5 6 Q 9 X5 Hardware only 5 Alarm reset ON on reset IX1 5 7 gt o X6 Hardware T link POD 401799 7 6 Mechanical
282. from the list without studying in advance the address and variable definition of F03 Automatic Variables Declaration x Resource C_VG7_6 R_UPAC cw Il ae Name f03 f aa VAR GLOB AT Help T RETAIN AMwITI S D Data type sc Initial value Comment F03 M1 motor parameters setting M1 max speed Fig 3 1 15 3 8 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 2 2 High speed data updating 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 11 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWO 33 16 Address of function code 1 of INV 1 Judge from WORD UPAC gt VG7S QWO 34 17 Data of function code 1 of INV 1 data type of INT UPAC VG7S OWEI 35 18 Address of function code 2 of INV 1 Rn function WORD UPAC gt VG7S QWO 36 19 Data of function code 2 of INV 1 INT UPAC VG7S 9oQWLI 37 20 Address of function code 3 of INV 1 WORD UPAC gt VG7S 96QWLI 38 21 Data of function code 3 of INV 1 INT UPAC VG7S 9oeQWLI 39 22 Address of function code 4 of INV 1 WORD UPAC gt VG7S QWO 40 23 Data of function code 4 of INV 1 INT UPAC VG7S O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 Link acceleration deceleration lt Acceleration deceleration Use to change a function code F E C U dynamically in interlock with the control If the data is written
283. ft mouse button on the Browse R button designate the desired folder in the Choose Folder dialog box and click the left mouse button on the OK button Please choose the installation folder Designate the folder name and path Path within eight characters Do not use fc SD300win space Directories B A Desktop PS My Computer t il 3 Floppy A E e3 C H O Ati 5 My Documents Program Files CJ temp Windows zl Cancel Fig 1 3 1 1 22 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 10 Click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button further The Setup Type dialog box is displayed D300win Setup Setup Type Select the Setup Type to install Welle Fig 1 3 2 Select the Typical T Compact C or Custom U method for setup then click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button 1 If custom installation is selected If Custom is selected the Select Components dialog box is displayed Place a check box for the desired installation items D300win Setup Select Components Choose the components Setup will install gg D300vin program EH MICREX SX WE MICREX SX definition files MICREX SX definition files Comet i ern MICREX SX P5117 Template WMICREX SX PS32 Template MICREX SX PS74 Template WMICREXSXPHIG Template MICREX SX P532 Template ee cen MICREX SX PH16 Temp
284. ftronics ac drive servo motor Item Specification User function block number 256 Nesting of user function block 127 stages User function number 256 User function nesting 127 stages FB instance 620 POU up to 620 FBs can be created on one POU Global variable 8000 Variable Local variable 8000 VAR INPUT Up to 128 H Number of terminals for user FB VAR OUTPUT Up to 128 128 in total Number for Library registration 16 per project Nesting 8 stages x Self diagnosis memory check ROM sum check module failure Diagnosis function monitor Security function Password Calendar function No calendar function available Memory backup by battery Backup range Data memory Battery Lithium primary battery Backup period Five years 25 C Contents of backup memory will be lost during battery replacement Flash ROM integrated into UPAC Application programs system definition ZIP files are stored in flash memory integrated into CPU Reference Keyword Bit Data range Keyword Bi Data range number number BOOL 1 O or 1 REAL 32 2128 lt N lt 2 126 2 126 lt N lt 2128 INT 16 32 768 to 32 767 TIME 32 Oms to 4 294 967 295ms DINT 32 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 DATE 32 0 00 00 to 23 59 59 UINT 16 0 to 65535 WORD 16 0x0000 to OxFFFF UDINT 32 0 to 4 294 967 295 DWORD 32 0x00000000 to OxFFFFFFFF on o 9 Zz o 2
285. ftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 4 Monitoring Data UPAC can refer to the speed torque data and operation state running accelerating etc There are two types of data high speed sampling using the IQ area and 60ms sampling using the M code area Using the former one you can refer to all the data of VG7S Using the M code area you can refer to the data of only the VG7S equipped with UPAC 3 1 4 1 Speed command monitor high speed 1 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 23 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Speed setting 4 frequency 0 JoIWLI O 1 reference monitor 20000 Nmax INT VG7S UPAC Before ASR input lt Speed setting 1 frequency Before multi step speed N 0 AIWO 7 8 reference during V f 20000 Nmax INT VG7S UPAC setting 5 D 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system not applicable to broadcasting e Table 3 1 24 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Speed setting 4 frequency 0 JoIWLI 0 1 reference monitor 20000 Nmax INT VG7S UPAC Before ASR input O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 The speed command monitor refers to the data of speed setting 1 not for the 12 unit system before multi step speed calculation and speed setting 4 refers to the data immediately before ASR input 1 How to use input filter for UPAC SW speed limiter Keypad panel speed setting function calculating Q 9 S curve acc
286. g C70 ASR switching time can be used 4 41 4 2 9 Troubleshooting C efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Start v An orientation command is issued but the motor does not stop No v The motor does not stop at the target stopping position at all No The motor sometimes does not stop at the target stopping position No The motor stops at the target stopping position but the force is weak Resistive torque No The time until the motor stops at the target stopping position is too long No Vibratory hunting is observed when the motor stops at the target position Y No Slow hunting is observed when the motor stops at the target position No v The orientation completion signal is not issued No A change in the stopping position is not reflected No v A change in the function code at the keypad panel is not reflected y No a Contact us for any questions Yes Yes Check if the X1 terminal function is set at 25 U DI Check if the operation signal FWD REV is turned on Check if the spindle encoder advances in the B phase during forward rotation of the motor Check if the UPAC and PG option cards are installed Check if the pulse count of the spindle encoder is set at UNO 09 Check if the site for the orientation command is set at UNO 04 control inpu
287. g 1 frequency reference V T 2 Torque reference 1 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference 5 Control data Cw 6 7 8 definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen All JO The torque limit data is converted assuming that 10000 is the 100 torque with the rated torque being 100 Data 10000 Torque Universal DO1 standard DIOA option 13bit Acceleration time Deceleration time IOC Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4 frequency referencelV f 12 Torque reference 2 13 Torque bias IDR 14 Auxiliary speed setting Example To give a 60 torque limit write 15 Real speed Simulation speed zi 6000 Cancel Fig 3 1 11 3 6 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG Interface 3 1 1 6 Torque bias NCAUTION e After the operation command is turned on and a torque bias command is given the motor does not turn off even if the operation command is turned off To stop after giving a torque bias command turn the operation command off and turn on coast to stop BX Otherwise injuries may be caused The torque bias can be given at UPAC 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 10 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWE 30 13 Torque bias 10000 100 96 INT UPAC gt VG7S
288. g or removing the program is displayed UPAC support for D300win Setup x Welcome Madify repair or remove the program D Welcome to the UPAC support for D300win Setup Maintenance program This program lets Select Remove R and click on the you madify the current installation Click one of the options below N xt N gt button C Modify Next N gt butto B Select new program components to add or select currently installed components to remove C Repair ied Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup Bach Cancel Fig 1 3 22 3 The Confirm File Deletion message box is displayed Confirm File Deletion X To proceed click on the Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components OK button Deletion is executed Fig 1 3 23 4 The following dialog box is displayed during deletion UPAC support for D300win Setup xj Setup Status UPAC support for D300win Setup is performing the requested operations Uninstalling Function definition files for UPAC programming C AD300win Templates WG7_12 p nx Fig 1 3 24 1 31 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E on as ao T7 am Eo x lt a 3 5 Finish the procedure UPAC support for D300win Setup Maintenance Complete Click on the Finish button to close the dialog b
289. gain for 1 0 10 in UNO 01 is assumed to be 1 0 is assumed to be one speed unit with 20000 speed units being the maximum speed for a deviation of one pulse train That is with a difference of 1000 pulses 1000 speed units When the maximum speed is 1500 r min the speed command is 1500 x 1000 20000 75 r min 3 2 2 2 System definition A check mark is placed for the following data items Table 3 2 2 input output Data Application memory Input Control data CW standard DIOA option 16 bit Monitoring of X1 input state 3W 18W Pulse train position reference PG PR Acquisition of pulse train position reference Position detection built in or PG PD Acquisition of pulse train position detection Control data CW Issuance of ACC DEC zero clear command Output Speed setting 4 frequency reference during V f Speed command from UPAC 4W 32W Dynamic switch DSW1 Dynamic switch between speed command from Dynamic switch DSW2 UPAC and internal speed command 3 36 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 2 2 3 Task configuration and program Select a constant period task of about 1 ms to 4 ms considering the position control response and acquisition and response of the control terminal X1 A program example in the IL language is shown below The pulse string acquisition program is applicable to H10060 or H
290. ght in the I O Group setting of the System Definition After clicking on OK download the system definition when a speed command program program is omitted is compiled and downloaded and give a reset command Upon this the control on the VG7S side changes as shown in the figure below panne E ANAA AA nn Speed setting N1 Speed setting N2 Speed setting of other than UPAC 17 UP 18 DOWNN UP DOWN initial value zero Program compilation and downloading System definition setting downloading and resetting Y QW1 18 Program UPAC SW selection 170 Group setting m Inverter 1 Output word Torque reference 1 2 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference 5 Control data Cw 5 Universal DO1 standard DIDA option 13bit 7 Acceleration time 8 Deceleration time 3 Torque limiter level 1 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f Torque reference 2 Torque bias Auxiliary speed setting Real speed Simulation speed Speed setting 1 sent from UPAC Fig 2 2 3 2 9 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 2 3 2 I O group setting I O group setting is on the fourth property sheet of the UPAC system definition screen The setting method is described here Associate the task level of UPAC with the I O data area of the inverter and define the refresh tim
291. h selection and slow speed direction 0 Random path selection 1 Slow speed direction specified by external device U03 Select whether or not the speed exceeds the second slow speed during orientation 0 Stop in shortest time speed boosting included 1 Stop without speed boosting f is specified at UNO 02 without slow speed direction switch the motor always stops in the direction of forward rotation Stopping from control zone Table 4 2 10 State UNO 02 Description Waveform UNO 03 of operation Spindle speed ica Target stop position Position Immediate 11 25 deviation transition into correction mode Arbitrary Control zone Second slow Orientation command from control zone 4 37 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Stopping from outside the control zone Table 4 2 11 State UNO 02 UNO 03 Description of operation Waveform Orientation command from outside the control zone UNO 02 1 UNO 03 0 Stopping in the shortest time by following the external slow speed direction command First slow Spindle p speed speed Second slow cUAVUUTages6B 7777 AAN Target stop Speed di position position 300 0 UNO 02 0 UNO 03 0 Rotating to the target position through the nearest path and stopping in the shortest time Spindle speed Target stop posit
292. hanical holding Injury may result e During pre excitation the speed adjuster does not function and the motor may be rotated by load disturbance When using pre excitation therefore also use the mechanical brake Injury may result e If improper data is set at the function code related with speed adjuster as in the case of setting high gain abruptly the motor may hunt Injury may result efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Instructions on maintenance inspection and replacement e Wait a minimum of five minutes 15kW or less or ten minutes 18 5kW or more after power has been turned off open before starting inspection Also confirm that the charge lamp is off and that DC voltage between terminals P and N does not exceed 25V Electric shock may result e Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance inspection and replacement operations Take off metal jewelry such as watches and rings Use insulated tools Electric shock or injury may result Instructions on disposal e Treat as industrial waste when disposing it Injury may result Other instructions e Never modify the product Electric shock or injury may result Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe e The contact capacity of alarm output for any fault 30A B C and relay signal output Y5A Y5C is 0 5A at 48V DC e The inverter must be securely grounded Besides installation of the
293. iameter is fixed at the initial diameter U35 Operation command off Initial diameter setting i i Calculated winding Winding diameter calculation stop diameter Fig 4 1 18 7 use Xtterminalfunction Setting 0 1 sd X1 terminal function Setting 0 1 sid terminal function Setting 0 1 S uae Individual motor operation switching Setting 0 1 g z E01 X1terminalfunction Setting 0to63 id X1 terminal function Setting 0 to 63 3 Dancer roll control and individual motor operation switching Individual motor operation indicates the operation method of the standard VG7 without dancer roll control or winding diameter calculation where only speed commands are given The switching method between dancer roll control operation and individual motor operation includes two variations contact input X1 and parameter Contact input switching Assign the individual motor operation M DRV to X1 in the following setting After assignment the individual motor operation mode continues while X1 M DRV remains turned on U36 1 E01 25 U DI Parameter switching Specify 1 at individual motor operation switch U48 to start the individual motor operation mode Specify 0 at individual motor operation switch U48 to start the dancer roll control operation mode The individual motor operation mode starts when X1 M DRV is turned on or U48 is 1 4 16 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerso
294. iameter reset vsc Inverter Fault reset Is BX Coast to stop fom 30X 304 5 ka cable pases Silas e Bo 9 Alarm relay output t 30c o o gt Rr E Cable with 2 6 U AfF49 15 A11 Tension feedback signal RS485 RS232C m tension detection signal converter D o F3 DCO 10V 2 gt u M g 9 o Line speed command Model NP4H CNV o a 3 2 U AKE50 14 Ai2 DCO 10V a eps o PC for monitoring RS485 cable DOREAUT R E U AO E69 30 U AO E70 30 Ao1 M a02 Braking resistor DCO 10V DCO 10V 4 46 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 4 3 3 How to Adjust Follow the steps below for adjusting 1 Mechanical Loss Automatic Measuring You can use the mechanical loss automatic measuring command to measure torques necessary for loads at individual rotations of your motor and store the data into the software Required time for the automatic measuring is about eight minutes Mechanical conditions Operate while a paper tube is attached Raw material is not required Mechanical loss measuring Operate at the maximum motor rotation speed determined by the maximum line speed the minimum wound diameter and the speed reduction ratio The rotation speed is automatically measured at 20 points while the speed is reduced stepwise After the mech
295. if the screws and terminals are tight e Check if some element wires at the crimp terminal are in contact with another terminal e Check if the SW1 and SW2 settings are correct The following preparation confirmation and setting are necessary 1 Turn on the main power supply R L1 S L2 T L3 or auxiliary power supply RO TO 2 The UPAC option is recognized 3 Set the function codes Refer to Chapter 3 Preparation for Operation and Test Operation for preparation for operation of the VG7S inverter 1 Power on CAUTION e If the option is turned on for the first time the ErA alarm may be displayed If this happens leave the power turned on for about 30 seconds and turn the power off then on again 1 Recognition of UPAC option If the UPAC option is installed UPAC is displayed in the I O check screen of the keypad panel The screen shown on the right is page 9 of I O OPG PR PG SD IUPAC OSX check Press the key on the keypad panel to go to page 9 If LIUPAC is displayed the inverter does not recognize the UPAC option Check the installation state of the UPAC option in this case OTL DFIELD DSI UP DSI MW 2 Confirmation of ROM version NCAUTION e Some of options are not compatible with early ROM versions of VG7S The operation does not function correctly with early versions Be sure to check the ROM version shown in maintenance information of the keypad panel
296. ification You need the OPC VG7 UPAC and an additional card for interface Package software Tension control package Version number 1200 Use function code UNo 64 for display Control type Constant tension PID control with a tension pick up ATR Auto Tension Regulator Input signal Ai1 Tension detection signal 0 V to 10V Ai2 Line speed input OVto 10V Ao1 10 V to O V to 10V When defined as U Ao you can monitor the Ao2 10 V to 0 V to 10V following output Ao3 10 V to 0 V to 10V 1 Tension setting N Analog 2 ATR correction N a 3 Wound diameter mm 4 Torque corresponding to tension command 76 5 Acceleration deceleration torque 96 6 Mechanical loss torque 96 7 X1 Cancel torque command CCL 2 X2 ON on operation command U Di a X3 OFF on stop command U Di X4 ON on tension ON command U Di 3 Input signal X5 OFF on emergency stop U Di E Digital X6 Alarm reset U Di o X7 Mechanical loss measuring command U Di X8 Reset wound diameter U Di X9 Coast to stop Output Y1 ON on abnormal tension U Do signal Y2 Completion of mechanical loss measuring U Do Y5 ON on inverter error U Do U01 Stall tension setting 0 N O U02 Operation tension setting 0 N O U03 Material thickness mm x41000 U04 Material width mm Other U05 Abnormal tension Upper limit setting 0 150 0 150 se from POD T Link o
297. ign position control gain to UNO 01 INT TO REAL Convert to 32 bit floating point for preparation ST APR REAL LD DEV_CNT DINT_TO_REAL Convert to 32 bit floating point for preparation MUL APR_REAL MUL REAL 0 1 Multiply APR gain scale by 0 1 ST APR_OUT_REAL LD REAL 20000 0 Limit to 20000 to 20000 range LIMIT REAL APR OUT REAL REAL 20000 0 REAL TO INT ST APR OUT SPEED APR output Dynamic switching LD DWORD 16 00000000 Validate No 11 speed setting 4 ST NV148 DSW LD WORD 16 0803 ACC DEC zero clear function X11 ON ST NV122 CW LD APR OUT SPEED ST NV128_SPDREF4 Send speed data to VG7S JMP MAIN_END SPEED_OP Speed control operation routine Dynamic switching LD DWORD 16 00000400 Cancel No 11 speed setting 4 ST NV148 DSW LD WORD 16 0003 ACC DEC zero clear function X11 OFF ST NV122 CW Memory clearing process LD DINT 0 ST PR_CNT Command data count clear ST PG_CNT Detection data count clear ST DEV_CNT LD REAL 0 0 ST APR OUT REAL LD INT 0 ST APR OUT SPEED ST PR DATA ST PG DATA LD BOOL 0 ST SYC_FLG MAIN_END LD UINT 15 Assign ACC DEC zero clear function ST e10 f Assign above function to X11 INV105 CW WORD INV1 M13 control data CW standard DIOA 16 bit INV109 PLSPOSREF INT INV1 pulse train position reference PG PR INV110 POSDET INT INV1 position detection built in or PG PD INV122 CW
298. ine speed multiplied by the APR so that a sufficient offset can be obtained even if the line speed is low Concerning correction method Selection between the offset 1V as to the line speed and motor speed command N can be made for the offset of the dancer roll The offset displayed at option monitor 6 changes between the line speed and motor speed according to the setting at the correction method offset selection U47 TU I o x Q 2 ao e 9 E D If U47 0 correction concerning motor speed command ZAN Offset concerning motor speed command Displayed at option monitor 6 APR output Line speed Bias correction Winding diameter ratio Fig 4 1 14 4 14 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software If U47 0 correction concerning motor speed ZAN Offset concerning line speed Displayed at option monitor 6 APR output Line speed Bias correction Fig 4 1 15 u35 Initial diameter Setting 0 to 2 000 0 to 2 000 mm X5 terminal function Setting 0 1 X5 terminal function Setting 0 to 63 Calculated winding diameter at startup based on initial diameter If initial diameter U35 is not zero When an operation command FWD REV is issued the calculated winding diameter immediately becomes the winding diameter specified at U35 When the operation command is stopped a new wind
299. ing UPAC system definition System configration definition CPU operation definition Memory boundary definition 1 0 group setting Communication setting Level DEFAULT v r Input selection 0 T 2 E m x tv 3 oO aiseg pue uoleiedaid option 120 Input Inverter 2 Input Inverter 3 Input Inverter 4 Input Inverter 5 Input Inverter 6 Input Details Selected 0 718 W r Output selection Binverter 1 Output Option 1 0 Output Inverter 2 Output Inverter 3 Output Inverter 4 Output Inverter 5 Output Inverter 6 Output Details Selected 1 732 W Fig 2 2 4 I O group setting screen The operation method is described in the table below Table 2 2 5 Operation method in I O group setting screen Item Description Initial value The priority of the task included in the resource is listed Level Select the desired task priority to display the current setting The I O service state of the inverter is displayed in a list for each of input signals output signals and option I O Input selection The service state of the input devices used for inputting is set in a All OFF batch for all inverter input points all inverter output points or all option I O points The mask of the output devices used for outputting is set in a batch for all inverter output points or option I O points In a 6 unit system up to
300. ing Speed Ts Filter Threshold value Coefficient pwal diameter diameter ratio Winding diameter ratio Before filter input Winding diameter ratio calculation for determination of speed Dancer roll position is larger than set level and moving farther from center Operation command ON 1 Winding diameter correction valid Line speed Winding diameter calcula I7 tion not held Initial diameter i Y not set Winding diameter ratio i ST Limit Winding diameter ratio for Before filter input E T determination of speed command Dancer roll i T Min nm nn position A gt Q gt Q Wisi diameter ratio I f inding Set level Dead 1 Co correction 1 1s Filter S ic N indi D ici Estimated windin zone ML ot dancer diameter ratio calculation 0 roll upon startup valid Estimated winding diameter ratio at startup VG7 VG7 side lt 1 gt UPAC side UPAC side T side Fig 4 1 3 Block diagram of UPAC dancer roll control software 4 4 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 1 3 Function Code 4 1 3 1 User function list Table 4 1 2 o c i PETS Min Change 2 3 nes Name lies ER Effective setting range Note 1 Unit incre Initial value d
301. ing cycles after the power is turned on Store the current value of data built in the PG Store the difference between the previous and current values of the data built in the PG Extend to 32 bits Add the difference data 32 bit pulse count value Store the previous value of the data built in the PG 3 25 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Concrete example with values Suppose that the motor equipped with a 1024 P R encoder rotates at 60 r min If the above task takes 1 ms each piece of memory data is counted as follows PG CNT 00000000 00004096 32bit PG DATA 0004 or 0005 during rotation or 0000 when stopped Speed calculation example When the difference data PG DATA sampled at 100 ms intervals is 5000 pulses the speed of the rotor motor mechanical shaft or line to which the PG 1024 P R is connected is calculated to be 732 r min in the following equation f 1 1000 ms s Speed of rotor r min 5000 p x p x p SEM Px 004 CP 100 ms 732 A r min 1 5 x 60 s min Example of calculation of winding diameter Acquire data from the PG installed to the winding shaft When the line speed is 100 m min and the difference data PG DATA sampled at 100 ms intervals is 5000 pulses the winding diameter of the winding shaft to which the PG 1024 P R is connected is calculated to be 21 7 cm in the following equation lt
302. ing diameter is judged and operation starts at the initial diameter The winding diameter at startup can be adjusted to a middle diameter with these settings for stable motor speed command at startup If the previous winding diameter is almost the minimum winding diameter and the actual winding diameter is around the maximum winding diameter the motor speed command increases substantially causing large shock Operation command off Calculate diameter d winding Winding diameter calculation stop diameter 2 Fig 4 1 16 If U35 initial diameter setting 0 If the initial diameter U35 setting is zero the calculated winding diameter remains the previous value and operation starts even when the operation command FWD REV is issued Operation command off Calculated ue SSS SSSA winding Winding diameter calculation stop diameter Fig 4 1 17 4 15 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Initial value setting through contact input When the new winding diameter is already known assign initial diameter set to contact input X5 to set the winding diameter initial diameter U35 to the calculated winding diameter while this signal is issued Setting for assigning initial diameter set D SET to X5 U40 1 E05 25 U DI Note Use a temporary command for the X5 signal assigned to the initial diameter setting If the signal remains turned on the calculated winding d
303. ing on single side IT REF 150 10V Torque command torque meter swing on both sides T REF 150 10V Torque command torque meter swing on single side T REF 150 10V Motor current I AC 200 10V Motor voltage V AC 200 10V Input power PWR 200 10V DC link circuit voltage V DC 800V 10V 10V output test P10 output equivalent to 10V 15 10V output test N10 output equivalent to 10V E70 UINT MW 11 166 0146h AO2 terminal function 0 to 6 to 31 Refer to AO1 terminal function Yes E71 jez1f UINT Mw11 167 0147h AO3 terminal function 0 to 3 to 31 Refer to AO1 terminal function Yes 2 i 0 to 31 Refer to AO1 terminal function 9 a 9 E72 e72 UINT MW 11 168 0148h AO terminal function Displayed for models with AIO option Yes n x 0 to 31 Refer to AO1 terminal function 9 us 9 E73 e73 UINT 76MW 11 169 0149h AOS terminal function Displayed for models with AIO option Yes E74 le74 f INT MW11 170 014Ah AO gain setting 100 00 to 1 00 to 100 00 Multiplication Yes AO1 gain setting IT E75 e75 f INT Mw11 171 ot48h AO2 gain setting 100 00 to 1 00 to 100 00 Multiplication Yes E76 e7e f INT Mw11 172 o14Ch AO3 gain setting 100 00 to 1 00 to 100 00 Multiplication Yes wor NT NT E77 ezz t INT Mw11 173 014Dh AO4 gain setting SEE eec AO DOT Yes E78 e78 INTO pawrt rza 014Eh AO5 gain setting IBS eed ean AD RIED Yes AO bias setting E69
304. install program which automatically proceeds necessary actions for installation icon registration and so on When installation is made via a network copying or installation may not proceed correctly according to some network environment and operating environment 1 Inactivate the virus detection software and screen saver 2 Select Control Panel C from the Settings S submenu in the Start menu of Windows 95 98 NT4 0 The case of Windows 98 is described in the following description as a typical example 3 Double click the left mouse button on the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel dialog box 4 Click the left mouse button on the Install 1 button 5 Insert the System Disk No containing the install program into the floppy disk drive 6 Click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button 7 Check that lt A Setup exe gt is displayed in the Command line C of install program text box If not click the left mouse button on the Browse R button select the drive in which the floppy disk is inserted and select Setup exe as a file name Click the left mouse button on the Finish F button 8 A dialog box showing information for installation and program handling is displayed Click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button The Choose Folder dialog box is displayed 9 To change the default destination folder C D300win click the le
305. ion Name Setting PG PA PB code PD PNO 28 M1 PG pulse count selection Motor PG count n AB PNO 29 M1 external PG correction Not used A 12 15V complementary coefficient A B Z UNO 09 Pulse encoder selection Spindle PE count UNO 24 Speed detection selection 0 Built in PG Fig 4 2 4 2 General purpose motor from manufacturers other than Fuji EN 5V line driver Use this method to detect the speed and position with EE General the PE installed to a general purpose motor made by purpose M other than Fuji The relevant function code settings are as follows Table 4 2 4 Function Name Setting code PNO 28 M1 PG pulse count selection Number of installed PEs PNO 29 M1 external PG correction Not used coefficient UNO 09 Pulse encoder selection Number of installed PEs UNO 24 Speed detection selection 1 PG PD 3 Speed and position control with spindle PE Use this method to use a general purpose motor to control the speed and position with the PE installed at the spindle If the gear ratio is not 1 1 PNO 29 must be set Refer to the User s Manual for details The relevant function code settings are as follows Table 4 2 5 Function Name Setting code PNO 28 M1 PG pulse count selection Motor PG count PNO 29 M1 external PG correction Setting based on coefficient A B UNO 09 Pulse encoder selection Spindle PE count UNO 24 Speed detection selection
306. ion Position Q ae deviation Second slow speed 11 25 Control zone UNO 02 1 UNO 03 1 Stopping within the second slow speed by following the external slow speed direction command TU I o x Q 2 ao e 9 E D Spindle speed Second l slow speed Target stop position 360 o Position deviation UNO 02 0 UNO 03 1 Rotating through the nearest path to the target position and stopping Within the second slow speed Spindle speed 5 Position TR ln deviation Second slow speed Control zone 4 38 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 8 Input Output Specification 4 2 8 1 Input signal 1 Control input To use control inputs orientation command slow speed direction command and position change command at general purpose input terminals assign the X1 X2 or X3 terminal to universal DI 2 Gear selection Use RT1 and RT2 of standard functions to switch 3 Stopping position selection Assign X6 and X7 to universal DI to use the terminals for stopping position selection Table 4 2 12 Terminal Name of command Assignment Description X1 F Orientation signal Geran command ON 1 Orientation OFF 0 No orientation regular operation X2 Signal for designating the direction of
307. ion timer 256W Timer 1024W Others 2048W Fig 5 2 6 5 8 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 2 1 6 System memory area 512 words The system memory is an area where flags for informing operation status or abnormal states of UPAC are assigned and its usage is prescribed Resource One CPU system consisting of one CPU module and multiple I O modules 1 System memory list MW 10 0 Resource operation status MW 10 1 Not used MW 10 2 Resource major fault factor MW 10 3 Not used AMW 10 4 Resource minor fault factor MW 10 5 Not used MW 10 6 CPU error factor MW 10 7 Not used MW 10 8 Memory error factor MW 10 9 Not used o an ids VG7S interface error factor MW 10 12 Application abnormality factor major fault MW 10 13 Application abnormality factor minor fault AMW 10 14 to User major fault factor 0 to 47 AMW 10 16 MW 10 17 Not used AMW 10 18 to User minor fault factor 0 to 47 M W 10 20 MW 10 21 Not used MW 10 22 to System definition error factor MW 10 29 MW 10 30 to Not used MW 10 37 Le Euh s Application program error factor M W 10 40 MW 1041 Not used o a PR Annunciator relay AMW 10 44 to Not used AMW 10 48 AMW 10 49 Resource operation information M W 10 50 Resource constitution information MW 10 51 Resource error information
308. ions Item Specification Remarks Connection style Loop back connection through plastic optical fiber cable Communication 4Mbps speed Communication Max extension distance 20 m distance between adjacent inverters The accessory cable attached to distance For systems exceeding 20 m contact us the product is 5 m long Connection Master slave method Max 12 units Selection with function code method Broadcasting method Max 156 units Master slave method Selection in D300win screen Number of 6 unit system Max 6 units 50 W inputs outputs per unit The broadcasting method connected 12 unit system Max 12 units 22W inputs outputs per unit indicates the function where the inverters Broadcasting method same data is written from the Max 156 units 32 W outputs per unit master to all inverters Master slave method Time n 1 x 2 ms n n gt 1 number of units 2 units 2 ms 3 units 4 ms 4 units 6 ms Writing time pier d The reading period is Broadcasting E ai twice the value i unite Iams written on the left 8 units 14 ms 9 units 16 ms 10 units 18 ms 11 units 20 ms 12 units 22 ms Communication link establishment confirmation Blinking green LED on option The digital output indicates the communication state The lamp blinking at 500 ms interval indicates establishment of the communication link 0 D07 is used 1 indicates establishment of the communi
309. ions Set the subjects to adjusting U01 U02 U03 U04 U05 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U27 U28 U31 and U48 Acceleration deceleration time F07 and F08 Set the times to reach the speeds described above and set the pitch of rising speed Note that set the same values as the rising falling of the line speed 2 Tension Control PID Parameters Base parameters for the tension control Subjects to adjusting U20 U21 U25 U26 U29 U30 U44 and U56 to U61 Proportional term P U17 and U22 Integral term I U18 and U23 Differential term D U19 and U24 O Adjust tension control parameters during the stall operation Adjust slack on start Adjust what corresponds to dynamic mechanical loss torque Set U38 U39 U45 and U46 Adjust the tension control parameters at a constant speed Adjust the acceleration deceleration compensation torque Conduct a line operation after adjusting the stall tension and adjust while increasing decreasing the speed Set U33 U34 to U42 U45 to U48 UG2 and U63 4 47 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 3 4 Parameter Description Functions for Setting Tension and Material Conditions oa Stall tension setting Set value 0 980 0 980 N without limiter Sets the tension setting value while stalling Stall tension is present while the tension is ON and the operation command is OFF Operation tension setting Set va
310. ished when power is turned on the communication link is not established but no alarm is displayed When an operation command is issued an inverter to inverter link error Erb is caused as a protective action Table 1 2 13 Absolute maximum rating of optical cable accessory Item Min Max Unit Remarks Storage temperature range 40 75 C Tensile force 50 N Within 30 minutes Failure to operate within one hour an Short time bending radius 10 mm inverter to inverter link error Erb is caused A curvature shorter than 35 mm for a long time may cause an inverter to Long time bending radius 29 j MM inverter link error Erb Be sure to assure 35 mm or a larger curvature Tensile strength long time 1 N Flexibility 1000 times Bending at 90 on 10 mm mandrel core rod spindle Impact test as per MIL 1678 Method Impact ws Kg 2030 Procedure 1 Guaranteed minimum 20 m Guaranteed minimum value due to distance transmission loss 0 to 70 C Weight 4 6 g m Plastic optical cable made by Mitsubishi Rayon accessory 1 21 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 1 3 Preparation of Software 1 3 1 Installation Method 1 3 1 1 Installing the D300win software package The D300win software package is delivered in multiple floppy disks Installation disks contain an
311. ite on F08 QW11 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW11 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW11 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW11 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV11 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV11 58 AO used by INV11 are defined QW11 18 27 2 amp AO AO2 of INV11 INT as universal QW11 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV11 INT QD11 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV11 dynamically 5 29 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 12 INVI2 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV12 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV12 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 34 FS BS E oma Address No Area Name d ET Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A A more information IW12 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f g monitor calculation IW12 1 2 G Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW12 2 6 m Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT oO IW12 3 7 5 Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32
312. ite on F08 QW5 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT A QW5 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW5 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW5 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV5 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV5 58 AO used by INV5 are defined QW5 18 27 2 AO A02 of INV5 INT as universal QW5 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV5 INT QD5 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV5 dynamically 5 26 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 6 INV6 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV6 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV6 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 28 FS BS S RHIN Address No Area Name d nma Type See control block diagram for ata distinction 2 A more information 1W6 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f g monitor calculation 991W6 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW6 2 6 b Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o 51W6 3 7 5 Contr
313. itial flag 1 when initial start cold operation start Use application program to set to 0 if needed MX 10 42 1 Power disconnection flag 1 when power was disconnected during preceding operation MX 10 42 2 to Not used 96MX 10 42 14 MX 10 42 15 Not used MX 10 43 0 0 level start flag 1 during first execution of 0 level task MX 10 43 1 1 level start flag 1 during first execution of 1 level task 96MX 10 43 2 Not used 96MX 10 43 3 Not used 96MX 10 43 4 to Not used 96 MX 10 43 14 MX 10 43 15 Default task start flag 1 during first execution of default task 5 14 on 9 z o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 14 Resource operation information MW 10 49 Table 5 2 13 Address Name Description MX 10 49 0 UPAC operating 1 during UPAC operation MX 10 49 1 Not used MX 10 49 2 Not used MX 10 49 3 Not used MX 10 49 4 Not used MX 10 49 5 Not used MX 10 49 6 Not used MX 10 49 7 Not used MX 10 49 8 to Not used MX 10 49 15 15 Resource configuration information MW 10 50 User program uses configuration information and abnormality information to recognize the resource UPAC status Table 5 2 14 Mare Roue Resource status abnormality error
314. itions Inverter with a small capacity 15kW or lower WARNING B RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation B RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Do not remove this cover while applying power ond at least 5min after disconnecting power More than one live circuit Securely ground earth the inverter 9 ahs W it B06 tn e ECA RU EE OND TRAE ERAT CORRI LC BW ESob5thbu REDRUSREMEO JA X82 EBITEU LE e RGN ER OMA SPICER RO TORT MRL Coo LC RHBL Of to e 7 A8 EXC TOC l D AL RAM VN n DR VIN VU JRA Y OR BUD REOStNHY on manual b d operalion D a nn R C SHOCK Do ver while applying p e r can be removed after at e n of power off and after the GE lamp turns off eMore than one live circuit eDo not insert fingers or anythingelse nto the inverter e Securely ground earth the inverter EU we re m VU 3 CL efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Inside the inverter
315. ittle salt inclusion M Note 1 The storage temperature indicates the allowable temperature in a short period such as during transportation Note 2 Even if the humidity satisfies the rating dew or icing is caused in a site subject to large temperature changes Avoid such sites 1 Do not place the option on the floor Place it on a table or in a shelf 2 To store in an adverse atmosphere wrap the option in a vinyl sheet packing polyethylene film or the like 3 If there 1s danger of humidify effects place a drying agent silica gel etc inside before packing in the procedure specified in 2 Storage in extended period The storage method for storing the option for a long time after purchasing varies substantially according to the environment of the storage site Clarify the concrete environmental specification and contact your dealer or nearest Fuji Electric s sales outlet to obtain advice for assured storage methods Generally observe the following precautions 1 Satisfy the requirements for temporary storage 2 Carefully pack to avoid intrusion of moisture or the like Place a drying agent silica gel etc in the package The amount of the drying agent may comply with JIS Z 0301 Method of moisture proof packaging The target relative humidity inside the package is 70 When leaving this option in VG7S installed to a unit or control panel especially at a site under construction the equipment is often expose
316. jor fault factor 16 to to MX 10 15 15 User major fault factor 31 MX 10 16 0 User major fault factor 32 to to MX 10 16 15 User major fault factor 47 program sets any bit to ON 10 User minor faults MW 10 18 to MW 10 20 Table 5 2 9 Address Name Description MX 10 18 0 User major fault factor 0 to to UPAC will present a minor fault when an application program MX 10 18 15 User major fault factor 15 MX 10 19 0 User major fault factor 16 to to MX 10 19 15 User major fault factor 31 MX 10 20 0 User major fault factor 32 to to MX 10 20 15 User major fault factor 47 sets any bit to ON However the operation continues 5 12 on 9 Zz 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 11 System definition abnormality factors MW 10 22 to MW 10 29 Read only Table 5 2 10 Address Name Description Fault level MX 10 22 0 Not used MX 10 22 1 Not used MX 10 22 2 Not used MX 10 22 3 Not used MX 10 22 4 to Not used MX 10 22 9 MX 10 22 10 Scena definition 1 for abnormality in CPU action definition Major fault 9 MX 10 22 11 CPU memory boundary 1 when memory used in application program Major fault definition abnormality exceeds memory range
317. keypad panel P01 makes simulation speed control simulation possible This becomes inertia simulation for driving a rotating body having an inertia of function code H51 M1 load inertia At this time the inverter does not output a voltage so that there is no need to connect a motor To drive an actual motor refer to the VG7S User s Manual for wiring and test operation of the motor 2 29 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 Checking at the keypad panel Whether the 1000 data is written from UPAC to VG7S as a speed setting or not can be checked at the 7 segment LED The speed data is converted into a scale where 20000 indicates the maximum speed r min Data 1000 x maximum speed 1500 r min 20000 75 r min The 75 r min speed setting is indicated with blinking 75 during stoppage of the inverter with LCD monitor of the keypad panel displaying STOP as shown in the figure below on the right When UPAC is stopped Hz A V min m min kW x10 x100 x M vovv M M M M SIOP PRGPRG MENU F D gt LED_SHIFT When UPAC is operated Hz A V min m min kW x10 x100 M yv y M M M voy STOP PRGPRG MENU F D gt LED_SHIFT e T 2 3 m x tv 3 o aiseg pue uoleiedaid a a a a a A a a a a a a a a FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG JOG NORMAL 34 gt 7 mm JOG NORMAL SHIFT SHIF
318. l cables must be turned on before operation is started If even one unit is not turned on in the system optical communication does not function correctly As well units do not issue warning display alarm state output until an operation command FWD or REV is issued Use the following two methods to check if the optical communication link is established If the master is turned off then on after the communication link is established an alarm is caused 1 Check using LED on optical option Check the blinking state of the green LED on the optical option to check the communication state In this method open the cover of the unit so that the printed circuit board of the optical option is visible 2 14 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples Table 2 3 1 LED blink and communication state No LED blinking pattern State of operation State transition Optical communication is in correct operation state When the option is turned on for the first time after purchase the function code setting is not accurate and the No 2 state is caused without correct operation Optical communication is not in correct operation state e If the setting at switches SW1 or SW2 is wrong Correct operation turn the power off and correct the setting and 2 ee E EE Communication link then turn the power on not established e For setting errors of function codes correct the
319. l l r Snjejs l l uoyeiedQ l l Gw eo IR ou l dOIS NDM l l jeued QvdA3M 4snoeueynuis l uo paun ueuw p MS 9van i spuewwo9 l puewwoo po l D Sao ast r eo zc x 550 Tos 2 S c FE c Zoe E es at c oo B oss sso C o B 593 3838 6 58 GFE oo yul poujow uonejedo ama YOO q euru L efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 3 2 Speed Command Selection Section Ovdn woy Bumes peeds ovdn IS 29A 9dO Y GL peeas im E al Ovdn 9 940 915 L peeds dajsann SH 9 9dO eeds uo P Anoud pax snq pial l dasan Esi XS 19 9dO TON To zi phoda LR 11 9 9dO A l Bumespeedd O spied uodo ag Leese Id le Cejsnini Los pe o sersu or A 0L peecs Fe vl R Bumes Aoyoe 9 dejsniniN Oo iga 41d 291 9d0 eyeoipur SEUAJIMS 6 peods 9 z IIe Jo sayeys 19 dejsniniy vial VIO 29 2dO ZIO desunw SpJeo uondo E I m 4 peeds Q Z peeds deals dejsniniw 619 2p11940 peeds pue Dunes peeds 019 p san O Olen duol 6 peeds Ayeqixny j
320. late D DS matt Sample MICREX SX PHOS Template SX simulator definition files Sample Training Template 3 SX simulator Template Sample Ei 8PS R Sample EHC1SX simulator Sample Ces n definition fles Sample SPS_R Template Sample vj PageLayout v SX Control Utility POD cooperated support Import amp Export of variable name Easy operation menu Install el Fig 1 3 3 Click on the Next N gt button 1 23 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 2 Description of selection items e D300win program Basic program of D300win Be sure to select to install e MICREX SX Select to create programs for MICREX SX Series e SX simulator Sample Select to simulate MICREX SX Series program on the PC D300win This function is being developed and provided as a sample e Page Layout Select to use five page layout samples necessary for printing a project worksheet or the like The introduced page layout file DEFAULT plt is installed without fail e POD cooperated support Function for establishing association in variable allocation and so on in a system of our POD programmable operation display UG210 UG400 series and MICREX SX series e Import amp Export of variable name Function for inputting or outputting variable names from to a CSV file text file e Easy operation menu Basic operations of D300win are selec
321. lative pulses on the UPAC side simply add in the 4ms constant period task Be careful that tasks including data reference by UPAC must use the 4ms constant period Otherwise calculation becomes incorrect p lel s El g 4ms task Pulse addition data 1 2 3 4 5 Immmm UPAC application TINH UT VG7 control application 4j w N E o N Hills I2 i23 s EX IN ee j ijii EZB OP Pow 25536 Ld L nas 5000 25536 30536 bot hA 5000 30536 30000 m4 5000 30000 25000 28000 t z Fig 3 1 40 Example of program for acquiring cumulative PG pulse count PG_CNT using IL language fixed at 4ms task LD INV110 POSDET Store the current value of data built in the PG INT TO DINT Extend to 32 bits ADD PG CNT Accumulation of data ST PG CNT 32 bit pulse count value TEE TENE TONE spe op proe p epe dep pe pede d pog sp cp pego E p PENT ON ES Ey pep pp EDS pode FOE GOES NFO p opp pe b d p qe cp pde REN REX IEEE TEN RI de ERE MD TEE TEE SMS UN TCI CERE TROU RUD TON NE FEY ENS FC TN URN PEE TERT ENS FRE REOS UR TERN EON RE TOI TRIN ee LE ee dd de be dod 3 27 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 5 4 Z phase detection method 1 NCAUTION e To detect the Z phase for the first time after the power is turned on the encoder shaft speed equipped with the Z phase must be 60 r min or faster
322. livered check the following items 1 Check if the product is what you have ordered Check the model printed on the option Nomenclature of model OPC VG7 SI Name of option SI Optical ink option Abbreviation of Serial Interface Name of inverter to which VG7 gt FRENIC5000VG7S the option is installed 2 Check if the product is damaged during transportation 3 Check that all the accessories are included 3 spacers 3 screws M3 1 plastic optical fiber cable for transmission and reception NCAUTION Do not use the option with damaged or missing parts e Otherwise injuries or material losses may be caused 1 2 2 4 Operating environment Use the option in the same environment as that of the VG7S main body Table 1 2 7 Operating environment Item Specification Site Indoors Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Relative humidity 5 to 9596 no dew Free from dust direct sunshine corrosive gases oil mist vapor or water drops Atmosphere Little salt inclusion No dew or icing caused by abrupt temperature changes Altitude 1000 m maximum Vibration 5 9 m s 0 6 G maximum Note Failure to satisfy the above environmental conditions will cause poor performance reduced life and failures Checkup of ROM version of main body NCAUTION e Some of options are not compatible with VG7S of early ROM versions Correct operation is not ensured with early versions Be sure to check the RO
323. ller than 35 mm Connect the optical option via the accessory optical cable a As shown in the figure on the right the M bete connectors for transmission and reception Dark brown Gray Derkbroun Gray are located at the lower end of the optical sw ee sw option Each connector is identified with the iun MER color Connect the gray plug with the gray As PSP e ns connector and the dark brown plug with the T IN V T J L dark brown connector Configure a loop when connecting The Pea i Transm paca Trans sion communication originated at the master is sent to a slave and the communication sent from the slave is received at the adjacent clinic e slave The communication received at the last slave is sent and returns to the master in the connection pattern K Fig 1 2 15 Table 1 2 12 Optical connector on SI card Part No Name Color Outline T 1528 TX Gray Transmitter transmission R 2528 RX Dark brown Receiver reception Notes If the optical cable is not connected or it is inserted improperly correct communication is impossible e If the communication link fails due to a broken line in the communication path under power application an inverter to inverter link error Erb is caused e f the communication link is not establ
324. loss automatic measuring command ON while command is active IX1 5 8 O X7 Hardware T link POD 401799 8 7 Wound diameter reset ON on reset IX1 5 9 o oO X8 Hardware T link POD 401799 9 2 Bit Signal from UPAC to Control Panel 1 Inverter error ON on error QX1 23 4 Y5 Relay output Hardware 401799 5 2 Abnormal tension ON on abnormality QX1 23 0 Y1 Transistor output Hardware 401799 0 3 Completion of measuring mechanical loss ON for two seconds after completion QX1 23 1 Y2 Transistor output Hardware 401799 1 3 Data Setting from POD and Control Panel to UPAC 1 Line speed command Ai2 DC 0 B V 0 B m min 2 Tension feedback signal input Ail DC0 10 V 0 E N 3 Stall tension setting N 0 EN USER P1 POD 402818 4 Operation tension setting N 0 EN USER P2 POD 402819 5 Abnormal tension setting Upper limit level N 0 EN USER P5 POD 402822 6 Abnormal tension setting Lower limit level N 0 EN USER P6 POD 402823 7 Initial wound diameter setting mm E Emm USER P7 POD 402824 8 Material width mm E Emm USER P4 POD 402821 9 Material thickness mm E E mm 1000 1 mm USER P3 POD 402820 10 Material specific gravity density kg m E E kg m USER P8 POD 402825 11 Taper Linear taper setting 0 H USER P9 POD 402826 Two point taper setting 0 H USER P10 POD 402827 Two point taper diameter setting mm E Emm USER P11 POD 402828 T Taper setting i T
325. lter 0 000 to 0 040 to 5 000 s 4 Yes C64 UINT 94MW11 256 0240h ASR 4 detection filter 0 000 to 0 005 to 0 100 s 4 Yes C65 UINT MW 11 257 0241h ASR 4 output filter 0 000 to 0 002 to 0 100 s 4 Yes 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C66 c66 WORD MW11 258 0242h Acceleration time 4 100 0 to 999 9s Yes 1000 to 3600s 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C67 c67 WORD MW11 259 0243h Deceleration time 4 100 0 to 999 9s 13 Yes 1000 to 3600s C68 UINT _ MW11 260 0244h S curve starting side 4 0 to 50 0 Yes C69 UINT MW11 261 0245h S curve end side 4 0 to 50 96 0 ves C70 UINT MWw 11 262 0246h ASR switching time 0 00 to 1 00 to 2 55 s Yes C74 UINT MW11 263 10247h Acceleration deceleration 00 to 100 00 3 Yes time switching speed C72 UINT 9 MW11 264 0248h ASR switching speed 0 00 to 100 00 96 Yes C73 00 to 11 Creep speed selection Creep speed 1 Creep speed 2 WORD 6MW 11 265 0249 at UPIDOWN mode 0 Code C18 19 Yes 1 Ai CRP1 CRP2 Table 5 2 41 P Motor Parameters 60 ms updating and High speed Written referencing data E F code Variabl updating Name Setting range Type by name 0to3 0 Vector control P01 p01 f UINT MW 11 289 0301h M1 control method 1 Sensorless vector control Yes 2 Simulation mode 3 Vector control Synchronous motor 55 0 to 37 The display table KW HP is switched according to 0 or 1 in F60 0 to 35 Setting for speci
326. lue 0 980 0 980 N without limiter Sets the tension set value while operating Operation tension is present while the tension is ON and the operation command is ON Material thickness setting Set value 1 30000 0 001 30 mm without limiter Material width setting Set value 100 1000 100 1000 mm without limiter N Functions Relevant to Setting Material Conditions Abnormal tension Upper limit setting Set value 0 1960 0 1960 N without limiter Abnormal tension Lower limit setting Set value 0 1960 0 1960 N without limiter When these set values are exceeded a signal for stopping the line operation is provided externally and the winding machine stops Wound diameter Initial value Set value 100 1500 100 1500 mm U07 without limiter TU I o x Q Qa ao e 9 E D Sets the initial wound diameter of the winding machine Material mass Set value 500 2000 500 2000 kg m without limiter Enter a mass per 1 m in kg Sets for calculating the acceleration deceleration torque Used for GD conversion corresponding to the material oO Taper Setting Linear taper setting Set value 0 150 0 150 without limiter See the figure below Two point taper setting Set value 0 150 0 150 without limiter See the figure below Two point taper diameter setting Set value 0 2000 0 2000 mm without limite
327. meter to UNO to adjust UNO using the keypad panel or other standard equipment of VG7S when you have no PC to be used for maintenance The user code is the 64 pieces of word of data UN 0 01 to 64 shown in the table below Table 3 1 12 485NO Name of parameter No 485NO Link NO Name Keypad panel Setting range Remarks indication UNO 01 BO1h DBh USER P1 USER P1 32768 to 32767 UNO 02 BO2h DCh USER P2 USER P2 32768 to 32767 UNO 03 BO3h DDh USER P3 USER P3 32768 to 32767 UNO 04 B04h DEh USER P4 USER P4 32768 to 32767 UNO 05 BO5h DFh USER P5 USER P5 32768 to 32767 UNO 06 BO6h EOh USER P6 USER P6 32768 to 32767 UNO 07 BO7h Eth USER P7 USER P7 32768 to 32767 UNO 08 BO8h E2h USER P8 USER P8 32768 to 32767 UNO 09 BO9h E3h USER P9 USER P9 32768 to 32767 UNO 10 BOAh E4h USER P10 USER P10 32768 to 32767 UNO 11 BOBh USER P11 USER P11 32768 to 32767 to UNO 60 B3Ch USER P60 USER P60 32768 to 32767 UNO 61 B3Dh USER P61 USER P61 32768 to 32767 UNO 62 B3Eh USER P62 USER P62 32768 to 32767 UNO 63 B3Fh USER P63 USER P63 32768 to 32767 UNO 64 B40h USER P64 USER P64 32768 to 32767 Limitations on usage e The range of the data and name are fixed as shown above UPAC cannot control the indication shown at the keypad panel e Only 1
328. mmediately replacing the battery Please refer to the appropriate section described on the UPAC in the VG7 User s Manual for replacing the battery 4 Review and adjust your machine system when the machine system presents noise vibration due to resonance or backlash of gears When you cannot adjust the machine system to restrain them you should employ electrical measures and you should adjust the standard functions of the VG7 the gain and integration time of the PID controller and the parameters for the filter while you separate the inverter from the floor Please note that we cannot provide measures for adding dedicated control applications for the control of your UPAC or VG7 5 It is not allowed by the copyright law to duplicate rent or resell the entire or a part of the program 6 There is no limitation restriction on adding altering or deleting the specification to develop your own program based on this tension control program We will provide technical support and consultation on developing programs 7 Fuji is not responsible for direct or indirect damages caused by the program itself of WPS VG7 TEN or alteration addition or deletion made to the program by a customer I agree the terms above Your signature here 4 43 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 3 1 System Consideration 4 3 1 1 Specifications Table 4 3 1 Item Option card type Tension Control Spec
329. mples In this section examples of applications of pattern operation and position control using pulse train transmission and winding control using PI dancer position control are shown Use these simple examples for reference of application creation using UPAC 3 2 1 1 Specification The specification is determined as shown in the block diagram below 1 Description of specification e UPAC sends speed commands to VG7S while automatically switching the speed set at function codes UNO 01 and 02 e To change the data unit set at the function code to r min convert the command scale of the data on the UPAC side FRENIC5000VG7S e A fixed switching interval is used sus ET Scan e Select speed setting 1 for the speed ee nor a a Los setting of UPAC to make settings Es a out PRAA commans acceleration deceleration calculator sw of VG7S valid Fig 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 System definition In the system definition place a check mark at the following data item Table 3 2 1 Input output memory Data Application Output Speed setting 1 frequency 1W 32W command during V f Speed command issued by UPAC 3 2 1 3 Task configuration and program The task period is fixed at 1 ms A program example in the FBD language is shown in the figure on the right Description of program i D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER Oj x PWM function block Eie Edit
330. mum rotation 15 to 1500 15 to 1500 r min speed Line speed 0 to 20000 0 to 2000 m min maximum I I I Items marked by can be set from the PLC after you add the T Link I F card 4 56 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 3 Tension Set Value Block eee ERES ON on tension ON 5 5 Tension set Torque output ina li i value calculation corresponding On during line operation tension o 0 to 980 0 to 980 N Stall tension setting Operation tension O to 980 0 to 980 N POD setting KEYPAD Tension upper limit panel Alarm level T Link Tension lower limit Alarm level 0 to 1960 0 to 1960 N 0 to 980 0 to 980 N 4 ATR output Speed Motor rotation reduction 0 to 10000 0 to 100 00 ratio rotation speed Maximum tension 0 to 14700 0 to 1470 N setting range 1 Output from wound diameter calculation h 2 Output from taper calculation Items marked by can be set from the PLC after you add the T Link I F card 4 Taper Calculation Block NEEDED EE UPAC Output from wound diameter calculation 4 Output from taper calculation 2 Taper calculation 0 to 150 0 to 150 U09 o 0 to 150 0 to 150 U10 Linear taper setting Two point taper setting Two point taper diameter setting Items marked by can be set from the PLC after you add
331. n Increase the ASR integration time BRON 1 Examine the ratio between the orientation gain and ASR gain 1 to 4 is recommended for the orientation gain to ASR gain ratio 1 Set a stopping width at completion width setting UNO 05 The completion signal is issued in the width 2 Set the stopping width for transition after completion at UNO 06 completion width after stopping 3 Check if the completion signal activation timer setting UNO 07 is too large When internal stopping position setting 1 to 4 is used 1 Use the I O check of the keypad panel to check if contact switching is received at VG7S When external stopping position setting is used 1 Check option monitor 3 to check if the position change command is received 2 Check if the site for position change command is set at UNO 04 control input selection 1 Some codes cannot be changed during operation See section 5 2 Function Code 2 Excessive settings are limited to the upper or lower limit 4 42 TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 4 3 WPS VG7 TEN WPS VG7 TEN is package software for tension control designed for a winding system Windows Personal Computer Software Package Tension control system on VG7S The feature of the package includes Constant tension torque control
332. n 1 bit 15 Ai of INV1 Ait gt Cancel Fig 3 1 37 3 24 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 5 2 Data acquisition method 1 Applicable ROM version H100 60 H20060 or later 1 For forward rotation of PG encoder The PG pulse data increases during B phase rotation forward rotation The difference between the sampling data of the previous and current cycles sampled at a t ms interval is added at every t ms time to obtain the pulse count Because the pulse count is obtained from four times the encoder value 4 multiplied by the number of encoder pulses divided by the revolution is the pulse count Task w N E o N Ve i 3 3 s cases lt t Period ms 60536 is replaced with 65536 60536 Fig 3 1 38 Example of program for acquiring cumulative PG pulse count PG_CNT in IL language A LOS Coa pe pp s s sg I ppp pepe sp e pp s pes p Feet Vom Ene TEN TEAN TCE p pope pepe e LE TEES EY Pope 3 35 de pe Ue pp esos JMP PULSE GET LD SUB INT TO DINT ADD MAIN END INIT FLAG PULSE GET INV110_POSDET PG_DATA BOOL 1 INIT_FLAG MAIN_END INV110_POSDET PG_DATA PG_CNT PG_CNT INV110_POSDET PG_DATA Store the data built in the PG immediately after power is turned on This routine is repeated in the second and the follow
333. n 3 1 1 The F07 and F08 data is overwritten as shown in the block diagram on the right Therefore validate parameter 1 RT1 RT2 OFF OFF when using the IQ memory S08 and S09 written by the link system are overwritten with the data of UPAC Link acceleration deceleration S08 F07 S09 Overwrite F08 OPC VG7 UPAC Acceleration deceleration 77 7 time 4 l OPC VG7 SI UPAC UPAC SW Fig 3 1 19 3 1 3 Operating Inputs and Outputs 3 1 3 1 Referring to digital inputs NCAUTION e To use control inputs X1 to X9 and X11 to X14 DIOA only for monitoring from UPAC set function codes E01 to E13 at 25 to assign each control input to universal DI U DI so that activation and deactivation of the contact do not give effects on the control function of the main body 1 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 15 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Control data CW Define U DI to allow UPAC to 9eWLI 5 6 standard DIOA 16 bit Data type 32 INT VG7S UPAC use the DI terminal for the control input AIWO 13 14 bigs oka i65 Datatype26 INT VG7SUPAC Extended 1 0 exclusively for O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 16 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Control data CW Define U DI to all
334. n INV5 dynamically 5 21 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 INV6 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV6 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV6 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 22 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type 3 See control block diagram a for more information 16 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation 991W6 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter A IW6 2 3 g Torque current reference final 10000 100 INT Just before torque current e reference filter 991W6 3 4 Magnetic flux reference final 10000 100 INT IW6 4 5 2 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT IW6 5 6 E o data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W o i IW6 6 7 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW6 7 8 Speed setting 1 Frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT g Before multistep speed during V f a reference LIN6 8 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW6 9
335. n function is not included in the standard function It can be realized using the UPAC option and orientation package software Priority order fixed D Built in RS485 3 2 OPC VG7 TL SX Field Bus Lo Option monitor Gear selection 1 2 OPC VG7 SI UPAC J Stopping position command fo te M MET OPC VG7 RS meli RE Current OPC VG7 DIO B position I Position OR deviation L ORT gain 1 UNO 14 OQ ORT gain 2 UNO 15 ORT gain 3 UNO 16 S05 oro ORT gain 4 UNO 17 a iti Rd ms LL Gum iid Control block diagram Position cange gt Latch e e gt ORT gain EN 4 2 2 Speed command i comman E Pod OFF selection unit i Stopping position o ID e ol i olot gt Speed i d Automati l i seecioni2 OJ Unozo Seeron L IGL EE setting ie setting calculation LL d GU E i Stopping postion c UNO 21 Mil uo Let 2 Control zone i UNO 22 Stopping position E o judgment i The orientation operation is d setting 3 l i switched between the regular Stopping position speed command and the UNO 23 Setting 4 po 1 Correction mode correction mode
336. n saftronics ac drive servo motor IN U a O 23 a D ON o A D U37 X2 terminal function Setting 0 1 X2 terminal function Setting 0 to 63 APR I output zero hold Assign APR I zero hold APRIZH to X2 in the following settings After assignment the APR I output is held at zero while X2 APRIZH is turned on U37 1 pri Y n C J X3 terminal function Setting 0 1 X3 terminal function Setting 0 to 63 APR output zero hold Assign APR zero hold APRIZH to X3 in the following settings After assignment is made the APR I output is held at zero while X3 APRZH is turned on U38 1 E03 25 U DI The APR I integration value too is held at zero when X3 APRZH is turned on X4 terminal function Setting 0 1 X4 terminal function Setting 0 to 63 Winding diameter calculation hold Assign winding diameter calculation hold D HOLD to X4 in the following settings After assignment the previous value of the calculated winding diameter is held while X4 D HOLD is turned on U39 1 E04 25 U DI X6 terminal function Setting 0 1 X6 terminal function Setting 0 to 63 c ru Winding feeding switching Use the setting in a system where a feeding roll idler and winding roll are included and there are two line directions to switch the line direction mid Winding dancer roll Speed increase upon sag Feeding Idler Winding lt _ ge Winding da
337. n torque during deceleration Example dv dt for decelerating from 500 m min in ten seconds is 500 10 50 4 52 TU I o x Q Qa ao e 9 E D efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 9 Ao1 to Ao5 Monitor Output Selection u51 A01 Output item selection for output monitor Set value 1 6 1 Final value for tension command 2 Final value corresponding to the ATR correction 3 Current value of wound diameter 4 Torque corresponding to tension command 5 Torque for compensating acceleration deceleration 6 Torque for compensating mechanical loss N 10 V for the maximum tension setting N 10 V for the maximum tension setting mm 10 V for the maximum diameter 96 10 V for 150 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 us Ao2 Output item selection for output monitor Set value 1 6 1 Final value for tension command 2 Final value corresponding to the ATR correction 3 Current value of wound diameter 4 Torque corresponding to tension command 5 Torque for compensating acceleration deceleration 6 Torque for compensating mechanical loss N 10 V for the maximum tension setting N 10 V for the maximum tension setting mm 10 V for the maximum diameter 96 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 u53 A03 Output item selection for output monitor Set value 1 6 1 Fi
338. nal value for tension command 2 Final value corresponding to the ATR correction 3 Current value of wound diameter 4 Torque corresponding to tension command 5 Torque for compensating acceleration deceleration 6 Torque for compensating mechanical loss N 10 V for the maximum tension setting N 10 V for the maximum tension setting mm 10 V for the maximum diameter 96 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 A04 Output to output monitor Set value 1 6 1 Final value for tension command 2 Final value corresponding to the ATR correction 3 Current value of wound diameter 4 Torque corresponding to tension command 5 Torque for compensating acceleration deceleration 6 Torque for compensating mechanical loss N 10 V for the maximum tension setting N 10 V for the maximum tension setting mm 10 V for the maximum diameter 96 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150 U55 A05 Output item selection for output monitor Set value 1 6 1 Total corresponding to torque command 2 Final value corresponding to the ATR correction 3 Current value of wound diameter 4 Torque corresponding to tension command 5 Torque for compensating acceleration deceleration 6 Torque for compensating mechanical loss 96 10 V for 150 N 10 V for the maximum tension setting mm 10 V for the maximum diameter 96 10 V for 150 10 V for 150 96 10 V for 150
339. nce Countermeasure In a system where forward and reverse rotation is necessary and the random path access method from a stopping state is selected contact the manufacturer of the encoder for the pulse width in the Z phase of Fig 4 2 8 the encoder and choose one having as short a pulse width as possible Check the number of edges of the pulse width of the Z phase to calculate the stopping accuracy 7 pulses 7x0 088 0 616 D 4 26 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 2 Basic Connection Diagram Examples are shown for rotation position determination using the encoder installed to the machine shaft Our option detects the Switch setting on option pulse including the Z phase therefore select PD The Z phase is Function SW1 SW2 used for detection of the absolute position of the machine The PD OFF OFF stopping position and orientation command can be given via T LD ON OFF Lin DIO B card built in RS485 Field Bus or the like PR OFF ON To drive a synchronous motor use the separate PMPG card SD ON ON 1 Connection example using T Link MICREX r1 Main power o_o ATAD AAO P capsule g B supply 1 FRENIC5000VG7 MOTOR MACHINE
340. ncer roll Speed decrease upon sag Winding Idler Feeding Fig 4 1 19 As described at the mark after the line direction changes and the winding roll becomes the feeding roll the correction polarity of the dancer roll becomes reverse therefore X6 WRW must be used to switch the polarity of the dancer roll position input Specify both rolls winding and feeding rolls on the left and right of the above figure as a winding roll when specifying the dancer roll position input at U05 and U06 U41 E06 25 U DI efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Ai2 terminal function Setting 0 3 Ai2 terminal function Setting 0 to 18 Select assignment of Ai2 To specify 1 to 3 at U42 to assign A12 for dancer roll control E50 Ai2 terminal function must be specified at 14 U Ai U42 0 No assignment U42 I Taper variable gain TP_AIG U42 2 Initial diameter ratio INI AID When the above settings are given an input at Ai2 determines the initial diameter instead of the initial diameter specified at U35 Effective when X5 D SET is turned on 20 times winding diameter ratio upon 10 VDC input U42 3 Line speed gain LINE AIG Specify the gain for the line speed input across 12 and 11 using the input at Ai2 The setting is multiplied by four upon 10 VDC AO2 terminal function Setting 0 1 E70 AO2 terminal function Setting 0 to 31 Dancer roll position output The current dancer
341. ncer roll position input Setting 0 to 1 000 0 0 to 100 0 Use the setting if there is variation in the dancer roll position input across Ail and M around the center to prevent the dancer roll from becoming stable efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Dead zone output APR input Dancer roll position input U28 Dead zone Fig 4 1 13 APR invalidation dancer roll level Setting 0 to 50 0 to 50 Lowest line speed Setting 1 to 100 1 to 100 m min If there is slight fluctuation in the dancer roll position during stoppage of the line integration or other correction measures may function causing slight motion of the motor To avoid such phenomenon the APR output is held at zero if the dancer roll position 1s smaller than APR invalidation dancer roll level U29 to prevent the motor from slight motions The line stoppage judgment is made in comparison between the line speed input across 12 and 11 and lowest line speed U34 Line stoppage is judged 1f the line speed is smaller than U34 Bias correction Setting 0 to 1 000 0 0 to 100 0 U47 Correction method offset selection Setting 0 1 The APR output is multiplied by the line speed to produce the offset A sufficient offset cannot be obtained if the line speed is zero line stoppage or it is low Therefore a high selector priority is given on the higher one setting is prepared for the l
342. ndia speed DL U14 d WC PRP jain D HOLD diameter ratio APR Pad iDS U15 _ ds Winding Accelerating Winding diameter Initial D_SET diameter mm decelerating DM U16 st Accelerating decelerating line speed calculation hold EAM Initial Option monitor 3 UDL U17 U35 initial ein Winding diameter Windi diameter d ao 3 calculation value ninging x U02 Minimum oi U02 Min winding diameter mm widing diameter i diameter Analog initial diameter INI AID Selection DS U20 F61 INI AID a ASR P J DM U21 gt ASR1 P DL U22 F62 DS U23 gt ASRI i ASR I DM U24 DL U25 1 time i Taper gain i S M AO TP_AO1 pue imm Line speed U34 min line speed level me AG lo gt Taper output PRA Taper gain U08 Taper P TP_AIG selection Winding diameter mm UO2 Min winding diameter DS U07 Taper start winding diameter U11 Middle winding diameter DM 1U03 Max winding diameter DL APR details APR D details Integration mm Derivation Input s process gt Limit Input gt process i U181time constant U31 APR I output limit U19 D impiconstant APRZH APR 1 zero hold VG7 side 1 UPAC side UPAC side 1 VG7 side Fig 4 1 3 Block diagram of UPAC dancer roll control software 2 4 4 4 UU t 1 x Q Qa o fe gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software
343. ndicates 10 00 The data updated at the keypad panel of VG7S or via the communication system RS485 T link etc is reflected on UPAC within 60 ms Similarly on the other hand the data changed on the UPAC side is recognized by VG7S within 60 ms The system definition 1s unnecessary for the referencing or updating of function code data Write in the worksheet of the program to finish the work 1 How to use When function code F03 M1 max speed is referred to from UPAC new variables on the worksheet are defined When Function List a global variable worksheet is opened as shown in the figure below a list is shown in the alphabetical order from code a to code U Select f03 f from the list Variable x Variable list of Resource C_VG7_6 R_UPAC ettine Cancel f03 f F03 M1 motor paran F 4 M1 motor parameters setting 7 F05 M1 motor parameters setting M1 rated voltage Properties F07 Acceleration time 1 F08 Deceleration time 1 Help F10 M1 electronic thermal setting M1 electronic thermal overload relay F11 M1 electronic thermal setting M1 electronic thermal overload relay F12 M1 electronic thermal setting M1 electronic thermal overload relay F14 Restart mode after mome Fig 3 1 14 Click on OK to open the Automatic Variables Declaration dialog box In the dialog box the address and variable definition of function code F03 are 99MW11 3 and UINT The user can select
344. ng injury e Ensure that the inverter and heat sink surfaces are kept free from foreign matter lint paper dust small chips of wood or metal chips as fire or accident may result Do not install or operate a damaged inverter or an inverter with missing parts as injury may result e When changing installation bracket position use the attached screws as injury may result efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Instructions on wiring e Connect the inverter to power via a line protection molded case circuit breaker or earth leakage circuit breaker as fire may result Use the cables of the specified size as fire may result e Always connect a ground wire as electric shock or fire may result A licensed specialist must perform the wiring works as electric shock may result e Turn off the power before starting the wiring work as electric shock may result e Wire the inverter after installation is complete as electric shock or injury may occur e Do not supply power to any inverter of which parts are broken omitted or damage in transportation as electrical shock or fire may result e Confirm that the phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply as injury may result e Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals U V and W as injury may result e Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals P and N as fir
345. not compatible with VG7S of early ROM versions Correct operation is not ensured with early versions Be sure to check the ROM version in the maintenance information given at the keypad panel If the version is uncertain contact us Check the ROM version of the main body before installing the option If the option is already installed check the ROM version of the main body in the state To check view the information displayed on the right of MAIN and MTR in MAIN H 1xxxx the maintenance information of the keypad panel MTR H2xxxx KP K xxxx The screen shown on the right is displayed on page five of the maintenance information Press the key of the keypad panel to open page five Table 1 2 4 ROM version Model of option MAIN MTR OPC VG7 UPAC H1003D or later H2003D or later 1 7 1 2 1 5 Storage 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v A Le E 2 as ao Sz am Eo x lt a 3 Temporary storage Store the option in the environment specified in Table 1 2 5 Table 1 2 5 Storage environment Item Specification Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Storage temperature Ne 25 to 65 C Without dew or icing caused by abrupt temperature changes Relative humidity 5 to 95 te 2 Free from dust direct sunshine corrosive gases flammable Atmosphere gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration L
346. nspection After the product is delivered check the following items 1 Check that the delivered item is the ordered one Check the model printed on the option Nomenclature of model OPC VG7 UPAC Name of option UPAC UPAC Option Name of inverter to which the option is installed 1 6 VG7 FRENIC 5000 VG7S efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 2 Check for damage given during transportation 3 Check if all the accessories are contained Accessories 5 spacers 1 M3 screw 1 backup battery installed to product CAUTION Do not operate the product with damaged or missing parts Otherwise injuries or material losses may be caused 1 2 1 4 Operating environment Operate the option in the same environment as that of the main body of VG7S Table 1 2 3 Operating environment Item Specification Site Indoors Ambient 10 to 50 C temperature Relative humidity 5 to 95 no dew Atmosphere Free from dust direct sunshine corrosive gases oil mist vapor or water drops Little salt inclusion No dew or icing caused by abrupt temperature changes Altitude 1000 m maximum Vibration 5 9 m s 0 6 G maximum Note Failure to satisfy the above environmental conditions will cause poor performance reduced life and failures Checkup of ROM version of main body NCAUTION e Some of options are
347. ntrol Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao Sz am 5 a 3 1 3 1 2 Installing UPAC support function Use an installation program to install The installation program executes the following process e Adds the UPAC support function to D300win e Adds an uninstall icon for the UPAC support function to the program folder 1 Before installing NCAUTION e Before installing the UPAC support function you need to install D300win Install D300win first if you have not installed D300win See MICREX SX Series USER S MANUAL D300win lt GUIDE gt for installing D300win If you have installed the UPAC support function uninstall the UPAC support function for safety Though you can overwrite to install without uninstalling you will have such a problem as you cannot uninstall the UPAC support function completely When you upgrade the version we recommend that you uninstall first and then install again Rae Installing This process adds the UPAC support function to installed D300win Follow the procedure below 1 Stop your virus detection software and screen saver 2 Click the Start button point to Settings S and then click Control Panel C of Windows 3 Click the Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel window 4 Click the Install 1 button 5 Insert a recording media CD ROM WPS VG7 PCL containing the installation program into the d
348. o motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 5 INVS data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INVS In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INVS does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 21 FS BS 5 Remarks Address No Area Name data distinction Type 8 See control block diagram a for more information IW5 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation IW5 1 2 Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW5 2 3 m Torque current reference final 10000 100 INT Just before torque current 2 reference filter IW5 3 4 Magnetic flux reference final 10000 100 INT IW5 4 5 2 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT IW5 5 6 E Te data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W o i IW5 6 7 B Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W IW5 7 8 Speed setting 1 Frequency 20000 Nmax INT g Before multistep speed reference during V f o reference IW5 8 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT 3 IW5 9 10 5 Pulse train position reference 1 1 latched at 4ms INT e 10 and 11 are used for pulse E PG PR
349. ocessing included Counter instruction O 7us CAL RET processing included Memory capacity Program 32k steps memory Data memory 8KW 32KW for MICREX SX series NP1PS 32 Control Timer 256 points function Counter 128 points elements Differential relay 256 points Hold relay 256 points No of I O points VG7S control Max 302W variables 6 unit system 50W x6 units 2W 12 unit system 22Wx12 units 2W Task Level types 0 1 default level Priority 0 gt 1 gt default level Number 3 Cause of task Cause of Constant period event Up to two start interruption Fixed period Integer multiple of fixed cycle interruption up to Fixed cycle interruption from cycle 32000ms VG7S Period is adjustable through loader Default Based on interrupt executed in a period task execution rounded up according to task execution time Example Executed in 3ms cycle where interrupt is 1ms and task execution period is 2 3ms PG number 64 Length per POU Max 4k steps Operation Max 1024 nesting FB FCT System FCT 185 types such as transmission string numbers analog and 32 or more bit operation System FB 28 types such as flip flop timer counter file Calendar message and analog and pulse BANK_CHG available for MICREX SX series NP1PS 32 are not available User FCT 256 User FB 256 User FCT FB Max 128 2 128 nestings including task nesting switch available Loader interface Transmission RS485 specification 4 line type
350. of the corresponding data items in Cancel the I O Group setting screen of output definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen JLIKSIEIEIEJEHEJEIEIHSIEJCIETETE lt 1 A 5 oe Fy fa o Fig 3 1 20 Each control input must be assigned to universal DI if referencing only is the purpose when the ON OFF state of X1 to X9 and X11 to X14 is referred to from UPAC For example X1 is assigned to SS0 in the factory shipment setting When this signal is turned on multi step speed 1 becomes valid To avoid this set U DI to refer to the state of X1 without using the multi step speed function Decomposition of word data The data of the control input is referred to in word information The data format is as shown below 1 Control data CW operation command type 32 15 8 7 ea 0 FWD Forward operation command 1 REV Reverse operation command 2 to 15 X1 to X14 RST 2 DIOB option type 26 15 8 7 pumped p 0 to 15 X21 to X36 After acquiring develop the word information into bits An example in the IL language is shown below 3 12 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface HEHEHEHEHE Hee EHE EE EHE EE EHE EE HE SSSR EE EE HHH EE EE HHH ERE EHE HE EE HE EE E EHE HE EEE EEE EET CARTE the standard DI input data Refer to global variable INV105 CW VAR EXTERNA
351. og position of the dancer is detected and input to Ail of the driving VG7S of the sender and transferred to UPAC At this time the function selection of AD is set at universal Ai e UPAC takes PI control based on the dancer position command UNO 03 so that the difference with the dancer position becomes zero where the PI output is added to the line speed for a speed setting transferred to VG7S Variable speed setting 4 frequency reference during V f e The PI constant of the PI controller is assigned to function codes UNO 01 and 02 of the keypad panel e The operation state of the inverter is checked at a constant period of 60 ms using the INT signal bit 3 of function code M14 inverter shutoff MW11 624 3 and the output of the integration term is reset to zero during inverter shutoff with INT signal being turned on 3 2 3 2 System definition A check mark is placed in the following data items of the system definition Table 3 2 3 Input output Data Application memory Input INV1 Ai Ai1 Analog dancer position detection 2W 18W INV1 Ai Ai2 Analog line speed command Output Speed setting 4 frequency reference during V f Speed command from UPAC 1W 32W 3 38 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 2 3 3 Task configuration and program Because high speed response is unnecessary a 10 ms to 100 ms constant period is enough for the task period
352. ol data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 9 16 bit 2 9591W6 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W T IW6 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT 9eIW6 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV6 4000h 10V INT 7 UPAC uses INV and Ai IW6 7 16 5 Ai Ai2 of INV6 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as 3 universal QW6 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QWE 9 2 o Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter 4QW6 10 5 Z g Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW6 11 6 G Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition m 13bit required QW6 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT Overwrite on F07 QWE 13 8 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT Z Overwrite on F08 QW6 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT QW6 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT O QW6 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW6 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV6 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV6 58 AO used by INV6 are defined QW6 18 27 2 AO AO2 of INV6 INT as universal QW6 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV6 INT QD6 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV6 dynamically 7 INV7 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV7 you nee
353. om Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Type 14 Cause of alarm 15 12 87 0 ar Alarm code 0 to 48 Order of alarm occurrence e 1st to 5th Number of alarms 1 to 5 Table 5 2 49 Alarm codes Code Display Description Code Display Description Code Display Description 0 No alarm 17 Lin Input phase loss 34 Ar1 Error code 1 for specific user application 1 IPE IPMerror 18 LU Undervoltage 35 Ar2 Error code 2 for specific user application 2 dbH DB resistor overheating 19 nrb NTC thermistor 36 Ar3 Error code 3 for specific disconnection user application 3 dCF DC fuse blown 20 oc overcurrent 37 Jar4 Eror code 4 for specific user application 4 lao Excessive position 21 OH1 Overheating at heat sink 38 Ars Error code 5 for specific deviation user application 5 EF Ground fault 22 OH2 External alarm 39 Jare Eror code 6 for specific user application 6 Ern Memory error 23 OH3 Inverter internal overheat 40 Ar7 Error code T for specific user application 7 Er2 KEVFAD panel 24 OH4 Motor overheat 41 Ar8 Error ead Sfor specin communication error user application 8 Er3 CPU error 25 OL1 Motor 1 overload 42 Arg Error code 9 for specifie user application 9 Er4 Network error 26 OL2 Motor 2 overload 43 ArA Error endo iu specific user applica
354. om host 0to 1to2 0 Fuji s general purpose inverter H40 h40 f UINT MW11 360 0428h Protocol 1 SX Loader protocol Yes 2 Modbus RTU Select 1 SX for the special PC loader for VG7 0to5 Internal ASR Torque and magnetic flux Ai T REF H41 h41 f JUINT MW11 361 0429h control setting DIA card Yes Torque command selection DIB card Link Internal ASR H42 h42 f UINT Mw11 362 042Ah Torque curent commandi A Ai IT REF Yes selection 2 DIA card 3 DIB card 4 Link 0to3 Magnetic flux command 0 Internal calculation UINT MW11 363 042Bh election 1 Ai MF REF Yes 2 Function code H44 3 Link Name Setting range ke d E A A A l p i H43 H44 MW11 364 042Ch B pria Tluxreterense 10 to 100 Yes 0t02 Observer setting 0 Observer inactive H46 UINT MW 11 366 042Eh Observer type selection 1 Load disturbance observer Jes 2 Vibration suppression observer H47 h47 MW11 367 042Fh M1 compensation gain 0 00 to 1 00 Multiplication Yes 0to3 0 Line speed invalid internal PG valid 1 Analog line speed detection AI LINE H53 i MW 11 373 0435h Line speed feedback selection 2 Digital line speed detection PG LD Yes 3 High selector High level motor speed and line speed are selected H55 MW11 375 0437h Zero speed control setting 0 to 5 to 100 Multiplication Yes Zero speed control gain H56 n56 f UINT Mmw11 376 0438h Zero speed c
355. on Line speed DCO0 10V L acceleration deceleratio deceleration 1 command Ai2 compensation A torque Acceleration detection level 0 to 1000 U33 dead zone Deceleration detection level 0 to 1000 U34 dead zone Deceleration dv dt on U40 O to 100 0 to 100 m min sec emergency stop 0 to 100 0 to 100 m min sec dv dt during acceleration U62 0 to 100 0 to 100 m min sec dv dt during deceleration Torque setting corresponding to dynamic U45 0 to 3000 0 to 30 mechanical loss while operating Torque setting corresponding to dynamic U46 0 to 3000 0 to 30 mechanical loss while stalling Active time of dynamic mechanical loss Mew 0 to 5000 0 to 5 sec while operating Active time of dynamic mechanical loss U39 0 to 5000 0 to 5 sec while stalling 100 to 2000 100 to 2000 mm Material width setting i 500 to 2000 500 to 2000 kg m Material mass setting Eg pua 0 to 32767 0 to 327 67 kg m Setting for GD corresponding to reel U36 Goresponding D maternal 0 to 150 0 to 150 Correction corresponding to torque U41 compensation Acceleration deceleration U42 0 to 150 0 to 150 corresponding to reel Correction corresponding to torque compensation O to 10000 0 to 100 00 V Motor rotation Speed speed reduction EET 1 Output from wound ratio L stella spad diameter calculation Items marked by can be set from the PLC after you add the T Link I F card 7 M
356. on 20000 Nmax INT o 991W2 3 7 E Control data CW standard DIOA Data distinction 32 W 9 16 bit 2 991W2 4 8 a Operation status SW Data distinction 21 W 4 IW2 5 9 Line speed input 20000 Nmax INT IW2 6 15 5 Ai Ai1 of INV2 4000h 10V INT UPAC uses INV and Ai 991W2 7 16 5 3 Ai Ai2 of INV2 4000h 10V INT terminals for control input Ai 26 used by UPAC is defined as 2 universal QW2 8 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before multistep speed during V f reference QW2 9 2 e Torque reference 1 10000 100 INT Before torque limiter QW2 10 5 Z m Control data CW Data distinction 32 W QW2 11 6 Universal DO1 Standard DIOA Data distinction 33 W Universal DO definition a 13bit required o QW2 12 7 5 Acceleration time 1 0 1s INT ey Overwrite on F07 QW2 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT E Overwrite on F08 QW2 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT 4 QW2 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT 2 QW2 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT g Before ASR before V f during V f calculation QW2 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV2 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV2 5g AO used by INV2 are defined QW2 18 27 Z AO AO2 of INV2 INT as universal QAW2 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV2 INT QD2 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV2 dynamically 3 INV3 data The following table lists data exchanged between U
357. on is conducted for PC operation previous value is retained or cleared to 0 Note that an area where previous values are retained is cleared to 0 when a project is downloaded Example The current values for the counter and the accumulation timer and the previous values for the edge detection are retained to the previous values and the current values for the timer is cleared to 0 3 Eight words per point of timer four words per point of counter and two words per point of edge detection instruction are used 4 The size of the instance memory area for system FB can be changed in cooperation with other memory areas Use CPU Memory size definition in Resource setting dialog box to change the size 5 The following table shows the default number of points for the timer the accumulation timer the counter the edge detection You can increase decrease the numbers as needed Accumulation timer Edge detection Others 128 points 32 points 64 points 256 points 2048 points Observe the following condition when you set the point number for the timer the accumulation timer counter edge detection or others Timer point number x 8 words Counter point number x 4 words Edge detection point number x 2 words others Set size for instance memory area for system FB IEC expression MW 9 0 Edge detection 512W Note Numbers of words in the left memory map Counter 256W are the default values Accumulat
358. on of icon in program group WE The D300 win icon is the icon for starting the D300win system D300win The SX Control Utility icon is the icon for starting the SX control utility of the EN MICREX SX Series Using the SX control utility the input output data of the basic SX Control input output module on the MICREX SX system can be monitored and outputs can Utility be checked The File Divide amp Merge icon is the icon for starting the file divide amp merge ri function Use the file divide amp merge function to divide and save one compressed File Divide amp project file file larger than floppy disk capacity or join the separate files into one Merae m The Backup Utility icon starts the program for backing the project file created a n using an earlier version of D300win The project file created with Ver 1 and i Ra ith 1 Backup Utity opened with Ver 2 cannot be opened with Ver 1 1 35 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor TT a T 2 a oS 43 sy EET 2 D 32 The Easy operation menu icon is the icon for displaying a menu containing basic s Easy operation operation items of D300win Your can execute operation ranging from project 3 menu development to debugging from the menu The SX simulator icon is the icon for starting the MICREX SX simulator Use the 8 rt zii simulator to simulate the MICREX SX Series programs offline on the PC This SX
359. one week or so after an ErA alarm minor failure relating to the battery is issued replace it immediately Table 6 2 1 Replacement timing The year and month are displayed on the battery guarantee period Note The battery replacement timing is the year and month five years after manufacture Replacement battery model NP8P BT Nominal voltage 3 6V 6 2 1 Battery Replacement Procedure CAUTION e Improper operations during battery mounting or removal may cause damage to the product e Before mounting or removing the battery turn OFF the inverter input power and confirm that the charge lamp CHARGE is OFF If the external control circuit is powered by a separate power supply the power is applied to the inverter control terminals 30A 30B 30C Y5A and Y5C even if all of the inverter main circuit control and auxiliary power supplies are turned OFF open e Turn OFF open the external power supply as well to prevent electric shocks NCAUTION An ErA alarm critical failure memory backup error may occur when the power is first turned ON after battery replacement In this case keep the power ON for approximately 30 seconds then turn it OFF and ON again E on T 4 Q pue soueusjuIen Follow the procedure below to properly replace the battery 6 2 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 6 Maintenance and Inspection 1
360. onitor 6 Offset 4 2 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 1 1 2 Using the synchro transmitter The synchro transmitter detects the dancer position in a system using the Fuji Electric s MCA OPC VG7 SN synchronous interface option The analog output S4 with common S2 of the synchro transmitter is connected to the standard analog input terminal Ai 1 with common M of VG7S 1 How to install the synchro transmitter 1 Install the synchro transmitter so that the output becomes larger when the target control position is in the speed boosting direction When voltage output S4 is positive 10V the speed increases and maximum correction is made 2 To change the polarity exchange SY1 and SY2 terminals 3 During installation of the synchro transmitter to the machine adjust the angle so that the output from the synchro transmitter becomes OV at the center of the maximum movable span of the movable shaft of the synchro transmitter 4 Adjust VR2 so that voltage output at S4 is 10 VDC in the maximum speed boosting direction check that the voltage output at S4 is 10 VDC 0 5V in the maximum deceleration direction 5 The speed boosting direction varies according to the installation position of the synchro transmitter 1n reference to the main body of the inverter Refer to the figure below For forward winding control refer to Fig a for reversing control
361. ontrol 0 to 100 Pulses Yes completion width Suppression function setting O to 1 H57 a UINT MW11 377 0439h Over voltage suppression 0 Inactive Yes unction 1 Active Over current suppression oto H58 d UINT 99MW 11 378 043Ah 0 Inactive Yes unen 1 Active Load adaptive control function 0 io 3 A ettin Ineffective H60 i UINT MW11 380 043Ch g Yes Load adaptive control P unction definition 1 H61 4 MW11 381 o43pn Lead adaptive control 0 Wind up upon forward rotation of motor 81 Yes unction definition 2 4 1 Wind down upon forward rotation of motor H62 f UINT Mw11 382 043Eh Winding speed 0 0 to 999 9 m min 2 Yes H63 a La MW11 383 043Fh Counterweight 0 00 to 600 00 t 3 Yes on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN H64 MW11 384 0440h Safety coefficient 0 50 to 1 00 to 1 20 Yes H65 MW11 385 0441h Mechanical efficiency 0 500 to 1 000 Yes H66 JUINT Mw11 386 0442h Rated load 0 00 to 600 00 Yes 9 Oto 1 Heg er AMW 11 888 0444h Alarm date delete Automatically reset to zero after data is written 11 No 0 to 9999 H70 E UINT Mw11 390 0446h Adjustment for manufacturer 0 Standard Yos For manufacturer 1 1 Lift 2 to 9999 Undecided 0to6 Unnecessary to operate for regular operation Automatically reset to zero after data is written 0 Inactive 1 ACR tuning H71 h71f UINT Mw11 391 0447h For manufacturer 2 2 Volt
362. oo m am m en n 4 Select one of the following six points for the option monitor according to the data type For example to display a signed decimal DEC for the speed data select option monitor 5 or 6 To display the status using bits select option monitor 1 or 2 for a hexadecimal HEX Speed data is displayed on option monitor 5 Speed data op 5 Gb Ladder La 48 8 C gt 2GB 4 Fig 3 1 35 Table 3 1 32 Displaying data type of monitor Monitor Display Data range Option monitor 1 HEX 0000 to FFFF Option monitor 2 HEX 0000 to FFFF Option monitor 3 DEC 0 to 65535 Option monitor 4 DEC 0 to 65535 Option monitor 5 DEC 32768 to 32767 Option monitor 6 DEC 32768 to 32767 3 23 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 5 Using Pulse Data NCAUTION e The contents of the pulse data vary according to the ROM version of the main body e Pulse data may not be obtained via the optical link according to the ROM version of the main body 1 6 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 33 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks 9oIWLI 9 10 Pulse train position reference PG PR 1 1 INT VG7S UPAC 9eIWLI 10 11 Position detection built in or PG PD 1 1 INT VG7SSUPAC 96lWLI 11 12 Position detection Z phase input PG PD
363. oppage ofthe line Adjustment of ASR P and I according to position of dancer roll Application when the current winding diameter 2 middle winding diameter DM The dancer roll must be returned to the center quickly if it is far from the center If the winding diameter is large the mechanical inertia is large too so that ASR P must be increased Ifthe current winding diameter is equal to or larger than the middle winding diameter DM and the danger roll position is equal to or larger than U33 dancer roll level for application of ASR P and I DL ASR P and I are made U22 ASR P and U25 ASR I for the maximum winding diameter DL If the above mentioned line stoppage and danger roll position conditions overlap for example if the dancer roll position is larger than U33 after controlled stop at a large winding diameter the dancer roll condition is given priority and ASR P and I for the maximum winding diameter DL are applied Line speed filter Setting 0 to 5 000 0 000 to 5 000 s U27 Motor speed command filter Setting 0 to 5 000 0 000 to 5 000 s The line speed filter U26 is a filter applied to the line speed that is input across 12 and 11 Use this filter if there is fluctuation in the line speed signal issued by the sender The motor speed command filter U27 is a filter applied to the motor speed command calculated with UPAC Use it when hunting is observed in the motor Dead zone for da
364. opping state That is if only the forward or reverse rotation is selected or a single direction is selected for orientation from a stopping state the stopping accuracy described in specifications is assured 1 Explanation The position count of VG7S is reset to zero at the Counter reset rising edge of the Z phase reference position as F sing edge shown in the figure on the right Because there are two edges rising and falling Phase B for each of the A and B phases and the phase Phase Z difference between phases is 90 there are four mmm Forward rotation Circumference of spindle edges in each period with the A and B phases Mark Each edge is counted at the hardware counter built in VG7 resulting in 4096 counts for a 1024 P R Ko encoder because of multiplication by four TU I o x Q 2 ao e 9 E D Phase A Counter reset Rising edge rL 7 pulsese Suppose that the pulse width of the encoder in the Z phase is seven edges example shown on the Phase A right The absolute position adjusted in reference phase B to the mark during forward rotation deviates by ELS seven edges that is seven counts during reverse rotation Circumference of spindle i Reverse rotation gt Mark Seven counts for a 1024 p r encoder are equivalent to 0 6 An allowable deviation of 0 6 in the stopping accuracy of the spindle machine must be checked in adva
365. opying files 1 appears Confirm the installation setting and click the Next N gt button Inst EEE UPAC support for D300win Setup j 15 Files are copied and the icon is Setup Status registered to the Program folder You can click the Cancel button to pause the operation to select to retry or to stop during the installation instal STE lu Fig 1 3 16 Before you click the Next N gt button in the Start Copying Files dialog box you can click the lt Back B button to return to the previous dialog box and change the setting UPAC support for D300win Setup 16 When the setup has been completed Mec RUNS the dialog box on the left appears Setup has finished installing UPAC support for D300win on your computer Click the Finish button to restart the computer Fig 1 3 17 1 29 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 1 3 2 Changing the Program Option programs can be added or deleted to from the D300win system having been installed or the program having been set up can be installed again 1 Click the left mouse button on the Start button of the Windows system and select D300 win program group from the Programs P menu then click the left mouse button on the D300win setup program icon CP Backup Utility Click the left mouse button on the UPAC setup program icon to ad
366. orrection coefficient 000 to 5 000 EI Yes A25 MW11 425 0519h d CRT correction coefficient 000 to 5 000 EL Yes A26 MW11 426 051Ah M2 R2 correction coefficient p id to 5 000 4 Yes A27 UINT MW11 427 051Bh M2 exciting current 0 000 to 5 000 Yes correction coefficient A28 MW11 428 051Ch M2 ACR P gain 0 1 to 1 0 to 20 0 Yes A29 MW11 429 051Dh M2 ACR I integration time 0 5 to 1 0 to 100 0 ms Yes A30 MW11 430 051Eh M2 PG pulses 100 to 1024 to 60000 o Yes 0to 1to 3 0 No thermistor 1 NTC thermistor A31 UINT MW11 431 051Fh M2 thermistor selection 2 PTC thermistor Yes 3 Ai M TMP Set the protection level of the motor protection function using E30 through E32 0to2 Motor overheat protection function when special NTC thermistor for VG motor is used In this case select M2 electronic thermal ds rg B K inactive for the setting of the electronic thermal overload relay setting overload rela A32 a32_f UINT MW11 432 0520h M2 electronic thermal y i Yes a 0 Inactive with special motor for VG overload relay function I d h 1 Active for general purpose motors use for internal selection cooling fan 2 Active for inverter motors use for external cooling fan M2 electronic thermal 0 01 to 99 99A A33 a33 f WORD MW11 433 0521h overload relay 100 0 to 999 9A Yes operation level 1000 to 2000A LE You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underline
367. our steps according to the gear ratio using digital inputs RT1 and RT2 Table 4 2 17 Digital input Effective functions RT2 RT1 Position Acceleration Slow speed 1 Speed control deceleration S curve setting control time ASR1 P gain ASR1 l integration constant Acceleration S curve acceleration on starting side 1 OFF OFF Slow speed ASR1 FF gain Orientation time 1 S curve acceleration on arrival side 1 1 1 ASRI1 input filter gain 1 Deceleration S curve deceleration on starting side 1 ASR1 detection filter time 1 S curve deceleration arrival side 1 ASR1 output filter ASR2 P gain ASR2 integration constant Acceleration OFF ON Slow speed ASR2 FF gain Orientation time 2 S curve on starting side 2 1 2 ASR2 input filter gain 2 Deceleration S curve on arrival side 2 ASR2 detection filter time 2 ASR2 output filter ASR2 P gain ASR2 integration constant Acceleration ON OFF Slow speed ASR2 FF gain Orientation time 3 S curve on starting side 3 1 3 ASR2 input filter gain 3 Deceleration S curve on arrival side 3 ASR2 detection filter time 3 ASR2 output filter ASR2 P gain ASR2 integration constant Acceleration ON ON Slow speed ASR2 FF gain Orientation time 4 S curve on starting side 4 1 4 ASR2 input filter gain 4 Deceleration S curve on arrival side 4 ASR2 detection filter time 4 ASR2 output filter The function for damping the shock during switchin
368. ow UPAC to 9eIWLI 3 6 standard DIOA 16 bit Data type 32 INT VG7S UPAC use the DI terminal for the control input O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 The digital inputs referred to by UPAC are the standard DI X1 to X9 DIOA option X11 to X14 and DIOB option X21 to X36 not for 12 unit system 1 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor How to use The control input can refer to terminal information X1 to X9 X11 to X14 and X21 to X36 eter Bueutwod Name and communication input information X1 to X9 RST and X11 to X14 The communication input information needs the setting of function code H30 link operation For details of the communication 1 Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f Torque reference 1 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference 5 Control data Cw 6 7 8 Universal DO1 standard DIO4 option 1 3bit Acceleration time Deceleration time input refer to the corresponding a Iorque merecen d is in Chapter 4 10 Torque limiter level 2 escripuion 1n apter 4 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f To refer to the data place a check 12 Torque reference 2 13 Torque bias 14 Auxiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset Place a check mark at the check box
369. ox l InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on UPAC support for D300win i Bancel Fig 1 3 25 Reference e Files created and saved by the user are not deleted during program deletion e If D300win is uninstalled without uninstalling the UPAC support function file deletion does not function correctly Uninstall the UPAC support function before uninstalling D300win e You can uninstall similarly using Add Remove Programs in the Control Panel window 1 32 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 3 3 2 Uninstalling D300win To delete the D300win system file from the hard disk follow the procedure below 1 Click on the Start button of the Windows system and select the D300win program group from the Programs P menu and click the left mouse button on the D300win setup program icon UM Backup Utility D300win Help i D300win Setup WE D300win Ed File Divide amp Merge Notes on use of D300win E Sx Control Utility Lui SX simulator Sample Easy operation menu Fig 1 3 26 2 A dialog box for modifying repairing or removing the program is displayed D300win Setup x Welcome Modify repair or remove the program D Ss Welcome to the D300win Setup Maintenance program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below C Modify Selec
370. pacity Applicable inverter model capacity FRN15VG7S 2 4 15 kW or less FRN18 5VG7S 2 4 18 5 kW or more Loosen the two surface cover installation screws at part a shown in Fig 1 2 4 and hold the upper part of the surface cover to remove it 1 As shown in Fig 1 2 5 remove the surface cover installation screws the quantity varies according to the capacity to remove the surface cover 2 Remove the two screws at part c to remove the keypad panel 3 Remove the two screws at part d to remove the keypad panel case Control PCB Fig 1 2 4 Front cover removal method Fig 1 2 5 Front cover removal method FRN15VG7S 2 4 15 kW or less FRN18 5VG7S 2 4 18 5 kW or more efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am Eo x lt a 3 4 Option installation method Follow the procedure below to install the option When using the option with another option refer to the installation procedure and operation manual attached to the other option 1 Install the option to fit it into the connector CN10 on the control PCB 2 Install the five spacers and one M3 screw attached to the option into the option installation holes as shown in the figure below 3 Connect the battery connector to CN2 4 Referring to 3 How to remove the front cover reverse the removal procedure to reinstall the front cover Spacers i 7 OPC VG7 UP
371. position during operation at a speed and rotation to the target position in a stopping state at zero speed Be sure to combine with the FWD or REV operation command The direction of rotation of ORT from operation depends on the FWD or REV command ORT from the stopping state is in the random access direction toward the target position or slow speed direction command 1 ORT from running state Stop Motor attarget Unlock speed position Stop at target position Servo lock FWD REV ORT Ee Fig 4 2 2 2 ORT from stopping state Motor Unlock speed Stop at target position Stop at target position Servo lock Servo lock 4 23 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 2 1 3 Master device The interface on the VG7S side must be selected according to the master device for issuing stopping position and controlling commands such as orientation command Refer to the following flow chart for examination Selection of stopping position command stopping position command Inside Internal Source of External device Use I O PLC t Use RS485 Use the sequence function of UPAC Arrange the development environment v Specify the stopping position at UNO 20 to 23 and switch using X6 and X7 Install the OPC VG7 TL card Install the OPC VG7 DIO
372. pport Import amp Export of variable name v2 E asy operation menu Space Required on C OK Space Available on C 9342016 K Installahreld lt Back Cancel Fig 1 3 20 4 Place a check mark for component list items to be added and clear the check box for those to be removed and click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button 5 If additional components are marked a Change disk dialog box is displayed Insert the prompted disk and click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button 6 After installation is completed the Maintenance Complete dialog box shown in the next subsection is displayed Click the left mouse button on the Finish button to close the dialog box 1 30 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 3 3 Uninstalling 1 3 3 1 Uninstalling the UPAC support function To delete the UPAC support function from the hard disk follow the procedure below 1 After selecting the D300win program folder from the Programs P submenu in the Start menu of Windows click on the UPAC setup use the program folder having been designated during installation GP Backup Utility D300win Help j9 D300win Setup E D300win ER File Divide amp Merge Notes on use of D300win f SX Control Utility Lui SX simulator S ample Easy operation menu upac setup Fig 1 3 21 2 A dialog box for modifying repairin
373. que reference T Yes Use DI to switch among torque bias T1 T2 and T3 0 00 to 1 00 s F50 50 1 UINT 99MW 11 50 0032h Torque bias starting timer 300 1 00s 3 Yes Set the time to reach 300 0to 1 Polarity selection of data output related to torque AO F51 51 UINT 9MW11 51 0033h Torque command monitor keypad panel code M 48 Yes polarity selection 0 Torque polarity 1 A positive value for driving and a negative value for braking 999 00 to 1 00 to 999 00 Keypad panel LED LCD Set the conversion coefficient for determining the load monitor setting shaft speed and line speed displayed on the LED FEE fo2 Y WORD MW11 52 0034h LED monitor display Displayed value 7 motor speed x 0 01 to 200 00 12 Yes coefficient A The setting is effective only in the 0 01 to 200 00 range and values out of the allowable range are restricted LJ You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 33 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written updating Name Setting range Type by 999 00 to 1 00 to 999 00 Set the conversion coefficient for determining the displayed command value feedback variable output LED monitor value process variable of the PID adjuster using F53 f53 f WORD MW11 53 10035h
374. r See the figure below aD Tension N PA i Set tension value at the maximum diameter TX 100 U09 100 N Dmin j Dmax Wound ep di t U28 iameter mm 9 4 48 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 4 Tension Conditions Setting Coil diameter Minimum diameter Set value 100 2000 100 2000 mm without limiter Enter the minimum value for the coil diameter Enter the bobbin diameter Range setting for maximum value for tension detection value Set value 0 14700 0 1470 N without limiter Enter the maximum tension for scale conversion for the tension detection value Use N for entry Speed reduction ratio Motor rotation speed Enter Machine shaft rotation speed Set value 0 10000 0 100 00 without limiter x 100 Range setting for maximum tension set value Set value 0 9800 0 980 N without limiter Enter the maximum tension set value for scale conversion for the tension set value Use N for entry Enter kg x 9 8 5 Functions Relevant to Detecting Tension These are terms set for the feed back control for a difference between the instructed tension and the detected tension A proportional operation P an integral operation I and a differential operation D of the ATR as a control type for eliminating a difference between a measured value and a reference value are us
375. rated voltage 80 to 999 V Yes A05 MW11 405 0505h M2 rated speed 50 to 1500 to 24000 r min Yes A06 MW11 406 0506h M2 maximum speed 50 to 1500 to 24000 r min Yes A07 MW11 407 0507h M2 poles 2 to 4 to 12 Poles 1 Yes A08 E MW11 408 0508h M2 R1 0 00 to 30 00 Yes A09 aos t UINT Mw11 409 0509h M2 X 0 00 to 50 00 Yes 0 01 to 99 99A A10 a10 f WORD MW11 410 050Ah M2 exciting current 100 0 to 999 9A 13 Yes 1000 to 2000A 0 01 to 99 99A A11 WORD 96MW 11 411 050Bh M2 torque current 100 0 to 999 9A 13 Yes 1000 to 2000A A12 MW11 412 050Ch M2 slip driving 0 001 to 10 000 Hz 4 Yes A13 MW11 413 050Dh M2 slip braking 0 001 to 10 000 Hz 4 Yes A14 MW11 414 050Eh M2 iron loss coefficient 1 0 00 to 10 00 Yes A15 MW11 415 050Fh M2 iron loss coefficient 2 0 00 to 10 00 Yes A16 MW11 416 0510h M2 iron loss coefficient 3 0 00 to 10 00 Yes A17 MW11 417 0511h M2 Le saturation opi 100 0 Yes M2 magnetic saturation A18 MW11 418 0512h cient 2 0 0 to 100 0 Yes A19 a19 f UINT Mw11 419 0513h M2 magnetic saturation 0 0 to 100 0 96 2 Yes coefficient 3 magnetic saturation A20 MW11 420 0514h Cont 0 0 to 100 0 96 Yes A21 UINT MW11 421 0515h magnetic saturation 0 0 to 100 0 2 Yes coefficient 5 A22 MW 11 422 0516h secondary time constant 0 001 to 9 999 s 4 Yes A23 MW 11 423 0517h t M2 induction voltage 0 to 999 V Lol Yes coefficient A24 MW11 424 0518h E Lo c
376. ration in UPAC ST 0 Not established Monitor the information of function code M14 output terminal Y1 to Y18 at UPAC or connect the DO output at the terminal block DIOA connector to an external device Setting example To assign the Y1 terminal for the check of communication link establishment set 45 0 D07 at function code E15 Y1 function selection at the keypad panel The communication link is established without relations to the 038 UPAC start stop stetting or D300win control command if connection is correct 2 Option recognition and ROM version confirmation NCAUTION e Even if the optical option is physically installed the communication link is not established if the connector is not inserted completely or there is poor continuity Be sure to check on the I O check screen of VG7 if BSI UP is recognized correctly e The optical option is not compatible with VG7 of early ROM versions The communication link is not established with an early version Be sure to check the ROM version at the maintenance information indicated at the keypad panel For any uncertainties about the version contact us 2 15 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Recognition of optical option If the optical option is installed and switch SW2 on the optical option is set at ON ON the I O check screen at the keypad panel indicates WMSI UP The screen on the right is displaye
377. re removed Read this document thoroughly for complete understanding Limitations UPAC is equipped with a high performance CPU installed in MICREX SX but the functions of UPAC are not fully equivalent There are limitations in the following functions e Calendar and clock function Because of this nothing is displayed in the major failure time information and power shutdown history information of detail RAS The calendar clock function of D300win always shows January 01 1970 00 00 00 Because UPAC is not equipped with the key switch of MICREX SX the key state is always TERM e HELP of UPAC system definition of D300win is not supported e MICREX SX is displayed as the title of each dialog box of D300win e Battery change in the live line state is impossible 1 4 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 1 2 1 2 Specifications Table 1 2 1 Performance Item Specification Note restrictions Instruction Language IEC language compliant IEC61131 3 Speed Sequence instruction 0 12us min Integer addition subtraction instructions 0 14us min Multiplication instruction 0 16us min Division instruction 1 94us min Floating point addition subtraction instructions 0 18us min Multiplication instruction 0 18us min Division instruction 1 4us min Timer instruction 1 0us CAL RET pr
378. rget position after detecting a reference position Z The initial speed is fixed to the forward direction CCW and is limited by UNO 25 ORT speed just after turning ON r min Set the UNO 25 to 100 r min or more When you set to a low speed the motor does not detect the reference position and may continue running I Running for Several Rotations Operate your inverter with the speed control at a certain speed 100 r min or more on turning on power without detecting a reference position Z phase and let your inverter to detect the reference position after running your motor for several rotations You use your sequence 4 2 7 2 Soft stop while running When you want the ORT operation while your motor is running at a speed higher than a set speed for the first slow speed N1 you use the standard deceleration time to set whether the soft deceleration is used as a deceleration operation to N1 or not N E T 9 ORT ON arget stop Q positon o a s x Yn NT Cece 360 0 tt 2 et Figure 4 2 15 Table 4 2 8 Time Definition T Deceleration time to the first slow speed Depends of the set value for the deceleration time of the parameter t2 First slow speed maintaining time up to 360 degrees t3 ORT deceleration time depends of N1 and ORT gain 4 35 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 2 7 3 ORT while running ORT Stop mode selection Set v
379. rive 6 Click the Next N gt button 7 Check if A SETUP EXE is displayed in the text box of Command line for installation program C A depends on the recording device you are using Otherwise click the Browse R button to specify the drive and the folder 8 Left click the Finish button Note e The menu names and the dialog box names in step 2 to 7 depend on the OS you are using Substitute them if needed You can use Explorer to left double click the SETUP EXE in the recording media containing the installation program instead of executing the operation from 2 to 7 1 26 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup UPAC support for D300win Setup x 9 A while after InstallShield Wizard working box is displayed a dialog box Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for UPAC showing the information on installation support for D300win and how to handle this program appears The InstallShielde Wizard will install UPAC support for Click the Next N gt button after you D300win on your computer To continue click Next are satisfied UPAC support for D300win Setup 10 If an already installed UPAC support Welcome function is found a dialog box for Modify repair or remove the program modifying editing or deleting the program is displayed Select Repair E and click on the Next N gt button to install again
380. rive a synchronous motor specify 3 to POI to detect the speed using a PMPG card Because the PMPG card is not effective for position control use above form 4 and replace PG SD with PMPG e SD and PD in the parentheses after PG indicate the switch installed on the printed circuit board SD indicates peed detection and PD position detection e PG stands for Pulse Generator and PE Pulse Encoder Though the two terms mean the same device the one built in the motor is called PG and the one installed at the spindle is called PE according to the purpose 4 2 1 5 Stopping accuracy NCAUTION e The stopping accuracy depends on the resolution of the datum encoder e In a system where both forward and reverse rotation occurs during orientation from a running state or random access is selected for orientation from a stopping state the stopping accuracy deteriorates The stopping accuracy to the target position depends on the installed encoder resolution as described in specifications In addition in a system where forward and reverse rotation occurs during orientation the stopping accuracy may deteriorate by the pulse width of the Z phase The stopping accuracy deteriorates in the following conditions 1 Both forward rotation and reverse rotation occur for the orientation command from a running state 2 The random path access method is selected for the orientation method from a st
381. rotation to reach the target Slow speed direction Uni IDI stopping position during orientation from a stopping state command nyversa ON 1 Reverse rotation OFF 0 Forward rotation X3 Position change Signal for latching data after a change in the external stop position command command me Rising edge hold for at least 10 ms Read external position command x4 Selection between X4 X5 OFF OFF Acceleration deceleration ASR ORT Gear selection 1 acceleration gain slow speed 1 valid deceleration and ASR X4 X5 ON OFF Acceleration deceleration ASR ORT X5 Selection between gain slow speed 2 valid acceleration X4 X5 OFF ON gt Acceleration deceleration ASR ORT Gear selection 2 deceleration and ASR gain slow speed 3 valid X4 X5 ON ON Acceleration deceleration ASR ORT gain slow speed 4 valid X6 Stopping position X6 X7 OFF OFF UNO 20 stopping position setting 1 valid selection 1 Universal DI X6 X7 ON OFF UNO 20 stopping position setting 2 valid X7 Stopping position X6 X7 OFF ON UNO 20 stopping position setting 3 valid selection 2 X6 X7 ON ON UNO 20 stopping position setting 4 valid Ko Arbitrary Orientation mode Servo lock Motor speed Time Operation command Orientation command Orientation completion During orientation Operation command ON Failure to operate OE Reverse rotation in slow beca
382. ry area assigned by the user for applications 2 7 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor The IQ memory is determined through combination with the coupled HOLD definition in System Definition of D300win as shown in the figure UPAC system definition Uv Memory boundary definition 1 0 group setting Communication setting O3 System configration definition CPU operation definition E 3 M4 EN 5 m Inverter 3 Q M ow X23 Number of Inverters 6 E a w T Equipment HOLD mode a II Inverter 1 Reset mode ME C Inverter 2 2 Reset mode HOLD mode change Inverter 3 3 Reset mode C Inverter 4 4 Reset mode C Inverter 5 5 Reset mode _ Inverter 6 6 Reset mode C Option 1 0 7 Reset mode m Tact cycle m Link type between inverters Optical link Normal value 1 0ms C Simple R5485 link D m Initialization method selection Setting fi Oms zi Memory diagnosis execute C Memory diagnosis not exect Fig 2 2 1 1 IQ area The IQ area is defined through combination between function code 039 UPAC memory mode and the coupled HOLD definition in System Definition Table 2 2 3 IQ memory clearing condition n Lise Obmuncton System Definition Description of memory Outline of operation The IQ memory is held in the 0 HOLD mode Hold state before stoppage of UPAC Reset mode HOLD mode a LAS Rese
383. s 96IWLI 17 18 Ai of INV1 AIO option Aid 4000h 410V INT VG7S UPAC O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 s 2 12 unit system not applicable to broadcasting Table 3 1 18 8 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks Ej IWO 6 15 Ai of INV1 Ai1 4000h 10V INT VG7S gt UPAC Define U Al to allow UPAC 8 to use the AI terminal for IWO 7 16 Ai of INV1 Ai2 4000h 10V INT VG7S UPAC control inputs O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 The analog inputs referred to by UPAC are the standard AI A11 and Ai2 and AIO option A13 and Ai4 not for 12 unit system 1 How to use To refer to the data place a check mark in the system definition download the system definition and reset Place a check mark at the check box of the corresponding data items in the I O Group setting screen of output Inverter 1 Input word Name definition at UPAC System Definition I O group setting of the D300win screen 4 Magnetic flux reference final 5 Real speed detected speed value amp Control data Cw standard DIDA 16bit 7 Operation stalus SW Al 8 Speed setting l frequency referencelV f 9 Line speed input 10 puise train position reference PG PR 11 Position detection build in or PG PD 12 Position detection Z phase inputJfPG PD Each input must be assigned to universal AI U AI when the state of Ail
384. s 4096 OFFF counts WORD_TO_INT AND OFFF for automatic Z phase detection in software ST ORT_DATA Absolute reference position data in 0000 to OFFF range LD INV111 POS Z No 12 position detection data EQ INV110 POSDET No 11 position detection data JMPC NOT ZPHASE Z phase detection is judged because No 11 is not equal to No 12 LD INV111 POS Z No 12 position detection data ST ORT DATA LD BOOL 1 ST ZPHASE_DETECT 1 upon detection of Z phase Remains 1 until the power is turned off NOT ZPHASE 3 29 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 6 Dynamic Control Switching NCAUTION e The dynamic switch must be set for dynamic control switching Dynamic control switching is effective when the corresponding bit of the dynamic switch is 0 OFF while dynamic control switching is ineffective when the bit is 1 ON 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 35 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QDO 48 31 Dynamic switch DSW1 Refer to the data format DW VG7S UPAC Dynamic switching 32 Dynamic switch DSW2 O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 36 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QDO 20 31 Dynamic switch DSW1 Refer to the data format DW VG7S UPAC Dynamic switching 32 Dynamic switch DSW2 O 1 to 12 INVI to INVI2 3 1 6
385. s S a 690459 amp 5 x Qo QT 5 I OD Rw lt 8 p Ri B xg 5 HE D t lt S x 9c v ui joaquosap se 31 pue ogH uo spuedep yeu SION Gju woo SB parneaqe s weiss Qiu WOO eu1 Bumes f10j96J ejeoipul seuojMs IIE Jo sejeis 3 46 Jejeuuure 100w OV ov 1 o O GY i low Al LL O 1 M E E z J ew joa Jojoul Oy Can anjen paj2ejep weBelp Y901q AR uonoejep x J0 IUOUI peeds 1ojou OL Gar jeued avdA3x Gu enea pajoayap jueuno 3ndjno soyuow Qanjeued GYdAZH _ Z ue Je00 j u0n29J100 ZH LN tcd C C JUSIDIJJS09 cd 10 SILUJOU z sz uonoeJ09 ZW LIA n b z z A enb10 03uoo oj eulyoeu 9q e ui se enbio pue xnjj orjeuBeuu syjds pue juejsui ue ui anb10 b xnj oneuBeui p ejeurpjooo uone jo1 eu 0 M N ayeUIps009 pexy y WOJ suieAuoo 04 UOO JOJOBA UL Ajuo jouoo J A JO SI EW JEU SION CW JO ZIN YUM LIN a0e dau 0 SI UONOUNY BY 0 J9jesJ peioejes SI LIN JOJOW SU eJ9uM EJS 84 MOUS oj peuriduis si uiejBeip xooIq y Uone nojeo xnyj oneubew apnjoul jou seop BulAlp 1ojouu snouoJuou s ey peeds eu ejeuunse 0 eBeyo peonpul sesn jojuoo 10 0 A Sse iosues eu Od E YM JOJOW uononpul ue 104 0009 JOJOBA BY 104 AjUO Si WeJBeIP yOOIq siu 1uaioieoo
386. saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface Sad Ueb O HO W Er peo1 eun uonesueduio E 4 uonogjes O zHO W ZL Bumes uojoej uoneibeyul VHSV p90 90 292 199 099 rO EWZNioon i SESIBO S SSUM zw ZSH OSH 8tH be l l Je Jo sejejs HSV poo Dre 259 159 oso o i LW LSH 6vH ZvH J04 U09 J A EW 0 uonosjes JOJOWW au 1es HSV pro Evo del LO oro He i no usyM eArnoejeul SLU098q JeAJesqo L d PISTES aoe uoneinojeo KHSV gos v94 93 z94 193 l 018Z 0 jndino ss v eui JeAJ9SqO O zal s ploy 1013u09 jue1in9 anb1o pue ojuoo enbuJo EW 40 ZN LIN SOr ysv ego ceo LED oeo uojoejes euim O L 643 r uoneuboyur o3q o9v HSY K snoeuejinuuis uoyws uonoe es JOJO jew 49414 he Bayu aa c Suonounj uoneJejeoep uongJe eooe eAno S PE uonoejeq indu VIES 34 we uog ued uo Oloor 104 uonosjes ue 10jejn6883 peeds ewon 9H F H pue 10 enb y peeds orjeuoiny 4Sv adfy JeA8sqO dO1S p P eue o y QVdA33 O serq enbio 0 2 ep IS ovdn owr CV o Buigoyws usvy Ucnoeiep f 010 PS aO Fan e MS
387. sed this backup is unnecessary Moreover after the installation ends the backup can be executed alone Does the backup start Fig 1 3 5 Click the left mouse button on the No N button If the left mouse button is clicked on the Yes Y button the Backup utility dialog box is displayed and you can back up the project files created using Ver 1 D300win system 15 If SX simulator has been selected using Custom installation the following message box is displayed after all system disks are installed Warning SX simulator communicates D300win using TCP IP protocol If TCP IP protocol is not set according to products information add TCP IP protocol Fig 1 3 6 16 After setup is completed the following screen is displayed D300win Setup E E3 InstallShield Wizard Complete To complete installation normally you need to reboot system Select this option button and click the left mouse button on the Finish button The PC starts again C No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup lt Back Finish Cancel Fig 1 3 7 17 After confirming that there is no problem even if the computer is restarted select the Yes I want to restart my computer now option button and click the left mouse button on the Finish button The computer restarts itself to complete setup of D300win 1 25 efesotomasyon com Co
388. serve 25 DO2 of INV1 DIOB option 1 Obit 26 AD of INV1 401 27 AD of INV1 02 28 AD of INV1 03 23 AO of INV1 ID option 404 30 AO of INV1 ID option 405 3 r witch 1 DSWw 32 Dynamic switch 2 DSw2 Cancel Fig 3 1 42 3 30 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 VG7 Interface 3 1 6 2 Program example An example of speed control and torque control switching is explained The upper half of the figure below shows a block diagram of speed controlled operation where the speed command data calculated by UPAC is written in speed setting 1 of the UPAC to VG7S interface memory to turn off the torque command UPAC SW The lower half of the figure below shows a block diagram of torque controlled operation where the torque command data calculated by UPAC is written in torque reference 1 of the UPAC to VG7S interface memory to turn on the torque command UPAC SW UPAC sw ASR input filter for UPAC SW speed limiter OFF Speed setting of function calculating 15 04 Torque other than UPAC S curve l limit acceleration l deceleration ON 4 1 Speed setting 1 OPC VG7 UPAC OPC VG7 SI UPAC Torque reference 1 Dynamic eme UPAC sw ASR input filter for speed limiter Speed setting of function calculating Torque other than UPAC S curve limit acceleration deceleration Speed setting 1 OPC V
389. servicing or inspecting the inverter Familiarize yourself with all safety features before using the inverter In this manual safety messages are classified as follows Improper operation may result in serious personal injury or death NWARNING ee p id A Improper operation may result in slight to medium personal injury or property Situations more serious than those covered by CAUTION will depend on prevailing circumstances Always follow instructions Instructions on use e This inverter is designed to drive a 3 phase induction motor and is not suitable for a single phase motor or others as fire may result e This inverter may not be used as is as a component of a life support system or other medical device directly affecting the personal welfare of the user e This inverter is manufactured under strict quality control standards However safety equipment must be installed if the failure of this device may result in personal injury and or property damage There is a risk of accident Instructions on installation e Mount this inverter on an incombustible material such as metal There is a risk of fire Do not place combustible or flammable material near this inverter as fire may result e The inverter housed in IP00 18 5kW or over should be installed in a place where no one can touch it easily Electric shock or injury may result Do not hold or carry this inverter by the surface cover Inverter may be dropped causi
390. set for motor speed command 1 1 o 4 44 selection 1 Offset for line speed Line speed U48 Individual motor operation 0 Dancer roll control Specify 1 at U48 0 at F01 and 0 at F02 during U48 A i E Switch USER RE 1 Individual motor operation 1 o 9 adjustment of the maximum 416 g speed of the winding motor g U49 Reverse rotation prevention 0 eves renh concerning the direction of 3 CE USER P49 5 1 0 o 4 19 function 1 Reverse rotation concerning the direction of 5 the line is prohibited O OL o mmm mer g lama Reverse motor rotation upon FWD command forward motor rotation upon REV command U51 Speed limit Yl USER P51 0 to 110 0 to 110 1 100 100 o 4 19 m EMEN T CREER U52 Minimum winding diameter Weyl USER P52 10 to 100 10 to 100 100 indicates 1 100 100 o 4 19 ratio the exact winding diameter U53 Initial value write judgment WES USER P53 0 100 100 upon completion of writing 1 Do not change of initial value Dancer roll position detection signal assignment DANDCT Do not assign DANDCT to Y1 through Y5 Assign DANDCT to Y1 Assign DANDCT to Y2 Assign DANDCT to Y3 Assign DANDCT to Y4 Specify 25 U DO at E15 Specify 25 U DO at E16 Specify 25 U DO at E17 Specify 25 U DO at E18 Assign DANDCT to Y5 Specify 25 U DO at E19 Dancer position search Dancer roll position detection level
391. specification and controllability according to the number of VG7S inverter units controlled by UPAC controlling method number of operated I O points refresh time and other particulars A general guideline for examination is indicated here Read the description of each part for details to avoid errors during first examination of specifications Table 2 1 2 Number of connected units 6 unit system VG7_6 Broadcasting 6 units of master and slaves 1 to 156 12 unit system VG7_12 12 units of master and slaves 1 to 12 Remarks Number of pieces Two or more UPACs cannot be of OPC VG7 installed inside the system UPAC Number of pieces Number of units number gt 1 Unnecessary for a system consisting of OPC VG7 SI of only one unit I Q memory All 32W 14W All 50W x 6 units All 22W x 12 units Memory for high speed data exchange Number of 32W 14W 50W 22W In the master slave link data can be memories UPAC VG7S 32W UPAC VG7S 32W UPAC VG7S 14W written or referenced for each slave Master only 32 18W VG7S UPAC 18W VG7S UPAC 8W Type Operation command speed setting 1 4 torque reference torque current reference magnetic flux reference torque limiter 1 2 acceleration deceleration time PG pulse count position command torque bias auxiliary speed reference function code 4W standard and extended inputs and outputs etc Writing time Minimum 1 ms 1
392. ssary in addition to the UPAC option to detect the dancer position with a synchro transmitter For the hardware specification installation method and other details of the option refer to the VG7S USER S MANUAL MEH407 This packaged software is included in the CD ROM of WPS VG7 PCL loader software and provided free of charge To configure a system using this package agreement with the following description is necessary Terms of Agreement You are requested to agree with the following items If you do not agree with them do not use WPS VG7 DAN packaged software For inquiries about the agreement items contact our sales person 1 When an analog interface is used to establish a dancer system sufficient measures shall be taken in accordance with the description of the VG7 USER S MANUAL to suppress noise 2 Function codes UNO 01 through 64 used for dancer control are set at 0 before shipment from our factory The user must change the setting of necessary parameters voluntarily according to the purpose 3 A built in battery of UPAC backs the data The life of the battery is five years at 25 C The battery life is reduced during operation at higher temperatures When the battery life is reached UPAC alarm ErA is displayed If this alarm is displayed change the battery soon For the battery replacement method refer to the corresponding part of this manual If noise or vibration occurs due to resonance in the me
393. t floppy can be read and written e CD ROM drive For PCs without CD ROM drive contact us The UPAC Upgrade software is provided on a floppy disk e Mouse e RS232C serial port D subminiature 9 pin specification selection from 4 800 to 38 400 bps e Printer port Used to print program documents etc 1 1 2 2 Software To operate D300win and UPAC Upgrade on a PC one of the following operating systems is necessary e Microsoft Windows 95 98 English or Japanese e Microsoft Windows NT V4 0 English or Japanese Operation on Windows 3 1 or Windows NT V3 5x is not guaranteed 1 3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am Eo x lt a 3 1 2 Preparation of Option 1 2 1 OPC VG7 UPAC Option 1 2 1 1 Description of product This card User Programmable Application Card UPAC hereafter is an optional card for the inverter control installed on FRENIC5000VG7S VG7S hereafter This card gives you an additional higher level control over your inverter You can also use engineering support tool D300win to facilitate programming the control applications being used for this card UPAC is an optional PLC card integrated into the inverter conforming to MICREX SX series high performance CPU module NP1PS 32 Since UPAC is slightly different in programming specification such as memory map and available instructions from that for the high performance CPU mod
394. t for stopping from 500 m min in five seconds is 500 5 100 Acceleration deceleration torque correction corresponding to material Set value 0 150 0 150 Corrects an excess deficiency of an acceleration deceleration torque due to a material Usually sets to 10096 ve Acceleration deceleration torque correction corresponding to reel Set value 0 150 0 150 Corrects an excess deficiency of an acceleration deceleration torque due to reel mechanical system Usually sets to 100 Torque setting corresponding to dynamic mechanical loss while operating Set value 0 3000 0 30 Enter a mechanical loss torque on staring the operation Torque setting corresponding to dynamic mechanical loss while stalling Set value 0 3000 0 30 Enter a mechanical loss torque when starting stall Tension feedback filter setting Set value 0 5000 0 5 sec Sets the filter time for the input of the detected tension The standard setting is 5 msec dv dt during acceleration Set value 0 100 0 100 m min sec Used for calculating a compensation torque during acceleration Example dv dt for accelerating to 500 m min in twenty seconds is 500 20 25 U63 dv dt during deceleration Set value 0 to 100 0 to 100 m min sec dv dt dv dt during deceleration Set value 0 to 100 0 to 100 m min sec deceleration Set value 0 to 100 0 to 100 m min sec Usually used for calculating a compensatio
395. t mode 2 M RM FM and SFM areas The M RM FM and SFM areas are defined with function code 039 UPAC memory mode Table 2 2 4 M RM FM and SFM memory clearing condition Bit of M RM FM or SFM area of function code 039 0 Hold Description of memory Outline of operation The corresponding memory is held at the state before stoppage of UPAC The corresponding memory is cleared to zero upon stoppage of UPAC 1 Clear 2 8 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 2 3 Settings on D300win Side Preparation has been made in section 2 2 2 to operate UPAC through the settings on the VG7S side To reflect the data calculated by UPAC to VG7S or to refer to the data on the VG7S side definition must be given to the System Definition of D300win The concrete example for giving a speed setting from UPAC to VG7 is described below Read the description carefully to fully understand it 2 2 3 1 VG7S interface Determine the destination of connection of the UPAC s speed setting to the VG7S control Suppose that you want to select speed setting 1 among speed setting 1 before acceleration deceleration calculation and speed setting 4 ASR input To register the definition to D300win place a check mark at Speed setting 1 frequency reference V f in the output selection screen screen shown on the ri
396. t new program components to add or select currently installed components to remove C Repair FF Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup 3 Remove all installed components ele Fig 1 3 27 3 Select the Remove R option button and click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button The Confirm File Deletion message box is displayed Confirm File Deletion X Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components Cancel Fig 1 3 28 To proceed click the left mouse button on the OK button 4 Deletion is executed A Shared File Detected dialog box may be displayed during operation Deletion of a shared file may cause another program to fail to function or Windows may not start in the worst case Select No N usually Shared File Detected X The file C WINDOWS SYSTEM PcosOPCa dll may no longer be needed by any application Y ou can delete this file but doing so may prevent other applications from running correctly Select Y es to delete the file Yes No Cancel Fig 1 3 29 1 33 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E on aS ao Sz So Eo x lt a 3 Finish the procedure D300win Setup Maintenance Complete InstallShield Wizard has finished performing maintenance operations on D300win Bence 5 Click the left mouse button on th
397. t selection In power on sequence During orientation immediately after the power is turned on the datum position in the Z phase is detected If the speed is too low the datum position may not be detected in a single rotation 8 heck if the feedback pulse 005 is set at 1 N OMS Ova Check if the target stop position can be checked with option monitor 3 2 Check if the target position is specified in the number of pulses from the Z phase datum position 3 Check if there is slippage in the mechanical system where the encoder is installed Yes gt Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 The spindle encoder may be prone to electric noise Examine the wiring route and take other noise suppression measures 2 Check if there is slippage in the mechanical system where the encoder is installed 1 Gradually increase the orientation gain and check that the resistive torque increases v For orientation from stopping state 1 Select the random access mode 2 Increase the orientation gain 3 Increase the slow speed 1 setting For orientation from running state 1 Reduce the deceleration time to slow speed 1 2 Increase slow speed 1 However with too large a setting the braking torque may be insufficient to cause failure to stop because the motor stops in a single rotation from slow speed 1 Reduce the orientation gain Reduce slow speed 1 Reduce the ASR gai
398. t the QW2 34 17 Z Q INV2 function code 1 data check data INT minimum of 2ms is possible by QW2 35 18 S INV2 function code 2 address distinction of W defining this 4W area for QW2 36 19 gt 5 INV2 function code 2 data individual function INT individual function code when QW2 37 20 2 INV2 function code 3 address code W SI UPAC option is used QW2 38 21 9 9 INV2 function code 3 data INT QW2 39 22 5 8 INV2 function code 4 address W QW2 40 23 r INV2 function code 4 data INT QW2 41 24 Reserved QW2 42 25 g DO2 DIOB option 10bit of INV2 Data distinction 27 W UPAC controls AO DO of INV2 QW2 43 26 amp AO AO of INV2 4000h 10V INT AO DO used by INV2 are QW2 44 27 w AO AO2 of INV2 INT defined as universal QW2 45 28 g AO AO3 of INV2 INT Note that universal definition is QW2 46 29 Z AO AIO option AO4 of INV2 INT not required for DIOB QW2 47 30 2 AO AIO option AO5 of INV2 INT QD2 48 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV2 dynamically on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 3 INV3 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV3 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV3 does not have a way to exchange data other than these
399. tallation to CN2 on left side Installation to CN3 on right side 1 Install the three accessory spacers g to the 1 Install the three accessory spacers g to option installation fittings a b and c on the the option installation fittings d e and control PCB f on the control PCB 2 Install the option so that the connector 2 Install the option so that the connector CN1 on the back of the option fits the CN1 on the back of the option fits the connector CN2 on the control PCB connector CN3 on the control PCB 3 Tighten the three accessory screws h in the 3 Tighten the three accessory screws h in installation holes of the option to fix the the installation holes of the option to fix option the option 4 While referring to How to remove the front 4 While referring to How to remove the front cover reverse the removal cover reverse the removal procedure to procedure to reinstall the front cover reinstall the front cover Control PCB Fig 1 2 9 Option installation method Fig 1 2 10 Option installation method Installation to CN2 Installation to CN3 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 2 Installation method on master side Installation of option in inverter with OPC VG7 UPAC NCAUTION e The spacer that comes with the option slightly differs from that attached to OPC VG7 UPAC Use
400. ted from a menu selection of purpose to execute operations ranging from project creation to debugging 11 The Select program folder dialog box is displayed To change default D300win enter the desired program folder name in the text box Click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button 12 The Start file copy dialog box is displayed Confirm the description and click the left mouse button on the Next N gt button Files are copied 13 After installation with the first system disk is finished an Setup Needs The Next Disk dialog box is displayed as shown in the figure below Insert the second disk and click the left mouse button on the OK button Similarly install the third and the remaining disks D300win Setup x Setup Status amp D300win Setup is performing the requested operations Installing D300win program C D300win dcom95 exe I 2 Setup Needs The Next Disk x i Please insert disk 2 Path aA Browse Installshield Cancel Fig 1 3 4 1 24 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 14 After all disks are installed an Question dialog box shown below is displayed 9 The backup of the project for D300win Verl begins Li When the project for Verl is opened with Ver2 the project is not opened in Verl Without the project for Verl or Verl is not u
401. tem definition System configration definition CPU operation definition Memory boundary definition 1 0 group setting Communication setting Level DEFAULT X r Input selection Minverter 1 Input Option 170 Input Minverter 2 Input Inverter 3 Input All 18W can Inverter 4 Input Inverter 5 Input be selected Inverter 6 Input Details Selected 18 18 r Qutput selection Mlnverter 1 Output Blinverter 2 Output Inverter 3 Output Inverter 4 Output Inverter 5 Output Inverter 6 Output a Option 1 0 Output Selection exceeding 19W is made illegal Details Selected 29 32 Fig 2 2 6 2 12 unit system F3 UPAC system definition System configration definition l CPU operation definition Memory boundary definition 1 0 group setting Communication setting Level DEFAULT z m Input selection Inverter 1 Input Option 1 0 Input Inverter 2 Input Inverter 3 Input Inverter 4 Input Inverter 5 Input Inverter 6 Input Inverter 7 Input Details Inverter 8 Input 7 Inverter 9 Input zi Siem I All 8W can be selected m Output selection VInverter 1 Output Option 1 0 Output Inverter 2 Output Minverter 3 Output Selection Inverter 4 Output exceeding 9W is made illegal Inverter 5 Dutpul Inverter 6 Output Inverter 7 Output il Inverter 8 Output In
402. ter level 1 10000 100 INT A QW9 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW9 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW9 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV9 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV9 58 AO used by INV9 are defined QW9 18 27 2 AO A02 of INV9 INT as universal QW9 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV9 INT QD9 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV9 dynamically 5 28 on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 10 INVIO data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV10 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV10 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 32 FS BS E oma Address No Area Name d Samoa Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A A more information IW10 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f g monitor calculation IW10 1 2 G Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW10 2 6 m Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT oO IW10 3 7 5 Control data CW standard
403. th nippers Replace the battery with a new one and secure the battery with a new band as shown in the figure below The contents of backup data retain memory will be lost if the battery is kept removed It is advisable to save required data before turning OFF the power 3 Connect the battery connector to the CN2 4 Mount the optional UPAC and replace the VG7S front cover by reversing the above procedure and turn ON the power A critical failure memory backup error may occur when the power is first turned ON after battery replacement In this case keep the power ON for approximately 30 seconds then turn it OFF and ON aeain 2 5 E on T 4 Q Battery connectors pue soueusjuIen Securing band Backup battery Fig 6 2 4 6 4 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor MEMO efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Fuji Electric Co Ltd ED amp C Drive Systems Company Gate City Ohsaki East Tower 11 2 Osaki 1 chome Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0032 Japan Phone 81 3 5435 7139 Fax 81 3 5435 7460 ru us Printed on 100 recycled paper Information in this manual is subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 2001 11 K01 K01 CM10FIS
404. tion 10 Er5 RS485 communication 27 OL3 Motor 3 overload 44 arB Error code B for specific error user application c Operation procedure Error code C for specific 11 Er6 P 28 OLU Inverter unit overload 45 Arc reds as error user application E 12 Er7 Output wiring error 29 OS Overspeed 46 ArD Eror code D Ioh Specific E 9 user application FE Error code E for specific 2 13 Er8 A D converter error 30 OU Overvoltage 47 ArE en 5 3 user application 553 14 Er9 Speed disagreement 31 PbF Charging circuit error 48 ArF Error code F for specific amp user application 15 ErA UPAC error 32 P9 PG error 16 Erb Inter inverter 33 Aro Error code 0 for specific communication error user application Type 15 Alarm history 15 87 0 a Alarm code 0 to 32 See Type 14 Number of the occurrence of the same alarm 0 to 255 Type 16 Percentage 15 87 0 L1 Percentage 300 to 300 30 000 to 30 000 Decimal places are not displayed 5 52 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification Type 21 Operation status 15 87 Type 26 DIOB option input state Type 27 DIOB option output state 15 87 0 FWD forward operation REV reverse operation EXT DC braking pre exciting INT Inverter shut off BRK Braking NUV DC link circuit voltage established TL Torque limiting VL Voltage limiting I
405. tion List for the global variable worksheet in advance Variable p26_f P26 M1 motor parameters setting M1 ACR P Gain p2 F P27 M1 motor parameters setting M1 ACR Integration time p28 f P28 M1 PG pulse number paa F P29 M1 external PG correction coefficient J F P30 M1 thermistor selection u01 f U01 USER P1 u02_f U02 USER P2 2 21 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Select OK in the previous page to return to the screen shown in the figure below If the character size is small click on the button shown in the circle to enlarge ii D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER ex JR Eie Edit View Project Build Objects Layout Online Extras Window Help ls x Ds u a seeje EILA 5 amp 6 lan 63 t oo ERM e to cr c ped 68 EF 0 T 2 3 m x tv 3 o aiseg pue uoleiedaid y Project Libraries CA Data Types Logical POUs 5 B LADDER i LADDERT LADDERV f LADDER Sa Physical Hardware 3 6 C_VG7_6 VG7_6 Bg System Definition SJ R UPAC UPAC Tasks Global Variables 6 Control Variables B Function List e uo1 f e 2630 C 288 4 Fig 2 4 5 Next connect the speed command given to VG7S in the variable of u01 f 4 Select control variable spe
406. tion time Deceleration time 3 Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 v Ti Speed setting 4 frequency reference V f L 12 Torque reference 2 13 Torque bias 14 Ausiliary speed setting 15 Real speed Simulation speed ez Cancel Fig 2 2 5 Detail setting screen for each word The operation method is described as shown in the table below Table 2 2 6 Operation method of detail setting screen Item Description Use check box Set use or no use for each word Word No The word number starting at 1 is displayed Name The signal name is displayed All button All points are turned on or off in a batch If OFF buttons are more than half all words are turned on if not all words are turned off efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 2 3 3 Precautions for I O group setting NCAUTION e f output selection exceeds the predetermined number of words 6 unit system 19W or more 12 unit system 9W or more in the I O group setting of the system definition of D300win an illegal setting is judged and operation procedure alarm Er6 is issued as a warning sign for safety In this section cases in which an operation procedure alarm is developed are described For the operation method of D300win or UPAC and VG7 interface setting refer to the corresponding manual 1 6 unit system F UPAC sys
407. tion width 4 2 8 3 Output delay operation TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o Table 4 2 15 Name of parameter Setting nae No Name Indication on keypad panel range Description of setting pedal g 0 to 1000 0 00 to 10 00s UNO 07 si s USER P07 to Timer setting of interval from completion ae 1000 of orientation to issuance of orientation completion signal timer a g 0 to 1000 0 00 to 10 00s UNO 08 si Ma USER P08 to Timer setting of interval from cancellation i ES N 1000 of orientation completion to deactivation timer of orientation completion signal 1 During regular operation Stopping in orientation a completion width Orientation command Orientation signal Orientation completion signal e activation timer setting Orientation completion signal 2 If the orientation signal is turned off Stopping in orientation completion width Orientation completion signal Orientation command Orientation signal activation timer setting Orientation completion signal Fig 4 2 17 4 40 l Orientation completion signal deactivation timer setting efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 8 4 Option monitor Three types of data can be referred to from the keypad panel installed on the inverter Table 4 2 16
408. tipl 4 0 0 000 O with a maximum winding diameter DL and constant 5 10000 Multiplication cation Multiplication line speed g U18 APR USER P18 d ond 0 00 to 100 00 s s 1 1000 10 00 s Integration with setting 0 invalid U19 APR D USER P19 0 to 1000 0 00 to 10 00 s s al 0 0 00 s o Derivation with setting 0 invalid U20 ASR P 08 E user P20 1 to 2000 0 1 to 200 0 a 200 20 0 o ASR P with minimum winding diameter DS during 445 Multiplication stall operation in individual motor operation mode U21 ASR P DM AE USER P21 1 to 2000 0 1 to 200 0 1 300 90 0 O ASR P at middle winding diameter DM 4 12 Multiplication U22 ASR P DL 72 USER P22 1 to 2000 0 1 to 200 0 1 500 50 0 O ASR P at maximum winding diameter DL 4 12 Multiplication U23 APRH os EMjusces 0 o 010 to 1 0006 s 1 40 0040s O ASR P with minimum winding diameter DS during 445 1000 stall operation in individual motor operation mode U24 APRH DM Zl USER p24 bis 0 010 to 1 000 s s 1 80 0 080 s O ASR I at middle winding diameter DM 4 12 U25 ASRH DL RH user P25 M00 0 010 to 1 000 s s 1 80 0 080 s O ASR I at maximum winding diameter DL 4 12 U26 Line speed filter 071 USER P26 0 to 5000 0 000 to 5 000 s s 1 40 0 040 s o 4 13 U27 Motor speed command filter RAA USER P27 0 to 5000 0 000 to 5 000 s s l 5 0 005 s o 4 13 z S uag Deadzonefordancer REFI user p28 o
409. tiplication u22 APR P DL Setting 1 to 2 000 0 1 to 200 0 Multiplication u23 APR I DS Setting 10 to 1 000 0 010 to 1 000 s APR I DM Setting 10 to 1 000 0 010 to 1 000 s u25 APR I DL Setting 10 to 1 000 0 010 to 1 000 s Luss Lowest line speed Setting 1 to 100 1 to 100 m min Concerning ASR P and I As the winding diameter increases the inertia machine constant of the machine becomes larger Therefore ASR P and I must be set at ones suitable for the winding diameter ASR P and I are prepared for each of the minimum winding diameter DS middle winding diameter DM and maximum winding diameter DL 4 12 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software U21 U20 ASR P DM ASR P DS U11 U03 Min winding Middle winding Max winding diameter diameter diameter Fig 4 1 11 U25 U24 ASR P DL U23 ASR P DM ASR P DS U02 U11 U03 Min winding Middle winding Max winding diameter diameter diameter Fig 4 1 12 APR P U22 ASR P DL Winding diameter APR I Winding diameter Concerning ASR P and I during line stoppage ASR P and I at a line speed smaller than the lowest line speed U34 are adjusted to U20 ASR P and U23 ASR I equivalent to the minimum winding diameter DS without relations to the current winding diameter This is to prevent the winding shaft from moving slightly during st
410. tive value U64 Version USER P64 om 1200 s Note 1 Though setting in a range from 32768 to 32767 is possible for U01 to U64 set in the valid setting ranges described in the table above 4 54 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Package Software 2 Other Relevant Parameters Function i 7 3 Initial Gien ge e vr Name LCD display English Valid setting range Unit Resolution EE during Remark g operation F01 Speed setting N1 SPD CMD 1 0 7 1 0 No F02 Operation method BEA OPRMETHOD 0 1 1 0 No F03 M1 max speed BE M1 Nmax 50 24000 r min 1 1500 No 0 01 99 99 0 01 FO7 Acceleration time 1 ACC TIME1 100 0 999 9 sec 0 1 5 Yes 1000 3600 1 0 01 99 99 0 01 F08 Deceleration time 1 DEC TIME1 100 0 999 9 sec 0 1 5 Yes 1000 3600 1 F17 Gain for speed setting signal 12 GAIN 12 0 00 200 Q6 04 10 Yes 3 F18 Bias for speed setting signal 12 Gi BIAS 12 24000 to 24000 1 0 Yes F40 Torque limiter mode 1 Ei TUM MODE 0 3 1 0 No E01 X1 function selection EU X1 FUNC 0 63 1 0 No ON on canceling torque command E02 X2function selection BEA x2ruNc 0 63 1 1 No ONonoperation command E03 X3 function selection X3 FUNC 0 63 1 2 No
411. to 0 9 For variable torque load Yes 1 0 to 1 9 For proportional torque load 2 0 to 20 0 For constant torque load 0 to 1to 3 0 No thermistor 1 NTC thermistor a47 f UINT MW11 447 052Fh M3 thermistor selection 2 PTC thermistor Yes 3 Ai M TMP Set the protection level of the motor protection function at E30 through E32 A47 Si A 0t02 ad oi Inactive select when PTC thermistor is used A48 a48 f UINT mw11 448 0530h M3 electronic thermal Nerei d purpose motors use for internal Yes overload relay Acti gan function selection ve 3 for inverter motors use for external cooling fan M3 electronic thermal 0 01 to 99 99A A49 a49 f WORD MW11 449 0531h overload relay 100 0 to 999 9A Yes operation level 1000 to 2000A c M3 electronic thermal U A50 a50 f UINT MW11 450 0532h overload relay 0 5 to 75 0 min Yes no gt thermal time constant E 2 3 zn Table 5 2 44 O Optional Functions aS 1 referencing data High speed Written E F code updating Name Setting range Type by 3 3 3 vo Address address 3 Otoi 001 UNT h DIA DIB option setting 0 Binary Yes DIA function selection 1 BCD 0to 1 002 UINT MW11 466 0602h DIB function selection 0 Binary Yes 1 BCD 003 o03 Yes R Oto 1 1 PG PD option PG LD option setting 006 UINT MW11 470 0606h Digital line speed detection 100 to 1024 to 60000 P R Yes definition encoder pulses Digital line speed detection 00
412. to 1 000 s C31 c81 4 MW11 223 021Fh OC 1000 cand C32 c32 MW 11 224 0220h ASR JOG input filter 0 000 to 0 040 to 5 000 s 4 Yes Yes C33 MW 11 225 ASR JOG detection filter 0 000 to 0 005 to 0 100 s Yes C34 MW 11 226 0222h ASR JOG output filter 0 000 to 0 002 to 0 100 s Yes 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s WORD MW11 227 0223h Acceleration time JOG 100 0 to 999 9s 13 Yes 1000 to 3600s 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C36 c36 WORD MW11 228 0224h Deceleration time JOG 100 0 to 999 9s 13 Yes 1000 to 3600s C37 MW 11 229 0225h S curve starting side JOG 0 to 50 0 ves C38 3 MW 11 230 0226h S curve end side JOG Q to 50 96 Yes n ASR 2 setting TOME C40 c40 i ra MW 11 232 0228 ASR 2 P gain 0 1 to 10 0 to 200 0 Multiplication ASR 2 1 integration 0 010 to 0 200 to 1 000 s UNT o o EB C35 o a olo eo ic D on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Yes Buruwe16oid 9VdN Yes E Yes C45 NT 0 000 to 0 002 to 0 100 s 9 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C46 c46 f WORD MW11 238 022Eh Acceleration time 2 100 0 to 999 9s 1000 to 3600s 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C47 c47 f WORD Mw11 239 022Fh Deceleration time 2 100 0 to 999 9s 1000 to 3600s UINT UNT KE om ES UNT EE UNT EE UNT EN T P C48 c48 UINT MW11 240 S curve starting side 2 0 to 50 o UINT 95MW11 241 0231 S curve end side 2 0
413. to 50 o Yes anf EX UNT EE UNT EE UNT EN UNT EN Yes Yes BS R olol o R o N M NM Yes o E a Yes Yes Yes g 1 i Yes 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C56 c56 WORD MW11 248 0238 Acceleration time 3 100 0 to 999 9s 1000 to 3600s 0 01 to 5 00 to 99 99s C57 c57 i WORD MW11 249 0239h Deceleration time 3 100 0 to 999 9s 1000 to 3600s C58 58_ UINT MW 11 250 023Ah S curve starting side 3 0 to 50 C59 c59 UINT MW 11 251 023Bh S curve end side 3 0 to 50 LJ You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions Yes c49 e9 t UNT h P gain ASR 3 FF gain 0 000 to 9 999 s 1 T Yes Q Yes 5 40 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification 60 ms updating and High speed Written referencing data 2 Van updating Name Setting range Type by Ub Type Address address UPAC F code ASR 4 setting m C60 UINT 94MW11 252 023Ch ASR 4 P gain 0 1 to 10 0 to 200 0 Multiplication Yes ASR 4 0 010 to 0 200 to 1 000 s CHU c61 UINT MW 11 253 023Dh integration constant 1 000 P control 4 Yes C62 UINT MW11 254 023Eh ASR 4 FF gain 0 000 to 9 999 s 4 ves C63 UINT 94MW11 255 023Fh ASR 4 input fi
414. ton If the state of the control is Run click on the Stop S button again to change to Stop Next in the Download loader gt CPU screen place a check mark in all of the Program Clear retention memory M 3 area and System definition check boxes R_UPAC CPUO BEI x g Ulcer D noad loader gt CPU Iv Iv jv cea EB SEB variables Je Zip fie In Fetemeter data J rdividtrel downiced UI OV TRATTE 21 Sean Strandir F Memsmihiadae El es Gara 7 LGW OKs Giver Mn AP Project User OH DK emen nen Fig 2 4 14 2 26 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples When downloading the downloading project bar graph is displayed at the bottom of the screen to show the progress of downloading Though it depends on the size of the program the process finishes in about two to ten seconds a D300win Untitled Ladder LADDER E loj x Fila Fd View Proiect Bid Nhiacte laut Online Extras Window Help lal xj ra Bs em E d eem State Execute download aa et H xo 20 TH ee H in ge d Keystate TERM Batch operation Individual operation Stop Tritial start Start Heset Upload Verity Wea u01 f INV118 SPDREF1 Download loader gt CPU BA a Download successful Download
415. tting 1 frequency reference V f D300win screen 2 Tore reference 1 o 3 Torque current reference 4 Magna fu reference All The torque reference data is converted assuming that A RE pP 10000 is the 10096 torque with the rated torque EI 7 ere A 0 D 9 Torque limiter level 1 being 100 Vo oO 10 apis level 2 Data 10000 Torque z Spe setting 4 frequency reference V f L orque reference 2 13 Torque bias o 14 Auxiliary speed setting Example To give a 60 torque reference write El 15 Posl speed Simulation speed x 6000 29 E Fig 3 1 9 Limitation Because the acceleration deceleration calculator does not function when the torque reference is used function code M14 or acceleration ACC and deceleration DEC in the SW operation state information of the IQ memory do not function correctly 3 5 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 1 5 Torque limit 1 6 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 8 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWO 26 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT UPAC VG7S QWO 27 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT UPAC VG7S O 1 to 6 INVI to INV6 2 12 unit system broadcasting Table 3 1 9 Address No Name FS BS Type Direction Remarks QWO 14 9 Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT UPAC VG7S QWO 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT UPAC VG7S
416. ty sheet to print the system definition of UPAC When you click Print P the following dialog box will appear To print other items than the system definition follow the standard procedure using the menu item Print or Print Project efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 Printed example of system definition A printed example for twelve unit system is listed below Project UNTITLED C D300WIN UNTITLED Update 2000 03 09 13 21 21 Printed 9 14 01 6 35 28 PM System configuration Number of Inverters 12 Equipment SX station No nverter 1 HOLD mode Inverter HOLD mode Inverter 3 RESET mode Inverter 4 HOLD mode Inverter 5 HOLD mode Inverter 6 HOLD mode Inverter 7 RESET mode Inverter 8 HOLD mode Inverter 9 HOLD mode 10 11 12 13 OMONDORWNDN Inverter 10 HOLD mode Inverter 11 HOLD mode Inverter 12 HOLD mode Option 1 0 RESET mode FF FF FF FF OF Tact cycle 3 0 ms Link type between inverters Simple RS485 links Initialization method selection Memory diagnosis execute CPU operation definition Watch dog timer setting Default Memory boundary definition AT Range Non retain memory 2 0 KW None High None Normal Reatin memory 1 0 KW None User FB memory 1 0 KW None System FB memory 4 0 KW None System FB memory detail Edge detect 256 x 2 W Counter 64x4
417. u set ORT gain to 20 the UPAC limits it to 0 and when you set ORT gain to 2000 the UPAC limits it to 1000 About changing setting 2 Though the function codes which are not changed during operation are not protected against input Read only data Shows version of UPAC package software from the KEYPAD panel input are not reflected during operation 3 It takes about 0 06s to up the update UNO data It takes 1 ms for the other function codes F to o 4 30 TU t 1 x Q Qa o e gt E o efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 Packaged Software 4 2 5 Preparing for Operation Follow the guidance described below to prepare the orientation and test the operation 4 2 5 1 Setting function codes 1 Checking Basic Operation Check if normal operation is achieved with the speed control The speed control means that your motor rotates as you instruct when you enter the speed command from the analog input and the KEYPAD panel See VG7 USER S MANUAL MEH407 for more information 2 Checking Make sure that the options OPC VG7 UPAC and OPC VG7 PG are implemented Also make sure that the OPC VG7 PG option is set to PD You can use the I O check on the KEYPAD panel for these checking Use UPAC and BPPG PD 3 Orientation Package Make sure the orientation package software for the UPAC has been downloa
418. u18 1 T AMW 11 548 0B12h USER P18 y NT NT N NT NT NT NT N NT NT NT NT N NT NT NT NT N uer mr perse eism usen eis u22 1 N USER P22 N NT NT NT NT N NT NT NT NT N NT NT l USER P27 T 90MW 11 552 0B16h u27 T 960MW 11 557 0B1Bh INT MW11 558 0B1Ch USER P28 INT Mw11 559 0B1Dh USER P29 INT Mw11 560 OB1Eh USER P30 INT Mw11 561 0B1Fh USER P31 USER P32 INT Mw11 563 0B21h USER P33 INT Mw11 564 0B22h USER P34 u32 1 T 960MW 11 562 0B20h u36 1 90MW 11 565 0B23h USER P35 960MW 11 566 0B24h USER P36 T USER P37 960MW 11 567 0B25h int anit 568 Joss USER int emm _ MW11 569 0B27h USER P39 MW11 570 0B28h USER P40 You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions Written Setting range Type by 0to2 0 Not used Regular acceleration and deceleration S curve 15 steps S curve 5 Method 1 VG3 VG5 method Acceleration deceleration can Yes be controlled via terminal 12 when all of SS1 SS2 and S84 are OFF Method 2 VG7 method Zero speed when all of S81 SS2 and S84 are OFF o 50 96 Yes 10 50 Yes o 50 Yes o 50 Yes Yes o 50 Yes IO io IO iO iO FIO 19 olo o 0 Not used Yes 1 Method 1 Written Setting range by UPAC 5 3276
419. ual efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v A oO E 2 as ao T7 am Eo x lt a 3 2 2 6 Installation method NCAUTION e The product may be broken due to inadequate work during installation or removal e Before installing or removing the option turn the inverter off and check that the CHARGE lamp is unlit Even if all the main circuit control and auxiliary power supply of the inverter are turned off control terminals 30A 30B 30C Y5A and Y5C of the inverter are live when the external control circuit is powered by another power supply e Turn the external power supply off to avoid electric shock There are the following limitations in installation of the option Ifthe option is for a slave unit in an inverter without OPC VG7 UPAC refer to 1 Installation method on slave side to install on either installation position CN2 on the left side or CN3 on the right side on the control PCB However when the analog option is installed too be sure to install the option on the CN2 side and install the analog option on the CN3 side Ifthe option is for a master unit in an inverter with OPC VG7 UPAC refer to 2 Installation method on master side to install on either installation position CN2 on the left side or CN3 on the right side on the control PCB 1 Installation method on slave side For slave unit in inverter with OPC VG7 UPAC Ins
420. ul Analog torque bias hold 39 to 47 Option Do 1 to 9 Torque polarity detection braking driving B D Written 0 to 4 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal func 0 to 14 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal fun o 26 to 47 Refer to Y1 terminal fun 0000 to 001F Set the normal state of Y1 through Y5 0 Normally open 1 Normally closed 0to9 No division 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 1 64 0 to 6 Inputs to built in PG are divided and output Pulse oscillation mode AB 90 phase difference Internal speed command is converted into pulses and output PG PD Position detection pulse input is ou PG PR The position command pulse input 100 to 150 to 200 C Valid when NTC thermistor is used for selected motor M1 or M2 or when motor temperatur selected with analog input 50 to 75 to 200 C Valid when NTC thermistor is used for selected motor M1 or M2 or when motor temperatur selected with analog input MW 11 128 0120h MIO M3 PTC operation 19 00 to 1 60 to 5 00 V Bm U 25 to 90 to 100 MW11 130 0122h Molomovenioad cally 25 to 90 to 100 96 Lol warning MW11 131 0123h DB overload protection 0 to 10 to 100 o The underlined part indicates the factory setting 5 37 er to Y1 terminal function RUN N EX N AG N AR N DT1 N DT2 N DT3 LU TL T DT1 T DT2 KP STOP RDY MF DT SW M2 SW M3 BRK AL 1 A
421. ule refer to 5 Programming Specifications for more information We recommend you to refer to MICREX SX Series USER S MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS when you design your application program W Main features 1 Application execution function Executes an application program Controls tasks for application program default fixed period event 2 Support tool interface RS485 included in UPAC VG7S connection bus 1 channel 3 RAS functions Executes self diagnosis and notifies to the inverter 4 Other Data memory backup with battery This card enables you to realize controls such as dancer control tension control and orientation control easily With inverter link option OPC VG7 SI you can designate an inverter with UPAC installed as a master and connect up to twelve slave inverters 156 inverters for broadcasting to control these individual inverters An application program of UPAC runs at minimum execution period of 1ms The execution period increases to 2 3 4 or 32000ms depending on the size of a program You can assign up to 64W from static variables used in an application program to the function codes U01 to U64 user area of VG7 When you assign parameters for adjustment to this user area you can use the KEYPAD panel of VG7 to refer to or change the data without personal computer UPAC has some restrictions over SX series high performance CPU module NP1PS 32 The calendar function is not available and SX specific instructions a
422. ultistep speed 5 o 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min E NT MW 11 202 020Ah Multistep speed 6 witched according to C21 0 to 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 96 0 0 to 999 9 m min NT MW 11 203 020Bh Multistep speed 7 ched according to C21 T is ogeloerme Io olo o o 1016 ep speed 3 gerere ololo OJo 0 to 0 i Swi o 0 to 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C12 E N MW 11 204 020Ch Multistep speed 8 Switched according to C21 LI You can change the setting of the shaded setting code during operation The underlined part indicates the factory setting Stop operation to change the setting of the other functions 5 39 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 60 ms updating and referencing data High speed Written F code Varabi updating Name Setting range Type by name R Q to 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C13 c13 MW 11 205 020Dh Multistep speed 9 Switched according to C21 Yes i 0 to 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C14 c14 1 MW 11 206 020Eh Multistep speed 10 Switched according to C21 Yes 0 to 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 96 0 0 to 999 9 m min C15 c15 1 MW 11 207 020Fh Multistep speed 11 Switched according to C21 Yes 0 to S 24000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min C16 JN U MW 11 208 0210h ep speed 12 Switched accor
423. uring Remarks m gt gt code LCD screen t 4 oF meni operation 9 Max line speed USERP1 1 to 1000 1 to 1000 m min m min 150 150 m min Specify without fail U02 Min winding diameter DS USER P2 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 mm mm 1 90 90 mm o sse idus diameter that causes the maximum U03 Max winding diameter DL USER P3_ 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 mm mm 1 1270 1270 mm o U04 Material length Note 2 USER P4 0 to 1000 0 to 1000 mm mm 1 400 400 mm O sor ee fall for estimation of the winding gt Dancer roll position voltage 10000 40000 to Specify the voltage across Al1 and M at the loose x U05 Winding loose limit USER P5 Note 3 mV 1 0 0 mV o winding and tight feeding limits of the dancer roll o SN ELSE IUE to 10000 10000 mV SELMA o Feeding tight limit position in mV Dancer roll position voltage 140000 10000to Specify the voltage across Al1 and M at the tight U06 Winding tight limit USER P6 to 10000 10000 mV Note 3 mV 1 0 0 mV o winding and loose feeding limits of the dancer roll Feeding loose limit position in mV S NOS U07 Taper start winding diameter USER P7 0 to 2000 0 to 2000 mm mm 1 700 700 mm Specify 1 for U43 and 30 for E69 when taper output U08 Taper variable USER P8 ps 0 to 100 1 30 30 Oo is used and assign taper output to AOT U09 Line speed offset USER P9 NUN 1000 to 1000 mV 1 O O mV o Oto Multipli 1000 1 000 Specify to obtain 0
424. use of no change ame ub speed direction in position gt A B C PR D 1 Motor speed Orientation command Slow speed direction command lt At least 10ms Position change command Stop position command A Stop position command B Stop position command C Stop position command D Fig 4 2 16 4 39 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 2 8 2 Output signal The orientation completion signal and orientation signal can be output The off delay and on delay timers for these outputs can be specified These settings do not give effects on the positioning accuracy Table 4 2 13 Terminal Name of signal Assignment Description Y1 Orientation completion signal Universal DO ON upon completion of orientation Y2 Orientation signal U DO ON during orientation Specify the completion signal using the completion width setting function code Table 4 2 14 Name of parameter Setting ae Ne Name Indication on keypad panel range Description of setting 0 to 511 pulses Orientation Eoo ale UNO 05 completion USER P05 to ASE eee p width 511 orientation is within the pulse specified as the target stop position with this parameter Completion 0 UNO 06 width after USER P06 to orientation 511 0 to 511 pulses The orientation completion width is replaced with this setting after stoppage Within the orientation comple
425. ut addresses have been assigned in the global variable worksheet for UPAC and you do not need to assign again 5 2 2 3 Assigning address 1 System configuration with six VG7S s Slave VG7S Master VG7S Input output address on o 9 Zz o 2 5 Buruwe16oid 9VdN iri Cer rere Cee ee eee ce ey eo rr NENNEN Te MD RE amp QW4 181096QD448 ESI EI II EIS LI 50W are occupied for one VG7S Fig 5 2 9 5 16 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 5 UPAC Programming Specification Control variables IQ area 50W input output These control variables global variables assigned to Control Variables are available when you select VG7 six unit system When you use a variable select it from the Control Variables list or specify the table address IQ area to register the variable and mark the check box for availability in the system definition 1 INVI data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV 1 at high speed In addition INVI can exchange function codes F E C P H A o L U and M at about 60ms constant cycle
426. ut ten inverters controlling winding dancer tension ratio draw position and synchronization and so on A system having been controlled by an external PLC can be transformed into a rigid and high speed entirely digital system using the UPAC On the other hand in a medium system a distributed control system can be configured where driving control groups requiring high speed control are generalized through the UPAC and the host PLC generalizes and controls each group with operation commands and initial value setup or the like When compared with large systems the above mentioned system may not satisfy all the requirements because of lack of a control distribution function for two or more UPACS poor I O point count and poor trace memory Deliberate system examination is necessary according to the size of the system Refer to this section for approximate guidelines useful for the first examination of specifications 1 Example of application to small system The following figure indicates an example where three units of VG7S are linked via SI optical link option for tension control If I O points are insufficient an extension I O option DIO in the figure below is used and the PG option high speed pulse counter is applied for line speed detection The built in I O is used to control I O of general purpose inverters Tension commands and line speed commands are given in a digital or analog quantity from the external PLC or computer One unit
427. ute the advanced memory diagnosis or not 1 42 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 1 Preparation of System and Startup 3 CPU operation definition UPAC system definition The second property page of the UPAC system definition screen The watch dog timer setting in the Resource setting dialog box is displayed as in the left figure Speci Fig 1 3 45 CPU operation definition screen 4 Memory boundary definition UPAC system definition The third property page of the UPAC system definition screen The memory boundary set in the Resource setting dialog box is displayed as in the left figure Fig 1 3 46 Memory boundary definition screen 1 43 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor v Le E 2 as ao T7 am 5 a 3 5 I O group setting UPAC system definition The fourth property page of the UPAC system definition screen U operation definition Communication setting System configration defini Memory boundary definition Level DEFAULT m Input selection Minverter 1 Input Option 140 Input nverter 2 Input This screen associates the UPAC task level with the I O data area of inverter and defines refresh timing Inverter 3 Input nverter 4 Input nverter 5 Input nverter 6 Input Inverter 7 Input Details Inverter 8 Input Selecte
428. verter 1 Output word Name 13 Torque bias 14 Auxiliary speed setting 3 Torque current reference 4 Magnetic flux reference 5 Control data Cw 5 Universal DO1 standard DIDA4 option 1 3bit 7 Acceleration time 8 Deceleration time 9 Torque limiter level 1 10 Torque limiter level 2 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference W f 12 Torque reference 2 5 Real speed Simulation speed 16 Address of function code 1 of INV1 17 Data of function code 1 of INV1 Cancel 3 33 Fig 3 1 45 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 3 1 7 1 Program example A program example of two inertia systems 1s shown The control block diagram including the interface with VG7S and UPAC is shown in the figure below External UPAC 2 inertia system control block diagram disturbance torque Torque Motor speed command w Motor inertia t H Load inertia ae model Shaft model n model Load transmission torque Speed on load side Scale Scale conversion conversion Torque q Actual speed ce aaa aa a command 1 34 E Acceleration deceleration ASR calculation AE PI speed limiter etc Induction motor P01 simulation mode L Omitted 6 o p Speed detection simulation speed FRENIC5000V
429. verter 9 Output v sessi WIE Fig 2 2 7 In the 6 unit system 19W or more outputs cannot be selected for the output selection in the I O group setting of the system definition The data sent from UPAC to VG7 does not exceed 19W during regular operation If 19W or more items are selected check marks are placed a setting error of the user 1s probable In this state VG7 may cause illegal actions accompanying danger For this reason an operation procedure alarm is output to disable inverter operation In the case of input selection UPAC can refer to all the information of VG7 connected via the optical link In the 12 unit system 9W or more outputs cannot be selected for the output selection in the I O group setting of the system definition The data sent from UPAC to VG7 does not exceed 9W during regular operation If 9W or more items are selected check marks are placed a setting error of the user is probable In this state VG7 may cause illegal actions accompanying danger For this reason an operation procedure alarm is output to disable inverter operation In the case of input selection UPAC can refer to all the information of VG7 connected via the optical link 2 12 0 T 2 3 m x tv 3 o aiseg pue uoleiedaid efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 2 Preparation and Basic Operation Examples 2 2 3 4 Downloading
430. will be disabled Accident may result e As operations start suddenly if alarm is reset with a running signal input confirm that no running signal is input before resetting alarm Accident may result e When an alarm is activated the motor coasts If the motor needs to be stopped in such a case install a brake to the machine with the motor Accident may result e If AUTO RESTART is selected in the restart mode after momentary power failure function code F14 the inverter restarts automatically starting the motor rotation when the power is recovered Accident may result e When the tuning function code H01 is started the motor machine or equipment starts and stops repeatedly Ensure safety before performing tuning Accident may result e If the user set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this user s manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result e Do not touch inverter terminals when energized even if inverter has stopped Electric shock may result e Do not start or stop the inverter using the main circuit power Failure may result e Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot Burns may result e As the inverter can set high speed operation easily carefully check the performance of motor or machine before changing speed settings Injury may result Do not use the inverter braking function for mec
431. with tension pickup detection Wound diameter calculation using a line speed command and winding motor speed Tension taper calculation Automatic sampling for mechanical torque by automatically measuring mechanical loss Interface for a POD or a PLC for setting tension taper and various conditions Note that you need an additional option card for interface This package software is provided for free on the CD ROM for WPS VG7 PCL loader software We would like you to agree the following terms and conditions before you use this package to build your system Terms of Agreement We would like you to agree the following confirmation terms Otherwise you should not use the WPS VG7 TEN package software If you need information on the agreement please contact our sales representative 1 When you use the analog interface to build your system you should consult the VG7 User s Manual and apply sufficient measures for preventing noise 2 All function codes UOI to 64 for tension control are set to 0 on delivery For parameters you want to change their values you set these values 3 The battery included in the UPAC is used to back up the data The lifetime of the battery is five years at 25 C When the atmospheric temperature for the power supply you use is high the lifetime of the battery becomes shorter than five years When the lifetime of the battery expires the UPAC alarm ErA shows up and an end user should be ready for i
432. write on F07 QW3 13 8 9 Deceleration time 1 0 1s INT z Overwrite on F08 AQW3 14 9 a Torque limiter level 1 10000 100 INT A QW3 15 10 Torque limiter level 2 10000 100 INT QW3 16 11 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT amp Before ASR before V f during V f 2 calculation QW3 17 26 T AO AO1 of INV3 4000h 10V INT UPAC controls AO of INV3 5g AO used by INV3 are defined QW3 18 27 Z amp AO AO2 of INV3 INT as universal QW3 19 28 2 AO AO3 of INV3 INT QD3 20 31 SW Dynamic switch DSW DW Change data reflected on INV3 dynamically 5 25 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor 4 INV4 data The following table lists data exchanged between UPAC and VG7S INV4 In addition to UPAC you need inter inverter link option SI UPAC INV4 does not have a way to exchange data other than these Table 5 2 26 FS BS E REMAS Address No Area Name d EPRE Type See control block diagram for ata distinction g A more information 4 0 1 Speed setting 4 frequency reference 20000 Nmax INT Before ASR before V f monitor calculation IW4 1 2 S Torque reference 2 10000 100 INT After torque limiter IW4 2 6 3 Detected speed speed detection 20000 Nmax INT o IW4 3 7 E Control data CW standard DI
433. y 61q as 94 29A 940 lt 2s Oo O pu 9 oO MM a zs l Le l l oO o uonoe es 1030 ezag Q pups l Bumes Hope ep TET l O 9jeoipui seuoyMs D E Ie Jo seyejs 7 Lov bod zev 87d qu Le 1 1 poujaw poujeui Jequinu T lt b i l Jonuoo ZIN 104 U09 LY esind 9d ZN P E T ER NIE b 2 enjeApepeep Z uonoe4100 asind pejoejeg uoniuyep q7 Ea a d l C 09 F N ANITI S Ot renee L uonoeuuoo asind pej2ejeg uoniugep G7 ro jeuedavdasy 4equunu esind 1epoou3 uoniuyep 1 L V 205 E Mm lt p I l uone nojeo o o BEEN apes rei peeds eur1 OF gt S IS ovdn rt 99 UOno9 os xoeqpee4 SH eo e p ds eur uonoejep peeds oul 6ojeuy OIN SNITI LL jndjno 18AUP aul AG ad vd 02 jndino Ajejueuiejduioo AGE pue ASL g4 Od JOIN val jndyno esing 0 0 G L Jejeuiopaeds 12151q as H N L ZHO WI ZI 3 43 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor Cc 9 9 jo O m G 9 p e A TD en qu c 9 prar 9 O 0 Q E o o en i un O q oO c E o Ces o A a t e eo c o O oO 0 g4 4 vs jndino asind uonoejep uonsog uonejedo peziuoJuou S Jo3uoo uonisod Jeun g4 O val
434. y the input voltage at Ail when the dancer roll is at the loose or tight limit When the input voltage at Ail is at this setting the dancer roll position is supposed to be the 100 position When the middle voltage between the loose and tight limits is input the center position of the dancer roll is supposed The setting parameter varies according to the attaching position of the dancer roll between the winding machine and feeding machine Machine Voltage at loose limit Voltage at tight limit Winding machine U05 U06 Feeding machine U06 U05 Taper start winding diameter Setting 0 to 2 000 0 to 2 000 mm Taper variable Setting 0 to 100 0 to 100 z 3 hal 3 Ai 2 terminal function Setting 0 to 3 AO terminal function Setting 0 1 Ai2 terminal function Setting 0 to 18 e AO1 terminal function Setting 0 to 31 With this function a taper characteristic voltage suitable for the winding diameter is output To use this function U43 must be 1 and E69 must be 30 and taper output TP_AO1 must be assigned to AOI 4 9 efesotomasyon com Control Techniques emerson saftronics ac drive servo motor AO output 10y a ER Winding diameter U02 U07 U03 Min winding Taper start Max winding diameter winding diameter diameter Fig 4 1 6 1 When U43 is 1 and E50 is 14 the input at Ai2 becomes the gain concerning the taper variable U08 Taper variable U08 taper variable x

efesotomasyon.com - Control Techniques,emerson,saftronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents